t' ,0 c 4 <• xO O xV ,P, »:^' .>,v;^ %> .4^ J-^ ^ ^ T\ ^'^^"^ ..^- N^" ''^^. ^fim^'' "^ wA rO- N £ W ITALIAN GRAMMAR The rollowing" opinion of this Work, is extracted from " The Times/' '* We have been induced, on account of the reputation of the Author, to cast an eye over the Italian Grammar of Mr. Angelo Cerutti, a second edition of which has just been published; and we find it much superior to the elementaiy books usually employed in teaching the continental lan- guages. Those who have had the labour of wading through Veneroni, and other books of that kind, whei*e a confused mass of ill-digested observations and examples fatigue infinitely more than they instruct, and where rules are profusely given, without any explanation of the grounds on which they have been framed, or of the causes of the numerous exceptions from them, will readily appreciate the value of a Grammar in which principle and practice are successfully united. That the habit of learning by rote should still prevail to a considerable extent, is truly astonishing. Grammatical disqui- sitions are not necessarily Jacobinical, and yet it would seem that some persons revolt at a philosophic view of language, and turn aside from it with that sort of abhorrence which our self-styled practical statesmen display when required to examine any thing which they choose to call political theory. But, surely, in the acquisition of every description of knowledge,, it must be of advantage to exercise the understanding as well as the memory, and it may be presumed, that a rule will not be less well recollected, that the reasons for laying it down are clearly perceived. We are, therefore, glad to find that the Aulhor has so decidedly departed from the common routine, and that he has, besides, the merit — no slight one in a foreigner writing English — of alwa3's expressing his opinions intelligibly. M. Cerutti is a zealous champion of the pure Italian style, and laudably endeavours to extirpate from his mother tongue, the uncongenial Gallicisms to the intrusion of which it has recently been much exposed. This renders the Work a safe guide for the student who may be ambitious of acquiring a correct and classical Italian style." NEW ITALIAN GRAMMAR; OR, A COURSE OF LESSONS IN THE Stalfan Uattsuage* BY ANGELO CERUTTI. % SECOND EDITION, AUGMENTED AND IMPROVED. LONDON: i PRINTED FOR SHERWOOD, GILBERT and PIPER, PATERNOSTER-ROW ; DULAU AND CO., TREUTTEL and CO., SOHO-SQUARE; AND ROLANDI, BERNERS-STREET. ia3.3. '^C. \\®^> e.^ E. H. BLAGDON, PRINTER, (Successor to B. M' Vlillan), BOW-STREET, COVENT-GARDEN. TO THOMAS GRIFFIN, ESQ, DEAR Sill, The many and continued favours which I have received from you, would alone constitute you the most proper person to whom this Second Edition of my Grammar should be addressed, if the sound judgment and discrimination which you are known to possess^ did not, at the same time, induce me to dedicate its pages to you. In the hope that this attempt to facilitate the acquisition of the Italian Language, will be sanctioned by your approval, and in grateful recollection of the mul- tiplied instances of friendship to which I have alluded, I commit my Work to your kindness; and beg to subscribe myself, Sincerely and gratefully yours, ANGELO CERUTTI. August 15, 1828. PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. Questa sard luce nuova, sole This will be a new ligrht, a nuovo, lo quale surgerd new siin^ which will rise la dove V usato tramon- where the former sets, terd, e dard luce a color o and will enlighten those che sono in tenebre e in who are in darkness and oscuritd, per lo usato sole obscurity, as the old sun che a loro non luce. shines not for them*. Dante. Although it is generally remarked, that the Italian is the most beautiful of languages, }et the manner in which its beauties are enumerated by many, is often such, as to prove that they make the assertion only from hearsay, without specifying what is, in fact, that language which deserves to be thus highly extolled. If any excellencies are ascribed to the language which is now generally spoken, if its character is such as we find in the elementary books which are diffused through this country, and if any beauties are attributed to cer- tain compositions and translations which have been presented to the English, the general opinion is un- doubtedly erroneous. I can discover only a medley of foreign idioms, without any observance of gram- matical rules, entirely devoid of those peculiar and lively expressions which constitute the true spirit * Under the "new sun," Dante symbolizes tlie Italian language; under "the old," the Latin. VUl PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. of our language, and filled with words which are neither to be found in our authors, nor even in dictionaries. This confusion proceeds from every one considerino^ himself authorized to introduce barbarous words and expressions, provided he change the termination of the former, and apply Italian words to the latter; from the erroneous and foolish opinion which some entertain, that it is sufficient to be born an Italian, and to peruse some trifling romances, to have authority to judge and to decide. The neiv light, the neiv sun, alluded to in the above prophecy of Dante, he, and after him, Petrarch, Boccaccio, &c. called fortfc, and caused to diffuse its light on our horizon. He, however, did not mean that Italian v/ould be the language, as it is generally termed, of singers and women only, but of philosophers and of the Muses ; he foretold that it would be the medium by which philosophy (which was in that age confined to a small number of learned men who understood Greek and Latin) would be communicated to every capacious mind, and extended to every nation ; as, in that age, Italy alone enjoyed its enlightening influence*. Those who peruse the best authors, will find that our language is equally adapted to amorous strains and sublime conceptions, to vigorous compositions, and to a strict and orderly representation of our ideas. * Questo sura quel pane orzato del quale si satolleranno migliaia — " This is the barley bread upon which thousands will feed." — Dante; still meaning the Italian language. PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. IX To those who affirm that those are old authors, and that Italian, like every other language, has changed, and continues to change daily, I answer, that these innovations will certainly end in the total destruction of our language, if unopposed, or if we ourselves assist its decadence. Those authors, however old, created and established the beautiful language, as it is justly te'rmed ; and its beauties will exist in their works alone, if we deviate from their example. Our modern writers are at last sen- sible of it; and those who wish to make an impres- sion on the minds of their readers, have recourse to the old school. 'The difference, however, between the study of what is now called Italian, and the language which was transmitted to us by our best authors, is such, that he who endeavours to acquire the former, overcome with weariness and disap- pointment, is at last obliged to abandon his under- taking; while he who applies himself to the latter, finds at each advance, new sources of gratification. One of the firmest opponents of the threatened destruction, is Biagioli, who, perceiving the im- pending fall of the Italian language, exclaimed against the assailants ; and, to put an end to the devastation, dispersed the clouds with which ig- norance had veiled its beauties, and established its grammar upon the authority of the ancient writers and of reason*. Attracted by the real * To his Commentaries on Dante, Petrarch, and Buonarroti, we are indebted for the new lustre which our literature has lately acquired. C X PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. science which his work evinces, and desirous of placing the Italian language in a true point of view before the English Nation ; as also to contribute in some degree to preserve the glory which yet re- mains to my Country, I determined to compose this Grammar upon a similar plan, for the use of those who seek rational pleasure and solid improvement in the liberal pursuit of knowledge. I was principally induced to compile this work, by remarking that other Grammars are filled with verbs and nouns only, and teach the Student little beyond the mere demand for bread and water ; in- asmuch as they are destitute of the more important parts of syntax ; and the few rules which they con- tain, are given without the assistance of reasoning, and founded upon the simple assertions of the gram- marian. I have endeavoured, even in the etymology, to exercise the mind of the Student ; and all the rules laid down throughout this work, are founded upon quotations from the best authors, whose names are to be found at the end of each example. Should my work obtain the approbation of the Public, and the errors into which the Amateurs of Italian have been hitherto led, be averted through my efforts ; and should the mode I have endea- voured to point out, be adopted, I shall think myself amply compensated for the time and labour which I have necessarily bestowed upon the composition of the following pages. PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. The object and intent of my Grammar having been sufficiently explained in the Preface to the First Edition, in committing a Second to the press, I conceive it to be necessary merely to make the following additional observations. With every reason to be satis^ed at the success which has hitherto attended my Work, I regret to state an opinion which has been somewhat hastily adopted ; viz. that it is by no means calculated for the in- struction of children. Before I answer this sweeping denunciation, I involuntarily digress, for the con- sideration of an absurd custom of teaching Italian by means of the French language. The Professors who advocate this system, censure my mode of reasoning, as being too complicated; yet have no hesitation in perplexing a child, by employing two foreign languages at once. They purpose thereby, to instruct the Pupil in both at the same moment, yet they cause him, in fact, even to lose the use of his own ; as, in studying a foreign language through the medium of our own, we insensibly improve in both ; but if, in the acquisition, we employ a third, it will altogether produce so thorough a confusion, c2 XU PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. that, in place of expanding the mind, it will serve only to enchain it. To the remark, that Italian and French are so nearly akin, that a knowledge of the one smooths the path towards accomplishing the other, I have merely to observe, that there is certainly a considerable resemblance with respect to the similarity of words; but, as regards style, they so essentially differ, that a non-acquaintance with French is of no slight utility to the Student who desires to write in pure Italian. From this close resemblance of words, it would appear, that, bv translating" verbatim French into Italian, we should effect a style tolerably correct; yet such a proceeding, although intelligible, would only tend to de[)rive the latter of its natural grace, vigour, and perspicuity. The absurdity, however, increases, if we reflect, that, by this principle, both Master and Scholar avail themselves alike of a foreio^n language ; and although it is probable that one may not be properly versed in French, yet what can be expected when both are equally ignorant of their medium of communication, as I have in some cases witnessed? but still they persevere upon this erroneous system, rather than make use of the English language. The above observations I have frequently made in schools, where the pupils have been too young even to be w^ell acquainted wilh their own language. If the reasons which I adduce were not sufficient to support my opinion, I should cite the Master of all Grammarians, Dumarsais, PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. Xlll who sa^s, Les regies d'une langue ne doivent se tirer que de cette langue meme. I should, in the first instance, have been willing to admit, that my mode of teaching would not be altogether so well adapted for children as for adults ; I, however, lately gave my system a fair trial, in the case of a young lady, scarcely eleven years of age, and who was barely acquainted even with the principles of English. That I had at first some diflSculty, I confess, as she frequently very candidly answered me, '^ I do not under- stand ivhat you meanf but as I agree with Dante, that it is impossible to proceed in any thing, if the foundation be not first of all laid down, I commenced ab initio ; and by making her com- prehend the terms Article, Adjective, Verb, &c. have within six months succeeded in making her fully understand my reasoning ; as for instance, page 98, Rule V. and which is by no means easy, when the object of possession is related to the person repre- senting the subject of the preposition, &c. ; so that she is enabled to proceed, and is now writing the fourteenth Exercise on the particle si; while, far from retrograding in English, she has actually made advances by the principles of general Gram- mar; and hence I conclude, that if ray method is serviceable, even for children who possess no grammatical principles, it must be of at least equal utility to those of maturer age. It is to me scarcely conceivable, how parents can XIV PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. desire that their children should follow the usual dull routine, which is highly calculated to stifle whatever natural capacities the}' may possess, rather than that they should learo by naethod of reasoning, which would develop those faculties, and by giving them additional strength, have an influence not only on their study of languages, but in facilitating the acquisition of any science to which they might afterwards apply their energies. It is here necessary for me to anticipate a possible observation, that my Work is filled with Exercises alone. In the first place, I assert that, were the Student to run through all the Rules, without mak- ing the proper application, he would not unlikely sink under so uninteresting an occupation ; whereas, by making the application after each Chapter, the dulness of the study is alleviated, and indeed ren- dered even amusing. In the next place, I highly dis- approve (as I state in the Introduction to the Pro- miscuous Exercises) of translation from English into Italian, unless the original be extracted from Italian authors, that the Scholar may not form a false style, but from the commencement acquire a pure and correct taste. I certainly cannot expect from my Pupils, what will he desired by the London University, namely, that ivhen they understand thoroughly the nounsj pronouns, and verbs (which difficult and abstruse science may be communicated in three lessons), they translate either viva voce, impromptu, or in ivriting PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. XV from an English author ! ^ Students who breathe the scientific air of an University, probably inhale at the same moment just ideas of syntax and style, and would not therefore make translations like those which we have supposed in pages 298 and 295; and the Professor must really have a wonderful talent, to correct viva voce such impromptus according to the spirit of the Italian language. There are, in the present Edition, forty-four Exercises, and when the Student has written all of them, there will be little danger of his adopting an impure and inaccurate style ; and, in this light, I cannot but consider them as a real treasure for the learner. In conclusion, I may almost cease to regard this book as a Grammar, and term it, instead, A Course of Lessons'^. I may consequently insert in its pages, whatever I think most calculated to aid the progress of my Pupils, and by this means also, avoid imposing on any Professor, the necessity of making use of my Work, if he should not approve of its contents. * See the Second Statement of the Council of the University of London, page 111. f I have generally found, that a new Pupil, if already provided with a Grammar, is unwilling to incur the double expence attending the purchase of a second. I cannot allow this opportunity to escape, of remarking, that mine is not, in fact, so much a Grammar^ as the Course of my Lessons; and having shown, and I trust satisfactorily, that the productions dignified with the title of "^ Grammar f^' are either altogether useless as a medium of communica- tion, or calculated to engender a spurious feeling for the Italian language, I may surely be allowed to give a preference to the results of my own expe- rience, and the fruit of severe study; and it would little prove my judgment, were I to avail myself, in giving lessons, of any such compilations, which I so entirely disapprove. AUTHORS CITED IN THIS WORK. D. Dante, Divina Commedia, and Convito. P. Petrarca, Rime. B. Boccaccio, Decanter one, Fiammetta, Urbano. F. Firenzuola, Commedie, M. Macchiavello, Storie Florentine. G. Gelli, Capricci del Boltajo, and Sporta. Caro, Lettere. Bentivoglio, Lettere. Crusca, Dizionario, ITALIAN GRAMMAR. CHAP. I. ITAL!AN ALPHABET. Italian Characters. English . Sounds. a, - a, as in - far. e close. - e. - - faint. e open, t*, - . - ~ e, ■ . " . " fair. medium. close. - 0, - - rove. open, 6t, - - - 0, - - storm. prudence. globe. c, - - - c, - - - chain. d, - - - d. - . code. f^ " ' - f. - safe. g". A, - - : "■ ~ ~ gem. I. - ' - - 1, - - pale. m, - ni, - - come. n, - 1^, - - lane. p, - - - - - ripe. quadrant. fair. s, - - - Al - - season. ^ - t, - . - - g-ate. w. - V, - - live. s, - - - Jdz, ^tz, ~ "" medso. Switzerland. * There is another letter j introduced, at the end of words, instead of the double i; as tempj for tempii, the temples. + When this letter is uttered alone, it maybe sounded either he, as heard in bay, or be, as in beer. Both these sounds may likewise be applied to the consonants c, d, g, t, and v ; then, with Italian characters, they are ex- pressed either be, ce, de, or hi, ci, dl. X This letter is only used in the following forms of the verb avere: namely, ho, I have ; hai, thou hast ,- hci, he has ; hannn, they have ; that they may not be confounded with the words o, or ; ai, to the ; «, to ; aniio, year ; it is not, hov/ever, aspirated. It is also used as an auxiliary letter, to supply the imperfections of our alphabet; as we shall see in the following table ; and it is added to some interjections, to support and lengthen the sound of the vowel. § The letter r is pronounced as forcibly and audibly in the middle, and at the end of a word, as at the beginning ; like Ihnne, ramble. II This letter has two sounds ; the one, sharp, as in the words sale, salt ; solito, accustomed ; — the other, flat, as in rusuy rose ; pausa, pause. B Table of the most remarkable Sounds of the Italians Language*, Italian Sounds. English Sounds. Example IS. Ca, ka, as in calm ; Campo, camp. Co, close, ko. colon ; Colmo, height. Co, open, ko, coin ; Corpo, body. Cu, ku, cuckoo ; Curro, roller. Ce, close, clia. chase ; Cencio, rag-. Ce, apen, ehai, chair ; Cervo, hart. a, che, cheer ; Cirro, wig-. Che, close, ka. cape ; Chente, whatever. * I have to observe, that Italian words must be pronounced with a very clear and distinct articulation ; vowels, especially the a, the open e and o, must be uttered in a loud voice ; the sound must rise from the throat,- without any aspiration; the mouth must be open. Every letter is pro- nounced ; double consonants, combinations of several vowels — all are dis- tinguished. In the word miei, for instance, the three vowels are distinctly heard from the mouth of an Italian ; (I must insist upon this point, because, in this, the English require to be stimulated when they undertake the study of our language) ; there is only one exception ; iu the combinations of the letters cia, cio, ciu; gia, gio, giu; scia, scio, sciu ; the i, when not accented, serves only to soften the sound occasioned by the other two letters coming in contact, and is, as it were, stifled by them . Generally, when I have a new pupil,- I find a defect, which, from having made too great an impression, it is often diflficult to eradicate : I mean the cadence upon the last vowel, when it is not marked by the accent. This, no doubt, proceeds from having previously learnt French. We have, as in English, an accent upon every word which is suscep- tible of emphasis, the place of which varies ; as rhtolano, they rolf; cardine, a hinge ; polo, pole ; sono, he sung, &c. Articles, prepositions, simple conjunctions, and particles, have therefore no accent. This variation of the accent^ constitutes one of the most important parts of the harmony of languages; and we must, for this reason, be particular in this delicate point of pronunciation. When the accent falls upon the last vowel, it is always marked ; and, in that case, the word being shortened, the accentuation of this last vowel ought to be forcible and short. I do not mark the accent, as some have done, to show the student where it falls, unless it be upon the last syllable ; because I do not think it right to accustom him to an accent which he will not meet with in Italian books. There is a particular variation of the accent in verbs. Rotolare, for instance, to roll, makes rhtolo, I roll ; rhtolano, they roll ; rotolando, in rolling ; rotolo, he rolled ; rotolerb, I will roll. As there is a sensible difference of sound between the e and o open and close, I give several examples of each in the following table, Italian Sounds. English Sounds. Examples. Che, open. kai, as in care ; Chermisi, crimson. Chi, ke. key; Chimica, chymistry. Cia, cha. charm ; Ciarla, babble. Cie, cheai; , Cieco, blind. Cio, close. cho, chose ; Cionco, broken. do, open, cho, choice ; Ciocca, cluster. Ciu, chu, choose ; Ciurma, crow. See, sha. shame ; Soever 0, severed. See, shai. share ; Scena, scene. Scia, sha. shard ; Sciancato, lame. Scio, close, sho. show ; Biscione, a large serpent. Scio, open, sho. short ; Sciocco, stupid. Sciu, shii, shoe ; Asciutto, dry. Schia, skea, (the a of far) ; Schiatta, issue. Schie, close. ske-a, (the a of fate) ; Schietto, simple. Schie, open. ske-ai } ~ Schiena, back. Schio, close. skio. - Schiodare,io unnail. Schio, open, skio. - Schioppo, gun. Ga, g*a, pronounced broad ; GarruU, talker. Ge, close. g-e, reg-ent ; Geto, jess. Ce, open. g-e. jest; Genero, son-in-law. at. g-i. g-in; Gita, walk. Ghe, close, g-e, g^ame; Ghes^o, black. GAe, open, ge, g-et; Gheppio, hawk. G/ii, g-e, geese ; Intrighi, intrigues. Gia, ja. jaunt; Giallo, yellow. Gio, close. jo. joke ; Giovane, young. G^eo, open. jo. joy; Giove, Jupiter* Giu, j»» jurist; Giuhba, waistcoat. Gli*, k Egli, he. Gna, ^ Romagna, Romania. Gne, J Agnello, lamb. I mig^ht, could, would, or should have. Saresti, Avrest% Sarebbe, Avrebhe, - Saremmo, Avremmo, Sareste, Avreste, Sarebbero. Avrebbero, Imperative Mood. Sii, Be. Abbi, - Hava. Sia, - Let him be. Abbia, jLet him hava. Siamo, Abbiamo, State, Abbiate, Siano^, Abbiano, Subjunctive Mood. PRESENT. Che sia, That I be, or 1 Che abbia, That I have, or may be. 3 may have. Che sia, Che abbia, Che sia, Che abbia, Che siamo, Che abbiamo, Che siate, Che abbiate, Che siano, Che abbiano, IMPERFECT. Che fossi. That I were, or ) Che avessi. That I had, or mig-ht be. y Che fossi, Che avessi, Che fosse, Che avesse, Che fossimo, Che avessimo, Che foste, Che aveste, Che fosserop Che avessero, mig-ht have. * We say also sicno; but siano is more used in familiar discourse. Compound Tenses. Essere »tato, - To have been. Avcre avuto, To have had< Essendo stato, - Having been. Avendo avuto^ Having had. So7io stato, or stata, I have been, &c. Ho avuto, - I have had, &c. iSiawo */rt/t,or ^^a/e,&c. We have been, &c. Abbiamo avuto. We have had, &C. Era stato, &c. Aveva avuto, &c. Sard stato, &c. Avrei avuto, &c. Che sia stato, &c. Che abbia avuto, 8cc, Che fossi stato, &c. Che avessi avuto, &c. The Conjugation of regular Vet'bs. All the infinitive moods of verbs end in are, ere, or ire: cliiamare, to call; perdere, to lose; servire, to serve. These three verbs, conjugated as follows, may be considered as models of all the others. Infinitive Mood. Chiamare, To call. Perdere, To lose. Servire, To serve. PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Chiamando, Calling. Perdendo, Losing-. Servendo, Serving". PAST PARTICIPLE. Perduto, Lost. Indicative Mood. PRESENT. Pef^do, I lose. Perdi, Perde, Perdiamo*, Perdete, Perdono, Chiamato, Called. Servito, Served. Chiamo, Chiami, Chiama, Chiamiamo, Chiamate, Chiamano, I call. Servo, Servi, Serve, Serviamo, Servile, Servono, serve. * Remark. — If the accent in the first person of the singular, falls either upon an e or an o open, those two vowels take the close sound whenever the accent passes upon a following vowel ; and as the accent is placed upon the first syllable only in the three persons of the singular, and the third of the plural of the present tenses, the e and o are open only in these instances. Then pronounce the e of perdo a^ in pair, and the e of perdiamo as in pale; the o( porto, I bear, as in wor; and the o of portiamo, we bear, as in store. :preterite imperfect. Chiamava, I called, ■^ Perdeva did call, ( or was J calling. J Chiamavi, Chiamava, Chiamavamo, Chiamavate, Chiamavano, I lost, "j Serviva, did lose, ( or was f losing. J Perdevi, Servivi, Perdeva, Serviva, Perdevamo, Servivamo, Perdevate, Servivate, Perdevano, Servivano, I served^ did serve, or was serving. PRETERITE PERFECT. Chiamai, I called,") Perdei, or did call. Chiamasti, Chiamb, Chiamammo, Chiamaste, Chiamarono, / Perdesti, Perd^, Perdemmo, Perdeste, Perderono, I lost, 1 Servii, or did > lose. J Servisti, Servi"*, Servimmo, Serviste, Servirono, I served, or did serve. FUTURE. Chiamerd, I will, "j Perderd, or shall > call. J Chiaraerai, Chiamerd, Cliiameremo, Chiamerele, Chiameranno, Perderai, Perderd, Perderemo, Perderete, Perderanno I will, 1 Servird, or shall > lose. J Servirai, Servird, Serviremo, Servirete, , ServirannOj I will, or shall serve. * I have observed that the English have great difficulty at first in marking the accent upon the final vowel in Italian. We see that in the three regular verbs, the third persons of the perfect, chiamoy perde, servl, are written with the same letters as the first, third, and second of the present of their respective verbs, viz. chiamo, perde, servi; the only difference consisting in the accent ; so that if we do not make the necessary distinction, we confound them. The English word ago, is an instance of the mode of accentuating the last vowel, although a slight one ; because, in Italian, when the accent is upon the last vowel, the sound is not protracted, but short and forcible. Co7iditional Mood. Chiamerei, I might, ^ Perderei, ^ might,") Servirei, I might, could, i could, could, would, ^ would, [>■ woiild, or or should or should should call. J lose. J serve. Chiameresti, Cliiamerehbe, Chiameremmo^ , Chiamereste, Chiamerebbero, Chiamaf, Call. Chiami, Perderesti, Perderebbe, PerderemmO) Perdere>^te, Perderebbero, Sei^viresti, Seivirebbe, ServirernJiio, Servireste, Servirebbero, Let him ~) Perda, call, j Chiamiamo, Perdiamo, Chiamate, Perdete, Chiamino, Perdano, Imperative Mood. Perdi, Lose. Servi, Let himl Serva, lose. / Serviamo, Servile, Servano, Serve. Let hiui serve. Subjunctive Mood: Che chiami, That n Che perda call, or I may ( call. J Che chiami, Che chiami, Che chiamiamo, Che chiamiate, Che chiamino. PRESENT. That lose, or maj lose ^a Che perda,. Che perda, Che perdiamo, Che perdiate, Che perdano, may f Che serva. That I serve, or may serve. Che serva, Che serva, Che serviamo, Che serviate, Che sef^vano, Che chiamassi^^^^} 'called, or might ' call. Che chiamassi, Che chiamasse, Che chiamassimo, Che chiamaste, Che chiamassero, IMPERFECT. I Che perdessi,'^^^^^ ^ or might ( ' lose. Che perdessi, Che perdesse, Che perdessimo, Che perdeste, Che perdessero, Che servissi, That I served, or might serve. Che servissi, Che servisse, Che servis.nmo, Che serviste, Che servissero. * The English scholar should be cai*eful in sounding double consonants, which are of importance in Italian ; for, in many instances, the double con- sonant changes the signification of a word ; as appears from this form of the verb, and the first of the future plural. + This person is, only in the singular, expressed by the infinitive, when attended with a negative : 7ion cantarc, do not sing ; no?i chiainarc, do not call. C 10 COMPOUND TENSES. Avere chiamato, perduto, servilo, to have called, lost^ served, &c. Ho chiamato, perduto, servito, I have called, lost, served, &c. The others are compounded in the same manner. OBSERVATIONS. In order to conjugate a regular verb by the preced- ing table, we change the letters which precede are, ere, ire, of the above verbs, into those of the verbs which we are about to conjugate, and which likewise pre- cede are, ere, ire. Thus, to conjugate the verb cam- pare, to escape, by chiamare, we change the letters chiam into camp, in every person, tense, and mood. Nothing is required in interrogation, but a different tone of the voice, the verb being, in that case, gene- rally followed by its subject The negative ought always to be placed before the verb. In the verbs ending in glare, dare, sciarc, as man- glare, to eat; cacciare, to chase; lasciare, to leave, &c. in which the i modifies the syllable ga, ca, and sea, w^e must write the future and conditional without the i, thus: mangerd, manget^ei ; lascerd, lascerei; caccerd, cac- cerei, &c. In those ending in ca7'e, gare, scare, a.sfab- bricare, to build ; shrigare, to hasten ; trescare, to dance ; an h is to be supplied before the e and i, to preserve the hard sound : fabbrichi, trescherd, sbrigherei. The regular verbs of the second conjugation, have generally two terminations in the following persons of the perfect tense: perdei or perdettl ; perde ox perdette ; perderono or per dettero. 11 CHAP. in. OF GENDER. There are two genders in the Italian language — the masculine and the feminine: the one denotes ani- mals of the male kind, and all the objects to which the masculine gender has been assigned; the other desig- nates animals of the female kind, and all the objects to which the feminine gender has been ^attributed, in the same manner as the English assign the feminine gender to a ship. The following nouns are masculine : 1. Those ending in o; except rnano, hand. 2. In me,' except arme, arm ; /ame, hunger; «peme (a poe- tical word), hope. 3. In re; except febbre, fever; polvere, dust; scui'e, axe; torre, tower. 4. In nte; except gen^e, people; lenle , iQiitW '^ wenf c, mind ; semente, seed. The following are feminine : 1. Those ending in a; except papa, pope; anatema, ana- thema ; poema, poem ; tema, theme ; pianeta, planet ; and all those which have been adopted from the Greek. 2. In i; except ahbicci, alphabet; barbagianni, owl; di, day ; and those which are compounded of this word ; Luncdi, Mondsiy \ Martedi, Tuesday; MercoZec?2, Wed- nesday ; Giovedt, Thursday; Venerdi, Friday; bi^in- disi, toast ; ecclissi, eclipse ; diesi, diesis ; ambassi, ambs-ace. All the nouns ending in ^, which have no singular, are also excepted. 3. Inu; except Corfu, Corfu; Peru, Peru; ragu, ragout; meu, meon, a kind of herb. With regard to the termination e, we have remarked, that nouns ending in me, re, and nte, are masculine. When the e is preceded by any other consonant, the c2 12 noun is generally feminine ; yet, as the exceptions are many, it is better to have recourse to a dictionary. All nouns ending in one, which in English end in tioriy as affliction, afflizione; consideration, coiisiderazione ; and those ending in me, formed by an adjective, as consiietudine, custom ; mansuetudine, mildness, are fe- minine. Words of both Genders. Aere,Si\Y', arbor e, XvQe\ trave, he^m^ career e, prison (its plural is feminine only); cenere, ashes (the plural ceneri is feminine on\y) ;Jine, end ; folgore, thunder; fonte, fountain ; fronle, forehead (feminine in prose: of both genders in poetry) ; Genesi, Genesis ; margine, scar ; nocei walnut, feminine; noee, walnut-tree, masculine : oste, host, landlord, masculine ; oste, host, army, feminine. GHAP. IV, OF NUMBER. The plural is distinguished from the singular by a change of the final vowel, as follows : Masculine Nouns. Rules. a changes into e — ' — ■' — '■ io to chio glio cio gio aio ca CO ' go ^. i. i. i- a, chi. glL ci. gi. oj. chi. chi. ghi. Singular. Poemq,, Padre, Ruscello, Premio, Pendio, Occhio, Naviglio, Spaccio, Faggio, Lihraio, Duca, Cerchio, Luogo, poem, father, rivulet, reward, declivity, eye, ship, despatch, beech-tree, bookseller, duke, circle, place. Plural. poemi. padri. ruscellii premj. pendii. occhi. navigli. spacci. fasg\- libraj. duchi, cerchi. luoghi. Whatever the terminations of masculine nouns may be, their plural is always formed by changing the last 13 vowel of the singular into i. There are some words of irregular termination, as uomo, man; uomini, men; Dio, God; Dei^ Gods; hue, ox; buoi, oxen, i?6, king, does not change in the plural. Nouns ending in cMo, glio, do, gio, are rendered plural by suppressing the last vowel ; the i being in the singular, only as a modification of sound. Nouns ending in co and go, consisting only of two syllables, require an h in the plural, before the last vowel ; except the three following : Greco, Greek ; porco, hog; mago, magician; which make Greci, porci, magi. Nouns ending in co, composed of more than two syllables, change that termination into clii, when- ever there is a consonant before it; but if preceded by a vowel, CO is changed into d, except the following words : abaco, desk ; antico, ancient ; carico, load ; (iprico, exposed to the sun ; heccafico, beccafigo ; pu- dico, chaste ; rammarico, complaint ; fondaco, ware- house ; manico, handle ; opaco, opaque ; fraffico, traffic ; uhhriaco, drunk ; and some others, which take an h in the plural. As to the words ending in go, of more than two sylla- bles, this termination is changed into ghi ; except some^ as asparago, asparagus ; teologo, theologian, &c. Feminine Nouns. Rules. Singular. Plural. a changes into e. Pentola, pot; pentole, e i^ Madre, mother; madri, i. Mano, hand ; mani. da ce. Cacda, chase ; cacce. gia ge. Spiaggia, sea-shore ; spiagge. gia ■ gie. Bugia, lie ; bugte, ca che. Barca, boat; harche. ga ghe. Strega, witch; streghe. 14 Feminine nouns ending in a, change that vowel into e ; those which end in e or o, change those vowels into i, in the plural. The terminations c?a and gia^ are resolved into ce and ge; unless the accent be on the penultima, as in hugia, lie, &c. in which it is neces- sary to preserve the i in the plural ; because, in that case, it is an integral part of the word 3 whilst, in the former, it serves only to smooth the sound. Termi- nations in ca and ga, are transformed into die and gJie, without exception. Invariable Terminations . Singular. Plural. a Caritdy charity ; caritd. b Pib, foot; pib. i Crisi, crisis ; crisi. u Virtu, virtue; pirtu. ie Specie, species ; specie* Every word ending with an accented vowel, is inva- riable; for this reason, that, from the yfox^s virtute, caritate, bontate, &c. as they were used formerly, which make, in the plural, virtuti, caritati, bontati^ the last syllable being cut off, they remain the same hoWi in the singular and in the plural. Feminine nouns ending in i and ie, are also invariable, except moglie, wife, which makes mogli. PARTICULAR REMARKS. Ciglio, eye-brow; cigli or ciglia, eye-brows. Braccio, arm ; hracci or hraccia, arms. Lahhro, lip ; lahbri or lahbra, lips. Several nouns which end in o, terminate, in the pluraJ, both in i and a. It is to be remarked, 1. That one is often preferable, from elegance, harmony, or use ; as, in familiar discourse, the termination a; 2. That when we employ the noun with the termina- tion a, the articles and adjectives relating to them agree with the feminine gender. The word kgno, wood, has three forms in the plural : legni, legne, legna. The first is the general noun; the second and third denote the wood for fuel. Miglio, mile, makes miglia; paio, a pair, paia; centinaioy hundred, migliaio, thousand, make ceritinaia, migliaia. Some nouns, from the nature of the thing which they express, are used only in the singular— as orgo- glio, i^Yide; pigrizia, sloth; and others only in the plural — as nozze, wedding; molle, tongs. Singular. Plural. Ai^ma, } Arme, ? Arme, I'^^^Pon- Armi, J' weapons. ^ ' > ode. ri • ? odes. Canzone, ) Canzom, y Fronda, K . Fronde, ) |„__ Fronde, T^^^' Frondi, } ^^^^^s* A word which has two terminations in the singular, undergoes the variations already mentioned. CHAP. V. CONNECTION AND DEPENDENCE OF WORDS. lo consiglio voi. P. I advise you. As in our language there are no cases, we shall term the person or thing which governs the verb, the subject; 16 and that which bears the action, the object: conse- quently, in the sentence io consiglio vol — io is the subject, and voi the object. Here let the student observe, that instead ol' em- ploying in this Grammar the words nominative and accusative, which are quite useless, either in English or Italian, we will always make use of the word sul)- ject for the former, and object for the latter. The other cases, viz. genitive, dative, &c. which are sup- plied in modern languages by prepositions, are in this work styled relations; for what is the office of pre- positions, but to establish relations between words, and to denote in what position one thing stands with regard to another? The preposition di, for in- stance, implies that one thing is the quality of an- other; the preposition a, indicates that one tends to another ; the preposition da, that one proceeds from another; the preposition per, that one passes through another. &c. The relations between words being therefore pointed out by prepositions, we will now speak of the pro- priety of the most important of these ; and, in another chapter, treat of those circumstances in which they appear to deviate from the character assigned to them in the following definition. The principal word which occurs in a proposition, is the verb, as it may form a proposition by itself; for instance, piove, it rains. The second is the noun ; but as the noun is generally preceded by the article, and as the article is very often joined to a preposition, we shall, for this reason, endeavour now to give an idea of the natui-e of prepositions : 17 II. 1. La gratitudine di Tito. B. Titus's gratitude. 2. Dispose d'aprirgli il suo He resolved to disclose to him bisogno. B. his necessity. 3. Le latora di rosai e di The sides were enclosed with gelsomini eran chiuse. B. rose-trees and jessamines. The preposition di, is employed to designate one or several words which qualify another; and is therefore, when joined to the qualifying word, equivalent to an adjective. Italian does not admit of placing the pos- sessed or qualified word after the possessor or qualifier, as in the first English example ; in translating into Italian, the words must be re-established in their direct construction —T/.e gratitude of Titus. The pre- position di, corresponds with of. The apostrophe supplies the i of the preposition, when followed by a word beginning with a vowel. The preposition di, supplies the English preposition to, before an infinitive, when that infinitive qualifies the preceding word ; and, generally, the preposition ivith, after an adjective or a participle, as in the second and third examples. From the third example it is evident, that prepo- sitions ought to be repeated before every noun of the same sentence, unless there be some relation between them ; as, for instance, between the words nohilta and ricchezza, of the following example from Boccaccio : Egli era noto a ciascuno per la nohiitd, e ricchezza del padre — He was known to every one, from his father's nobility and wealth. 18 III. 1. lo voglio andare a Roma. I wish to go to Rome, B. 2. A me non si conviene. B. It does not become me. 3. Ad Abraam rivolto, disse. Having- turned to Abraham, ,B. he said... The term towards which^, motion, and figuratively, an action, or an idea tends, is indicated by the pre- position a. The letter d is generally added to this preposition, when it is followed by a word beginning with a vowel ; and especially in the case of the a, as in the third example. It corresponds to the English preposition to, and sometimes supplies at, when it denotes tendency ; as, for instance, " look at him ;" pon mente a lui. As the English preposition to, before an infinitive, marks the relations both of qualification and of ten- dency, and as those two relations are indicated in Italian by the two prepositions di and a, 1 have ob- served, that many experience difliculty in making the proper application of them, especially if the word pre- ceding the preposition to, be a verb. Now, if that verb may be supplied by a substantive, and the pre- position to by of, as, '' he resolved to disclose ;" or, " he made the resolution of disclosing ; he wishes to see you ;" or, " he has the desire of seeing you," it is then evident, that di must be employed — dispose d'aprire; desidera di vedervi. But if such change can- not take place, and the word preceding the preposition express motion or tendency, as, *' she ran to embrace him ;" " 1 prepared myself to resist the strife," we, in that case, make use of a — lo corse ad ahhracciare; mi pi'eparava a sostener la guerra. 19 IV. 1. La fineslra era molto alta The window was very big-h da terra. B. from the ground. 2. lo fui da tutti benigna- I was kindly received by all. mente accolto. B. 3. Da Ottaviano tutti son They are all liberated by liherati. B. Octavian. The preposition da, marks the point from which one departs, and, figuratively, the cause, the agent, from or by which the action or eflfect is produced. It answers to the preposition from, and generally supplies hy, after a participle past, when the pre- position is applied to the agent by which it is per- foimed; as in the third and fourth examples. It does not admit of elision, as we see in the third example. V. 1. Era in luogo assai solita- It was in a very lonesome rio. B. place. 2. Al presente e in povero She is at present in a state of stato, B. poverty. 3. Tanto in Firenze dimoro She remained at Florence che.., B. till... In, serves to mark the place of station, and, figura- tively, the state or manner of being or acting, with reference also to time. It represents in and into; and supplies at, when it indicates station. VI. 1. Connoi venite, D. Come with us. 2. lo con queste mani lo 1 plucked it with my own strappai. B. hands. The character of the preposition con, is to point out the person in whose company we are proceeding, living, or acting; and, figuratively, the means by which we perform something ; answering, in fact, to with, d2 20 vir. \. Lasciane andar per li tuo' Allow us to g-o through thy sette regni. D. seven kingdoms. 2. Argo ^ per li suoirefa- Argos is famous for its kings mosa. B. 3. Per sette porte entrai con I passed by seven gates with questi savi. D. these sages. The character of the preposition per, is to designate the place through which a person, and, figuratively, the cause through which the effect, passes. In the former case, this preposition is translated by through; in the latter, it corresponds to the preposition for, and supplies hy, when it denotes passage. EXERCISE If. 1. Perhaps this woman is sent from God. — costei — — * — 2. Why do you not take me to Florence? — «;o^(4) (I) menare (3) mi(2) * Firense t This Grammar being entirely established upon the authority of the best writers, I have extracted from them all the sentences contained in these exercises ; so that, if the student make a right application of the gramma- tical rules, he may depend upon the purity of the stj'le. In other grammars, the exercises, if there are any, are entirely the pro- duction of the grammarian ; and such compositions not only convey to the student an erroneous notion of the Italian style, but frequently cause him to use expressions not allowed by our syutax. Besides, in such exercises, the examples, being similar to one another, tend only to fatigue the student. The cypher 0, placed under any word of the exercise, signifies that it must not be translated. The trace — , implies that the student must translate the word under which it is placed, either from what he has already learned, or by means of a dictionary. The * denotes, that application is to be made of the rules explained ia the chapter, and of the most remarkable rules already laid down in the pre- ceding chapters. Verbs, unless the tense or mood change in Italian, are always put in the infinitive ; nouns are given in the singular ; the student must supply the I 21 3. He was there with a servant of his. egli — guivi * un suo fante 4. It was a very sure sig-n of approaching- death. — certissimo indisio * futura — 5. He was a man of stern appearance. — — — * Jiera vista 6. They were extensively trusted by every merchant. — sommamente creduti * ogni mercatante 7. He is waiting- for you at his own house. — v' attende * sua (2) (1) 8. The ship was driven by a furious wind. la nave — sospingere * impetuoso — 9. He became a sing-ing- and music master. divenire canto — suono * 10. This is not the way to g-o to Alag-na. questa * la via * — * — 11. He could only enter by the door. non potere se non (2) ( 1 ) * I' uscio 12. I would g"ladly know it from thee. volentieri (^) sapereQl) il(X) * te 13. He resolved to discover his wants to him. — disporre * aprirgli il suo hisogno 14. He was not used to fasting-. * uso * dig-iunare 15. He entered into several and various discourses with (1) * (4) molti — varii ragionamento *(2) him. lui (3) 16. I do not intend to return to you. 10 — — * tornare * voi proper tense, person, gender, and number. The irregularities of verbs are treated of at the end of the Grammar. The numbers indicate the Italian transposition. It sometimes happens that a verb, which is in a different mood in English/ must be put in the infinitive in Italian ; and that a noun, which is plural in English, must be singular in Italian; in these cases, the Italian words are printed in Roman characters. When the verbs do, let, may, shall, &c. are used as auxiliaries, no sign is put under them ; when they are employed as principal verbs, either they are marked with a trace underneath them, or the proper verb is supplied. 22 17. Henceforth let the g-overnment of this little people omai il — * questo piccol — be your caret. — VQStro 18. Comfort yourself; you are at home. confortatevi — — * casa vostra 19. The whole room was perfumed with roses, Z«(2) tutta(^l) camera olire * — orang-e-flowers, and other odours. aranci* — — altri — 20. He lived a long* time at Palermo. dimorare — — * — 21. I shall always love you for her sake. — amare voi * amor di lei 22. The sky was very dark with clouds, and with il — — oscurissimo * nuvolo — * the gloom of the nig-ht. buia notte 23. She found by chance a fisherman's boat. — * avventura una — * navicella 24. From thence he went to his father 's house. quindi — * il — * — 25. He found it furnished with a mast, sails, and oars. (2) la{}) fornita * 0->*— — * — 26. I shall never have peace with her. io non debho mai — — * lei 27. They were talking* of the beauties of France, of ragionare delle belle donne * — * Eng-land, and of the other parts of the world. — — delle altre — del — 28. Having- returned from fowling, and being fatigued, he essere tornare * uccellare — — stanco went to sleep. s'andd * — t When one word is placed under two, or two are under three, or more, the inferior number supplies the superior. 23 29. He returned from Paris to Florence. — * — * — 30. Mysia, my woman, and Licisca, Filomena's, shall be Misia mia fante — — — * (3) continually in the kitchen. continue {4) * (1) (2) CHAP. VI. OF THE ARTICLE. The Italians have three articles, which they em- ploy in the following manner : For the Masculine Nouns, iSingular, Plural. V amove, - the love. gli amori, the loves. lo strepito, - - the noise. gli strepiti, - the noises. lo ^oppo, - the cripple. gli zoppi, the cripples. il tempo, - the time. i tempi, the times. The Feminine Nouns, la favola, • • the fable. le favole. the fables. V ora, - the hour. le ore. the hours. There are consequently two articles for masculine nouns, lo and il. The article lo, is applied to nouns beginning with a vowel, and to those which begin either with s, followed by another consonant, or with z. The article il, is placed before those which begin either with one consonant or with two, excepting the two consonants above-mentioned. The o of the article lo, is generally cut off before a noun commencing with a vowel. The article la, is applied to feminine nouns ; the a must also be cut off before those words which commence with a vowel. 24 There are in Italian some prepositions, which are united to the articles in the following manner : IL I. di il, del. di i, dei. of the. a il, al. a i> ai. to the. da il, dal. da i. dai. from the. in il, nel. in i> nei. in, or into the. con il, col. con i, coi. with the. su il, sul. su i> sui. or, or upon the. per il, Lo. pel. per i, Gli. pel. throug-h, or for the. di lo, dello. di g^h degli. of the. a lo, alio. a gli, agli. to the. da lo, dallo. da gli, dagli. from the. in lo, La, nello. in gli, Le. negli. in, or into the. di la, della. di le, delle. of the. a la. alia. a le. alle. to the. da la. dalla. da le. dalle. from the. in la. nella. in le, nelle. in, or into the. We say also collo, colla, cogli, colle; but good authors more frequently employ the separated form, con lo, con la, con gli, con le. The article li, another plural of ^/, is only used after the preposition per, and to mark the days of the month. The article lo, is employed in prose after the preposi- tion per, rather than i/. The forms, frallo, fralla, pel, pella, sullo, sulla, instead of fra lo, fra la, per il, per la, sn lo, su la, are bad, and must never be employed. Sul and pei, or pe', are used instead of su il and per i. The prepositions di and in, are changed into de and we, when united to articles. The word Dei, plural of Dio, a god, requires the article gli. Sometimes the i is cut off from the compounded words dei, ai, dai, coi, &c. In that case, it is abso- lutely necessary to put an apostrophe, thus, de\ a\ da\ co\ Application of the Article. I. 1. Sono ancor venule le da- Are the young ladies yet migelle? B. come? 2. Si trapassammo, toccando Thus we passed on, tasking- unpocolavitafutura.Jj. a little upon the life to come. 3. La mediciria da guarirlo I w^ell know the medicine to so io bene. B. cure him. The article is a sign employed to point out a noun determined* by an adjective or a sentence, or by what * By the word '• determined," I mean to distlnguisb, to fix upon one of several things which have one generic name, but are indi\'idually different, or are characterized by particular qualities. For this reason I employ throughout this chapter, the words determinate and determination, which I am often obliged to repeat, as most expressive of my meaning. The proper application of the article is certainly difficult, both in English and in the Italian language ; and as it is highly necessary for Italians to exercise their reasoning powers, to be enabled to make a right application of the article in the English language, in like manner will the English find that they also must reflect, before they can accurately apply the article in Italian. It is asserted in a standard Grammar of the English lan- guage, that " It is of the nature of the articles, to determine or limit the thing spoken of." Now, it does not appear to me that the article has the power to del ermine a thing. The use of the article is to indicate what is determined by an adjective, by an incidental proposition, or by some preceding discourse. Therefore, in the examples quot?d above, it is not the article which specifies the words damigelle, vita, and mediciiia ; but, in the first, it is the implied expression, che vol aspettavate, " whom you ex- pected ;" in the second, the adjective /m/mjvz; and, in tho third, the expres- sion da guarirlo. I attach great importance to this principle, because we shall see that, when a determination is neither expressed nor understood, the noun does not require any article to designate it. E 26 has been said in a preceding discourse : in this princi- ple all languages agree. In the first example, the article applied to the word damigeUe, designates some particu- lar ladies already mentioned ; in the second, the article la, points out the noun vita, specified by the adjective futura; and in the third, the article 7a, indicates the particular medicine determined by the expression da guarirlo. II. 1 . L'ingratitudine e antichis- Ingratitude is a very ancient simo peccato. B. sin. 2. La povertd non toglie gen- Poverty does not take from a tilezza ad alcuno. B. person's gentility. 3. Vi cid ne b testimone Africa is a witness of it. I 'Africa. M. 4. Non se ne dee I'uomo ma- Man must not wonder at it. ravigliare. B. 5. Gli uomini in molte cose Men, in their desires^ sin peccano desiderando. B. many ways. The article being employed to point out a word which requires to be determined, the words ingrati- tudine, povertd, virtii, vizio, scienza, ignoranza, &c. ; Momo, uomini, &c.; Africa, Italia, Inferno, Paradiso, &c. when used in their general sense, seem to need no determination ; they must, however, be marked in Ita- lian by the article, because our determination is then referred to their generic names ; as if we intended to distinguish the words ingratitude, poverty, man, Africa, hell, from their generic names, sin, condition, being, province, place, namely : il peccato d'ingratitudine, lo stato di povertd, la provincia d' Africa, Vente uomo, il luogo detto Inferno. The word peccato, of the first example, used by Boccaccio, is a sufiicient proof of this assertion. Now, as in this case the article designates the noun which determines its generic name, we may conclude 27 that, in Italiaa, the article is applied both to a noun determinate, and to a noun determining its generic name understood, as mentioned in the preceding pa- ragraph. The definition of the different significations of the word constancy, in the two instances of the following sentence, will better explain my meaning : " We must act our part with constancy, though the reward of con- stancy be distant"— Tzoi abhiamo ad operare con co- stanza, benche it guiderdone delta costanza sia lontano. Why do the Italians apply an article to the substan- tive costanza in the second case, and not in the first? There must certainly be some diff'erence in their mean- ing, which is not evident in English. As 1 before ob- served, the office of the article is to indicate a word determined. But it may be asked, what determina- tion can the word constancy require, since it is not used here in a particular sense ? Tt is not the word constancy that is determined in this case ; it is deter- minative of another noun. The noun determined must therefore be understood, and that is virtue, which I call its generic name ; so that, when I say la costanza, I signify la virtii delta costanza — '^ the virtue called constancy." I shall now show, that we in one instance apply the article, because the mind aims at distin- guishing constancy from other virtues ; and in the other case we do not prefix any article, because the mean- ing is restricted to the word constancy alone, without noticing its contradistinction to other virtues. We may perceive that, in the first instance, the mind is not directed to the generic name virtue; if it were, the meaning would be, *' We must act our part only with that virtue which is called constancy, not with other virtues;" which is not in that case our intention, e2 28 according to reason ; therefore I say that, in the first instance, the mind is not at all occupied with the generic name virtue. In the second case, on the con- trary, our intention embraces entirely the generic term virtue, which is determined by the specific name CQ7i- stancy, in order to exclude all the other w^i^es; the signification of the sentence being, that *' it is only the reward of the virtue constancy, which is distant:" the reward of other virtues is excepted. Italians, there- fore, do not use the article in the former instance, because the specific name is not determinative ; but they apply the article in the latter, on account of the determination of the word virtue understood. To afford the student another mode of distinguishing be- tween the two cases in which the word constancy is employed, I have to observe that, in the former it is taken in a vague and partitive sense, as is evident by supplying the word some; and, in the latter, it is taken in its widest or general sense, for which reason, the word some cannot be supplied. In the 4th and 5th examples, the words man and men are taken in their widest or general sense, in the totality of their species ; but if I say, '' he was a sen- sible man'' — era uomo di huon sentimento — then the word man is taken only in part, as the particle a de- notes. Thus the nouns, philosophers, writers, virtues, vices, herbs, metals, &c. and all those which, when ex- pressed in their totality, do not admit of the article in English, must yet be marked by it in Italian; that is, i filosofi, gli scrittori, le virtu, i vizj, le erbe, i me- talli, &c. 29 in. 1. Ciascuno pud avere udito Every one may have heard ricordare il re Carlo. B. of King- Charles. 2. r fu' 'I conte Ugolino. D. I was Count Ug-olino. 3. Jl signor Paolo m' ha Sig-nor Paul wrote to me. scritto. Caro. 4. lofui d' Erminia, figliuo- I am of Armenia, the son of lo d'uno ch' ebbe nome one Phineo. Fineo. B. 5. Maestro Giotto dipintore, Giotto the painter, coming venendo di Mugello. B. from Mugello. According to the three first examples, the words in- dicating quality, title, or profession, viz. re, conte, signore, dottore, &c. which may be applied to many persons, being always determined by a christian or family name, must therefore be preceded in Italian by the article. The nown papa, pope, when followed by a name, is however an exception. The 4th and 5th examples show, that when these iden- tical words are put after the determining name, they do not admit of the article. The reason is, that in the first instance, the generic titles, re, conte, and signor, being placed and uttered before their specific names. Carlo, Ugolino, and Paolo, require a determination ; they must consequently be designated by the article ; whereas, in the second, the specific names, io and Giotto, being first, it is already known to whom the generic figliuolo and dipintore are applied ; and they do not need, therefore, any other distinction. In this rule, it is evident that we are quite opposed to the English, who in the former instance do not apply any article, while they do in the latter; the principle, however, is the same in both languages. The difi'erence of the application of the article, proceeds from the va- rious points of view under which things strike, or pre- 30 sent themselves to the mind. Upon this philosophical principle we shall enlarge in Chapter XXII. on Pre- positions. — The obsolete words, madonna and messere, for mistress Siud mister, admit of no article in any case. IV. X.Moltosarehbemeglioravere It would have been much taciuto. B. better to have been silent. 2. II salire omai ne parrcL Now it will be very easy for giuoco. D. us to get up. 3. Guarda Vandare. F. Look at the strang-e gait. From these examples we learn, that a verb may be used as a noun, and therefore be attended with the article, when a sentence or proposition represents the subject or the object of another. With regard to the verb employed for the subject, as in the two former examples, this happens whenever the pronoun it refers to the latter proposition ; which will at once appear by reducing the sentences in question to the direct con- struction, thus: 1. It; viz. to have been silent would have been much better, 2. Now it; viz. to get up will be very easy for us. When this transposition takes place, the preposition to, which is before the verb, is substituted in Italian by the article. In that case, the sentence always begins with the pronoun it. As the verb then represents a masculine noun, so it requires a masculine article, corresponding in euphony with the first letter of the verb. We may also omit the article, and say, Molto sarebbe meglio avere taciuto; satiric omai ne parrci giuoco, if we do not wish to specify the ideas expressed by the verb tacere and salire. With regard to the verb employed for the object, as in the third example, the English language, being subject to a variety of expression, does not harmonize in con- .31 struction with Italian; I cannot therefore give another such rule as the preceding. Moreover, the verb is frequently used more as a subject than as an object. V. 1. Ravenna sta come staV e Ravenna is as it has been for molii anni. D. many years. 2. Rimembriti di Pier da Remember Peter da Medi- Medicina. D. cina. 3. Udil nominar Geri del I heard him called Geri del Bello. D. Bello. 4. Dante, il Petrarca, e il Dante, Petrarch, and Boc- Boccaccio. caccio. 5. Richiama la perduta sa- Recover your former health, nitd, e'l conforto, e I'alle- comfort, and cheerful tem- grezsa. B. per. We have remarked (rule the second), that names of provinces must have the article ; but, as appears here by the first example, the names of cities do not admit of it. Neither is the article applied to christian or family names, except occasionally to the latter, to point out any famous individual of a family ; in which case the name is determined by an implied noun, as poeta, filosofo, &c. ; but it is practised only for Italians of note; for we say, Demostene, Cicerone^ Arnstotele, Seneca, without the article. Dante is not preceded by the article, because it was his christian name ; but he was also called VAlighieri, from his family ap- pellation. The fifth example shows, that the article must be repeated as frequently as there are objects governed by the verb. m VI. 1. La copia delle cose genera Superabundance of thing-s ex:- fastidio. D. cites disgust. 2. Le Muse son donne. The Muses are women. 3. Piu volte a ferire uomini He found many opportunities si trovd. B. of wounding* mea. 4. Dweva testimonianse false. He bore false witness. B. 5. Egli era raolto vago di He was very much pleased to stare in cucina. B. remain in the kitchen. The w^ords, fastidio, donne, uomini, testimonianze false, are employed in the above sentences only to de- note things, without any determination or distinction. When, therefore, a noun is not either determinate, as we have said in the first paragraph, or employed to determine another, as we have shov/n in the second, it must not be preceded by the article. As appears from the fifth example, we say, in cu- cina, in sala, in cantina, in casa, &c. without the article, when we mean our kitchen, room, cellar, or house; but if we possess several such places, and would particularize one, the article is then necessary. To render more perspicuous this reasoning upon the relation of the article with the noun, we show in the following table, the three cases treated, in which a noun is employed. In the first column the noun is determinate or particularized, and is therefore preceded by the article ; in the second, the noun de- termines its generic name, and is therefore designated by the article; in the third, the noun is indeterminate, and, for that reason, without any article; or, to use words which, though less precise, may appear clearer — in the first column the noun is taken in a particular 33 sense; in the second, it denotes a specific totality; in the third it is, in some measure, taken in a partitive sense^. Particular Sense. Se to avessi riguardo alia ingratitudine di lui, forte il riprenderei. If I considered his in- gratitude, I should re- primand him severely. Appresso questo il do- tnando se nel peccato della gola aveva a Dio dispiaciuto. Afterwards he asked him whether he had of- fended God with the sin of gluttony. Tu dicevi che eri colui il quale avevi ucciso V uomo. Thou saidst that thou wert the person that slew the man. Ella era huona e santa donna secondo Vopi- nione delle donne mo- nacke. She was a good and holy lady, in the opi- nion of the religious women. EXAMPLES. Specific Totality. Partitive Sense. Z/'ingratitudine e anti- Egli nan mi ha mai mo- chissimo peccato. stra ingratitudine. Ligratitude is a very He has never shown me ancient sin. ingratitude. II peccato e una tra- V ingratitudine e anti- sgressione alia legge chissimo peccato. di Dio. Sin is a transgression Ingratitude is a very against the laws of ancient sin. God. Sempre a quel ver che ha Egli era uomo di nazione faccia di menzogna dee assai umile. Z'uom chiuder le labbra. Man should always shut He was a maii of low his mouth at what birth. bears any resemblance to a lie. Questo si conviene piu Le Muse alle donne che agli uomini. donne. It is more becoming in The Muses are women, women than in men. * We may distinguish when the noun is indeterminate, or taken in a partitive sense, if we can supply the words a, an^ some, any, a part, &c. For instance, we can supply the word some, to the word disgust, of the first example ; a part of, to the word women, of the second j and some, in the third and fourth examples. F 34 EXAMPLES^Ccontinued). Particular Sense. Specific Totality. Partitive SenSe, Z'amicizia grande ck* Santissima cosa e V?i- Erano congiunti per a- eglihaconmelomuove mistk. mistjt. afar do. The great friendship he Friendship ia a sacred They were nnited by bears for me, induces thing. friendship. him to do it. Ora tratteremo delta na- Era la piu bella cosa eke Questo e contro Natura. tura^rfe' Francesi. mat fosse stata far- mata dalla Natura. We will now treat of It was the most beauti- It is against iViz^M/e. the nature of French- ful thing ever formed men. by Nature. Si pub immaginare quan- Era tomato in quel tempo to in quel tempo patisse Federigo in Italia. /'Italia. We may imagine how Frederic had returned at much Italy suffered that time into Italy, at that time. EXERCISE Il.f 1. Thoug-ht is an act peculiar to reason. — — (2) propria (I) di — 2. Orpheus tamed the wild beasts with his lyre. Orfeo fare mansuete — /iera — la cetera 3. It well becomes you to reprimand not only a voi sta bene * ripigliare{6} (1) che (2) friends, but strangers also. (3) ma (4) strano(6) f I do not in this exercise mark the place of the application of the article, but leave it to the student's discretion. 4. You knowt that people are more ready to believe the — — che gente ^ — acconcia — — — •bad than the good, male che — bene 5. Cisti the baker, by a smart reply, makes Signor — — fornaio con — sua parola — (2) Geri Spina sensible of an unreasonable (3) (4) ravvedere{\) — — sua trascu^ata JxJ request. domanda 6. Love dwells in gorgeous palaces and sumptuous — abitare lieti palagi — morbide apartments more willingly than in miserable cottages. camere — — che povere capanne 7. Let one bring the bread, a second send the wine, questi porta?'e — — colui — — — and a third dress the meat. — quello altro fare — pietansa 8. By the victory obtained over King Manfred, the — — — avuta di — Manfredi, — Gibelins were driven from Florence. Ghibellino — cacciati di — 9. Friendship is increased by frequent intercourse. amistd s' accresce — consuetudme 10. This is Archbishop Roger. questi — — Ruggieri 11. Pity is a noble disposition of the soul. pietd — una — — — animo 12. I have seen the letter which you wrote to Signor — vedere — — che scrivete — — Matthew. 13. France, Italy, and Spain, are full of new names, — — — — — ripiene — nuovi — and quite different from the ancient. — al tutto alieni — — antichi 14. Misery alone is unenvied. — solo — senza invidia •f* Wlien this verb signifies, to be informed of, to have in mind, it is translated in Italian by sapere; when it means, to recognize, to distinguish, it is rendered by conoscere. f2 36 15. The stars are an ornament of heaven. 16. Having" given him money and a horse, he left him donatigli denari — pallafreno nel suo at liberty to stay or to depart. arbitrio rimise * (4) stare (5^) e (3) *(1) andare(2) 17. Without saying any thing, she awaited death. senza dire alcuna — aspettare — 18. The prince knew the greatness of his daughter's (2) (3) conoscere(\) — — — lasuajigliuola* soul. animo 19. Poverty had not power to abase the greatness of — — — potuto rintuszare — — — his soul. V animo suo 20. Pluck the roses, and let the thorns remain. cogliere — — — lasciare — — stare 21. I shall offend the laws alone, whereas he oifends both — — — - — sole dove — — the laws and nature. 22. Here are gardens, here are meadows, here are other qui — — — — pratello — — placest very pleasant. luogo assai dilettevoli 23. To this short sorrow immediately succeeds — = questa brieve noia prestamente{2) seguitare(\) the mirth and pleasure which I have promised — dolcessa — — il quale — (2) (3) you. m(l) 24. The young man, who was made neither of iron — giovane che non — — — nor diamond, easily yielded to the entreaties of — — agevolmente sipiegb — — preghiera — the abbot. t I must here request the student to compare this example with the sixth, and judge which expresses totality. 37 25. I have always been accustomed, when I leave the — — — avuto in costume — usciredi — inn, to say one pater-noster, and one ave Maria, for albergo — — — pater nostro — un' — — — the souls of Saint Julian 's father and mother. — anima — San Giuliano * — — — 26. It is no glory for aa eagle to have vanquished (3) niuna(l) (2) ad — — * — vinta a dove. 27. Already had the sun driven every star from heaven, gid — — — cacciata ogni {3) (4) (1) (2) and /the damp shade of the nig"ht\ /from the earth. \ - Aot 28. She desires to have ease, comfort, and repose. ella volere — quiete consolazione — — 29. As misdeeds require punishment, so benefits are worthy come fallo meritay^e — cost — meritare of reward. guiderdone 30. None of them had either happiness or repose, but niun — loro aveva ne ben ne — se non so long- as they remained tog-ether. tanto quanto essere — CHAP. VII. OF THE PERSONAL NOUNS. The nouns io, I, applied to the speaker, and tw^, thou, applied to the party addressed, are subject to the following variations : + When, after a word marked for transposition, several follow wliich are according to the English transposition, I enclose them between parentheses, and put one number for all, after the parenthesis. + If we wish to be precise in our reasoning, we must be so likewise in the denomination of words. Pronoun is a word used to avoid the repetition of 38 Variations of the Personal Noun lo. Singular. Plural. Subject. io; I. noi; we. Point of ten- ) . , • • ^ dencv \ ^*^ ^ ^^' '"^^ "^®* ^*' ^ ^^*'* ^^' "^' Object. mi, me; me. ci,noi; ns. Variations of the Personal Noun Tu. Subject. iw/ thon. '^;o^; you. Point of ten- } .■ ^ ^i, * xi, dencv I ' ^ ' *"^^^ ^^ thee. vt,avoi; you, to you. Object. tijte; thee. vi,voi; you. Variations of the Pronoun Se. Object. St, «e; himself, hei-self, themselves^ one's self. , " > si, a se ; to himself, to herself, &c. We must mention the pronoun se in this place, on account of the share which it has in the rules we are about to explain. It supplies all the above English pronouns, when they refer to the subject of the pro- position ; as, for instance, he praises himself; egli loda se. But more respecting this pronoun hereafter. There are, then, for the person who represents the object of the verb, and for him to whom the action is directed or attributed, two forms, namely : the noun ; as, la signora mi manda a vol — ella dice, &c. ; the lady sends me — she says, &c. ; but there is never occasion to name a person before io and tu. These words, therefore, do not supply the place of a noun ; they are themselves the nouns of the speaker and the party addressed. 39 For the Object, For the P oint of 1 >ndency*. mi. me. mi, - a me. a. . te. ti, - a te. ci, noi. ci, - a noi. vi, - voi. vi. - a voi. si. se. si, - a se. Let us now consider their application. I. 1. Tu mi consoli* B. Thou comfortest me. 2. Ad un' ova tu consoli me At once thou comfortest me e te. B. and thyself. 3. Tu mi piaci. P. Thou pleasest me. 4. Tu puoi piacere al tuo Thou canst please thy lord signore e a me. B. and me. 5. lo I'aveva tolta io. G. I was disposed to marry her myself. When the action falls upon, or is directed to a single person, as in the first and third examples, we use the forms mi, ti, ci, vi, si; but if the same verb acts upon, or refers to two different persons, as in the second and fourth examples, we employ the other forms, me, te, noi, voi, se, for the object, and a me, a te, a noi, a voi, a se, for the point of tendency, in order to give more force to their expression. Thus, in the first example, the author uses mi, be- cause it is the single object of the verb consolare; but in the second, the verb consolare having two objects, he selects the more forcible words me and te. In the third example, the sensation of pleasure is attributed to a single person ; and therefore we say mi; but in the fourth, the same sensation being communicated to two persons, thy lord and me, we say, a me, and not mi. * In order to give some denomination to the person to whom the action tends, we term it point of tendency ; for, if the relations indicated by preposi- tions were denominated cases, we sliould have in our languages as many cases as there are prepositions. 40 It is worthy of notice, that the word self, sometimes joined in English to these nouns and pronouns, is sel- dom expressed in Italian. When the words myself, thyself, ourselves, yourselves, represent the subject, as myself in the fifth example, they are supplied in Italian by io, tu, noi, voi. 11. Dite voi a me (non ad altri?) B. 1. A voi non costerd niente (ma a me moUo.) B. Da me non venni. D. Do you speak to me (not to another?) It will cost you nothing- (but me much.) I came not of my own accord. The two first examples prove, that if the sentence implies a silent contradistinction or opposition, we must still employ the more forcible forms, me, te, se, &c. a me, a te, &c. By the third, we perceive that these very forms are always used when the pronoun is preceded by any preposition whatever. The reason is, that the words me, te, &c. may support the em- phasis, which the others cannot. III. 1. ConfortatL B. Comfort thyself*. 2. Non ci dar questa seccag- Do not trouble us thus. gine. B. 3. Io son presto aconfessarvi it vero. B. 4. Credendosi la mortefug- gire in quella incappa- rono. B. 5. Fattosi venire una coppa d'oro, la mandd alia figliuola. B. 6. Voi mi potete torre quanto io tengo. B. 7. Io sento trarmi a riva. P. I am ready to confess the truth to you. Thinking- to escape death, they ran to meet it. Having- called for a golden cup, he sent it to his daug-hter. You may take all that I possess. I feel I am driven to the shore. * The personal noun tu, thou, being always used in Italian between friends and relations, I translate it into English literally. 41 This method is usually followed in familiar dis- course, The words mi, ti, ci, vi, si, are placed after the verb in three moods ; in the imperative (unless when attended with a negative), in the infinitive, and in both participles, with which also they incorporate into a single word, as in the first, third, fourth, and fifth examples. The infinitive loses the final e, and one r, if the verb have two, as in the seventh example, the verb trarre. When another verb precedes and governs the infinitive, as in the sixth example, we may more elegantly place the personal noun before the former. In the other three moods, — the indicative, the con- ditional, and the conjunctive, — these particles must be placed before the verb, and be separated from it. The more forcible forms, me, te, &c. are usually placed after the verb in every mood, and always se- parated from it. IV. 1. Se la mend a casa. B. He broug-ht her to his house. 2. Vientene m^eco. F. Come along- with me. 3. Me ne domandate? F. Do you ask me concerning" it ? By a principle of harmony, when the personal nouns, mi, ti, ci, vi, si, are followed by the pronouns, lo, him or it; la, her or it; li, le, them; ne, of it, of them, from this or that place, they change into me, te, ce, ve, se; but the latter have then no more force than the former, and cannot therefore support the emphasis. They are separated before the verb, se la mend, and conjoined in a single word after it, vientene. The same rule is followed with regard to placing them be- fore or after the verb, as that which we have just given for the simple words, mi, ti, &c. The third example is given, to show the difi'erence G 42 between the words me, te, se, when they are set in opposition, and can support the emphasis ; and the words mi, ti, si, when changed into me, te, se, for the sake of harmony, and bearing no emphasis. In this example, the noun me is in opposition ; for its entire signification is, '* Do you ask me concerning it? Ask others ; I know nothing of the matter." In reading the third example, therefore, we must pause upon me, thus: me—ne domandate? accenting me, and the sylla- ble da of domandate; in the first, on the contrary, we pronounce the three words, se la mend, as if they were joined in one, selamenb, accenting only the last vowel. There are in Italian many verbs attended by a single, and sometimes by a double pronoun, which is not expressed in English ; as andarsene, to go away ; venirsene, to come away ; godersela (goder si la vita), to enjoy life. In that case the verb, being in the infini- tive, the pronoun se or si, represents the object of the proposition, because it then always refers to the subject uno, understood; which words, uno and se, answer to one's self; but if the subject of the verb be a personal noun, as io, tu, &c. the object must then be mi, ti, or me, te, &c. The pronoun ne, in the two former instances, signifies from this or that place. Whenever this occurs in the exercises, the pronouns are supplied and annexed to the infinitive of the Ita- lian verb, and the student must substitute to se or si, the proper object of the personal noun which re- presents the subject; for instance, in the sentence, " We went away," I put andarsene under went away; the subject being we, the student must change se into ce, and, putting both the pronouns before, and sepa- rated from, the verb, say, noi ce ne andammo. 43 V. 1. Madimmi, ti sei tu spesso But tell me, didst thou fall adirato? B. often into a passion ? 2. Vattene. B. Go away. 3. Farottelo fare. F. I will g-et it made for thee. If one of the words, mi, ti, &c. melo, tene, &c. be placed after a verb in the imperative of a single syl- lable, as in the two former examples di' and va', or after another tense having the accent upon the last syllable, as in the third, faro, the consonant of the personal noun is doubled. VL 1. Odi tu quel ch' io ? B. Do you hear what I hear ? 2.Eecomi,chedomanditu? B. Here I am; what dost thou ask? 3. Dinne alcuna cosa. B. Tell us something-. 4. Meco ti consiglia. P. Consult me. When the personal noun marks the subject, it may be understood if there is no need of placing an empha- sis upon it; but it is always necessary when there is an opposition or contradistinction, as in the first example. To translate into Italian the expressions, here I am, here it is, here they are, &c. the pronoun representing the subject in English, becomes the object in Italian, and is always placed after the word ecco, which im- plies behold, and is united to it in a single word: eccomi, eccolo, eccoli. Thus the word ecco supplies the place of the verb to be, and the word here. The word ne, may be also a personal noun, and used instead of ci, as in the third example. We can say meco, with me ; teco, with thee ; seco, with him or her ; instead of con me, con te, con se, con lui, con lei. g2^ 44 EXERCISE Ill.t 1. I beg- that you will afford me advice and assistance. — vi prego che porgiate * consigUo — aiuto. 2. As it appears to me, you have little considered per quello che paia * — — poco riguardare a the nature of things. 3. She came to excuse herself, and to comfort me. — — — — * — — confortar * 4. I suppose you laugh to see me, a military man, forse — — perchb vedete * uom d'arme going about inquiring after such things, andar domandare di queste — •^ In writing our vernacular tongue, we do not much want to know the denomination of the parts of speech, and how to distinguish between them, practice having so entirely familiarized us with the just and proper mode of speaking, that we need not recur to those elementary parts of grammar ; but in learning a foreign language, as we cannot give so much time to it as we have bestowed on the acquisition of our own, we must supply this want of time by the assistance of reasoning ; to understand which, nothing is more essential than to know how to distinguish all the parts of speech. As in learning music, it is necessary to know the value of a sharp and of a flat, of a quaver and of a semiquaver ; and, for the knowledge of geometry, to comprehend the difference between an angle and a triangle, a problem and a proposition ; so, to understand grammar, we must be able to distin- guish a preposition from a proposition, an object from a relation of tendency. If I say, for instance, she ordered me to begin, I have no necessity, in Eng- lish, for the application of the personal noun me, to distinguish whether it is the object, or the point of tendency ; but if I have to translate it into Ita- lian, then I ought to know that to begin, is the object, and me, the point of tendency ; because there are two expressions in Italian, mi and me, for the former, and mi and a me, for the latter. Mi being employed for both, presents no difficulty; but if we have to make use of the more forcible expressions me and a me, we must then make a distinction. I advise the student, therefore, to analyze all the sentences in the following exercise, and to understand clearly which is the subject, which the object, and which the point of tendency. 45 5. I will take you to her, and I am sure that she menare * da lei — — certo — will recognize you. conoscere * 6. I resolved to tell it to you, rather than to another. deliberarsi * — dirlo * piu tosto die — altrui 7. I have not learned these things from the neighbours : — sapute queste — — — — he himself told them to me. — medesimo ha dette le * 8. Here they are: she herself brought them to me. * le * — medesima ha recate le * 9. In order to convince you that I have reason to accid che voi crediate — — abbia — — complain, I will tell you what your rammaricarsi * — volere dire * cid che it vostro friend did to me this morning. — — * stamane 10. It is a much greater glory to conquer one's self, egli — — maggior — * vincere * than to conquer others. che — altro 11. If I loved you now as I did formerly, se — amare * come — amare(2) gid(l) 1 should not have courage to tell you a thing which — — — ardire — — * — che must displease yon. noiare * 12. Young man, what dost thou ? What fear retains giovane che — qual temenza tenere thee? What ghost frightens thee? Art thou afraid * quale spettro spaventare * aver * paura of me ? * 13. By doing this, the insult which he intends fare (2) quest o(^l) — ingiuria che volere to offer both to you and me, would be revenged fare * — * — vendicare Q2.} at the same time. adun*ora(^\) 46 14. Do not disgrace yourself, and plung-eme and your non vogliate vituperar * — mettere * — il vostro friend into danger and distress. — — pericolo — briga 15. (Thou) Let me alone; hold me no more. lasciare * tener(3) * (2) non(\) (4) 16. My lord, dispose of me as you think most for signor mio fare — * quel che — credere che piu your honour and happiness. — — — consolazion sia 17. I am pleased to restore it to you: here it is. piacemif — render e lo * * 18. I beg you will forgive me what I said to you. — * — * perdoniate * di quel che — * 1^. Love compels me to act thus. — costringere * — fare (2) cos^(l) ^0. For that, I am obliged to fortune more than to you; di quello — sapere grado — — — che * for this, I shall be indebted to you alone. — questo — — tenuto * 21. You will excuse me if I cannot serve you. — perdonare * — — * 22. There will be no one, who, when he sees us, will (2) non(\) alcuno che vedendo * not make way, and let us go. — ci faeeia luogo — lasci * — 23. If thou hast not that intention which thy words se — — — quello animo che le parole tue show, do not encourage me with a vain hope. dimostrare — pascere * di vana — 24. You may at the same time do yourself very great — potere — — — — — * grandissimo honour, and me an essential service. •— — * grande utilitd t The personal noun «ie, according to the third rule, should precede the verb ; but in this case it is purposely placed after it, to give fluency to the expression, as the circumstance requires. Thus we see that, once acquired sufficient taste, we are not confined strictly to that rule. 47 25. I have resolved to have you for my husband — — deliberare — voler * — — in preference to any one else. avanti che alcuno altro 26. Remembering- the haw^k that you requested of me, ricordarsi * di — falcon — — domandare * and its goodness, I judged it a fit — * la sua bontd, — reputare(2) i7(l) degno repast for you. cibo da * 27. I will tell it you on this condition, that you — — lo * con questo patto che — promise me never to communicate it to any one else. promettiate * che mai a niuno il direte 28. He has proved me with words, and thee with deeds. — *— _ _*__ fatto 29. Love induced me to give you this trouble. — — * — — * la presente fatica 30. Perhaps he desired to put himself in the place — — — — porre * — quel luogo from which he endeavoured to expel another. d'onde — ingegnarsi* — cacciare altrui 31. Though it cost nothing, it affords much more profit ancora che (2) (1) — essere — — utile to others than to us. — altrui che * 32. That which you complain of, I have myself quello che (2) (3) dolersi*(4) (1) OV — * (2) done. 0) 48 CHAP. VIII. OF ADJECTIVES. Potere umano, Anima umana, Uomo cortese, Donna cortese. - Human power. - Human soul. - Courteous man. - Courteous woman. The adjective ending in o, changes its termination into a, when it qualifies a feminine noun; but that which ends in e, does not change its last vowel on account of the gender. The former, therefore, has two terminations in the plural: occhineri, black eyes; vesti nere, black clothes ; and the latter only one : dolci pen- sieri, pleasant thoughts; dolci parole, soft words. The method of forming the plural, has been already given in the Chapter on Number. 1. Questa notte far a piu fresco, B. 2. Forte gridd. D. 3. Questa sard hella ! F. 4. Umana cosa ^ aver com- passione degli afflitti. B. 5. 1 costumi e le usanze degli uomini grossi gli eran piu a grado che le citta- dine, B. 6. Ed un ch' avea I' una e Valtra man mozza, D. To-night it will be cooler (than yesterday). He cried aloud. It would be a pleasant jest! It is natural for man to have pity upon the afflicted. The customs and manners of the country people were more agreeable to him than those of the citizens. And one who had both hands cut off. The adjective is often employed without its sub- stantive; and it then agrees in termination with its noun understood. In the first example, the word tempo, weather; and in the second, tiiono, tone, mas- 49 culine nouns, are understood; and therefore the ad- jectives have a masculine termination. In the third example, the adjectives end in a, because they are applied to baia, jest^ a feminine noun. In the fourth, the adjective afflitti qualifies the noun uomini. And here we have to observe, that when an adjective in English, employed without a substantive, is applied to a class of men, or to a whole species of animals, it must, in Italian, take the plural termination. When an adjective qualifies two substantives, it ge- nerally agrees with that nearest to it ; as, in the fifth example, the adjective cittadine, which agrees with usanze. If the two substantives are in the singular, and of the same gender, as in the sixth example, the adjective may be put either in the singular, as in that example, or in the plural -, for instance, Vuna e Valtra man mozze; but if the substantives be not of the same gender, the adjective most usually agrees with the nearer, as avea una mano, e il naso tronco. Some adjectives, as grande, great; hello, fine; santo, holy; imo, one; alcuno, somebody; are shortened into gran, bel, san, un, alcun, before the masculine nouns beginning with a consonant ; except when s initial is followed by another consonant. Adjectives of Quantity, Molto, much, many, or very. Tanto, so, so much, so many, so long, so great, or, so far. Troppo, too, too much, or, too many. Quanta, how much, how many, how long, or, how great. Alquanto, } <'«^' "^ ""'^• H 50 II. 1. In tanta afflizione e mise- via, era Vautoritd delle leggi quasi caduta. B. 2. Aveva molta gente sotto di se. B. 3. In pochi anni grandis- sima quantitd di denari avanzarono. B. 4. Quante cose gli si promet- tono! B. 5. Questofatto h nolo a molti. F. In so much affliction and mi- sery, the authority of the laws was nearly lost. He had many people under him. In a few years they accumu- lated a g-reat deal of mo- ney. How many things are pro- mised him I This fact is known to many. These adjectives are subject to the changes of the last vowel already specified, as appears from the above examples ; and from the last, we see that they are also employed occasionally without a substantive, especially when the adjective refers to the word uomini. III. 1 . La giovane era poco av- The young- girl was not very veduta. B. clever. 2. Era la casa sopra il mare, The house was situated upon e alta molto, B. the sea-shore, and was very lofty. 3. Alquanto di violenza. F. A little violence. 4. Un poco di noia. B. A little pain. The adjective poco, in the first example, and molto, in the second, show that these words do not change when they modify an adjective; namely, when they express intention, or remission of quality; a masculine substantive being then understood. In the first ex- ample, for instance, the noun grado, degree, and in the second, spazio, space, are understood ; namely, la giovane era avvednta in poco grado; la casa era alta 61 per molto tratto, o spazio. Thus the simple rule will be — if the adjectives, molto y poco, tanto, troppo, &c. are followed by a substantive, they must agree with it in gender and number; if followed by another adjective, they should retain the form of the singular masculine. Whenever the word little is preceded by the particle a, it ought, in Italian also, to be expressed, if, as in the fourth example, we employ the adjective poco; but if, as in the third, we use alquanto, that particle cannot be translated. As appears from these exam- ples, both the words poco and alquanto retain, in that case, their termination in o, although preceding a femi- nine noun, because they refer to one understood; and must be followed by the preposition di, the sign of the qualification of the implied noun ', unless the ex- pression, a little, be applied to an adjective, as " a little sorry," un poco, or alquanto dolente. The dif- ference between the two expressions, mi da poca noia, it gives me little pain, and mi dd un poco di noia, it gives me a little pain, is that, in the former, the mean- ing is, in some measure, negative — in the latter^, affir- mative. Observe, that if we apply th« negative form to a noun in the plural, as, " thou wilt leave but few com- panions," we make use in Italian of poco, thus : pochi compagni avrai; but if we employ the affirmative with a plural noun, as, "having requested a few young noblemen,'* alquanto is in that case preferable; W- chesti alquanti nohili giovani. II 2 52 IV. 1. Ella il pianse assai, e She bewailed him very much, assai volte in vano il and called upon him many chiamd. B. times in vain. 2. Piu giorni felicemente na- They sailed prosperously dur- vigarono. B. ing- several days. 3. Non poteva far cosa che He could not do a thing less meritasse manco scusa. deserving of pardon. Caro. The words piii, several ; assai, much or many ; meno or manco, less, are also used as adjectives of quantity; but they are more properly adverbs, and therefore invariable. The adjective is placed before or after the substan- tive, according to the signification, and sometimes to the harmony, of the sentence. EXERCISE IV. 1. Afterwards he inquired of him how long appresso domandare(2) i7(l) * tempo it was since he had confessed. — che — fosse (2^ confessarsi (\) 2. In short, I went so much farther, that I arrived — brieve — — — addentro — — pervenire in India, where I saw the feathered race flying, — — — (2) pennato(3)* volare(l) a thing incredible to those who have never seen it. — — — chi non gli avesse veduti 3. They had sometimes so great a desire to laugh, — alcuna volta * voglia — — that they hardly could restrain themselves (from it). — afatica potere tenere — ne 4. The night was so dark, that they could scarcely see — — — * — * che appena si sarebbe potuto veder one another in the street. I'un Valtro per — via 5. She was no less adorned with noble manners than — — non — ornato* * cortese* costume die with beauty. * bellezza 6. You, as a clever man, may easily know — co7ne(2) savio{^) (4) (1) agevolmente — how great is the frailty of men and women. * sia — fragilita — * — — * donna 7. The sides were nearly enclosed with white and — latorai — quasi chiuso * bianco * (2) (3) red rose-trees. vermiglio (4) * rosaio (1 ) 8. They gave me so much trouble, that I left off davano * * seccaggine lasciare stare the work. — lavorio 9. The queen then, a little ang-ry, though all the — reina allora * turbato * quantunque * — others laughed, said, leave off jesting. * ridessero — — — il motteggiare 10. When a small portion of the night was spent, poi che * — — — — trapassato * every one went to take repose. ciascuno andarsi* — riposare 11. I will tell you a tale which shall not be too long. — dire * — novella che — — * * 12. My houses, and the public places of Rome, are le mie — — — luogo pubblico * — — — filled with the statues of my ancestors. pieno * * — immagine — i miei maggiore 13. 1 am forced to do two things very much against mi conviene far — — * contrario * my inclination. a' miei costumi 14. The plain was surrounded with six hillocks of — piano — intorniato * - moderate height. non troppo * altezza t This word is in the feminine plural. 54 15. These declivities were all covered with vines, olives, questo * piaggia — * pieno * * vigna ulivo almonds, cherries, figs, and many other kinds of mandorlo ciriegio fico — assai • maniera _- fruit - trees. albero fruttifero * 16. Certain manners * costume are proper and commendable — idoneo* — laudabile* at ad one ag-e, which uno* etd die are improper and blaraeable — sconcio* — biasimevole * at ad another. altro * 17. Finding- his affairs much embarrassed, he resolved to sentire lifatti suoi * intralciato* pensare commit them to the care of several persons. (2) quegli{\) — * persona 18. To turn him out of our house so unwell, would be a * mandarlo fuori — (2) (1) cost infermo — manifest proof of little prudence. — segno — * senno 19. I see no way /of escaping- so great an (5) niuno (2) (3) aperto (4) \ a fuggire * injury of fortune,\ but by relying on the strength — — — /(I) «e non — virtu of our minds and of our swords. —' i — animo — — le — destra 20. There he found a worthy woman, very old. quivi — uno * buono * donna * attempato * 21. I will cause to be prepared for you a certain distilled — vi faro fare — * stillato (2) liquor, very good, and very pleasant to drink. bevanda (1) * * -^ * piacevole a bere 22. Having remained a few days in the town, and having essere dimorare * giorno — — — heard many things of this man 's avarice, he wished udire * — — costui * — volere (2) to see him. (3) t7(l) 55 23. They made so ^reat a noise in praise of Saint Henry, " fare * romore — lode — santo Arrigo that thunder would not have been heard. — tuono non si sarehhe potuto udire 24. These are foolish complaints, and proceeding- questo{4.) (3) sciocco (\)* lamentansa(2) — procedente* from little reflection. — * consider azione 25. Heaven forbid, that so much baseness should ever (2) iogliere(\) — * villa in Romano enter the breast of a Roman. spirit alb er gar possa giammai 26. In so great a tumult and concourse of people, it — * — — discorrimento — popolo happened that three of our citizens arrived at Trevisa. avvenire — — * — giungere in Trevigi 27. She never talked of any thing- else but the lives no7i mai ragionare — altro che* — vita of the holy fathers, and the w^ounds of Saint Francis. * — — * — piaga — * — 28. She was so obedient and so oblig-ing to her — * — (4) *(5) serventele) (1) il (2) husband, and to her subjects so g-racious (3) — verso i suddito * * and condescending-, that he thought himself the — * benigno* che — tenere * — happiest man in the world. pill contento — di — — 29. He was said to hold some of the doctrines of si diceva che egli tenesse alquanto — — opinione — the Epicurean. — Epicurio * 30. The bride was little pleased with such an incidento — sposa — * contento* * tal ventura 56 CHAP. IX. OF AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. Among the remarkable peculiarities in nouns of the Italian language, there are some alterations intro- duced by custom, to express a modification of the primitive idea, by increase of one or more syllables ; a nicety which could only be expressed by an ad- jective, and, in many cases, by several words only. AUGMENTATIVES. I. 1. E vedemmo a mancina un And we beheld a larg-e rock gran petrone. D. on the left hand. 2. lo m'accorsi die 'I monte I perceived that the mountain era scemo, a guisa che i was hollow, like large VALLONi sceman quid. vales in this country. D. Augmentatives are formed by changing the last vowel of the substantive into one. Pietra and valle are the substantives corresponding with rock and vale: by augmenting them into petrone and vallone, we com- municate to them the idea of size and extent. These qualities are usually considered as appertaining to the male kind ; but if the noun to which we add the ter- mination be feminine, it hence becomes masculine. In the above examples, therefore, from pietra and valle of the feminine gender, we make two masculine nouns, by changing them into petrone and vallone. Every noun, without exception, admits of this alteration. The adjective gran, applied to petrone, in the first example, shows that, although the idea of greatness is implied in the augmentative, we may yet strengthen it by an adjective. 57 IL 1. Io\m*assettai in su quelle I set myself upon those larg-e SPALLACCE. D. ug-ly shoulders. 2. lo duhiterei che una di I should think that one of queste femminacce non those contemptible wo- gli avesse fatta qualche men has wrought some malia, G. witchcraft upon him. 3. La trovo nel disfare un He found it in demolishing- suo CASOLARACCio. G. an ugly old house of his. By changing the last vowel of the noun into accio and accia, we form another description of augmenta- tive, implying not only the idea of greatness, but that also of ugliness and contempt ; as the sound of those terminations expresses by itself. Every noun admits of this alteration likewise, without any exception. The terminations azzo and astro, also express con- tempt : as, popolazzo, populace, from popolo, people ; giovanastro, contemptible young man, from giovane, youth. They are applied to the feminine by changing the final o into a. Besides some other terminations which are used as augmentatives (as, haciozzo, kiss of a peasant, from haciOy kiss; giovanotto, a tall young man), adjectives are also susceptible of similar modifications: 3,s,gran- daccio, of a disproportionate height 5 grassotto, rather fat ; frescozzo, or frescoccia, very fresh, from grande, grasso, fresca, tall, fat, fresh. Time and study alone can render foreigners fully acquainted with their pre- cise signification and value. Giovanotto, for instance, may also imply a young man, lusty, strong, and vi- gorous ; forese, signifies a country-woman ; foresozza, a fresh and well-formed country- girl 3 vecchio, an old man; vecchiotto, a lusty old man, &c. 58 DIMINUTIVES. 1. Non se nefarebbe uno sco- DELLiNO (scodella*) di salsa, B. 2. Presero inverso un giar- DTNETTO (giardino) la via, B. 3. Corsi al palude, e le can- NUCCE (canna) e 7 braco m'impigliar si, ch' i' caddi, D. 4. SI Tisicuzzo (tisico) e tristansuol mi parete. B. 5. Avendo quello a che ella aveva teso il lacciuolo (laccio), B. 6. Era un buono omicciuolo (uomo) d'un loro bellis- simo giardino ortolano, B. 7. E quel sen venne a riva con un VASELLO (vaso) snelletto e leggiero. D. 8. Per correr miglior acqua alsa le vele omai la na- viCELLA (nave) del mio ingegno. D. 9. Quante volte f ho to detto, PAZZERELLA (pazza)che tu se' . ., F. One could not extract from it a little cup of juice. They took a walk towards a little garden. I ran to the marsh, where the rushes and the mud entangled me so much, that I fell. You appear to me so spare and thin. Having that for which she had spread the net. A good little man was the gardener of a very fine garden belonging to them. And he came ashore with a little boat, swift and light. The barque of my imagination now raises its sails to run over a better sea. How many times did I tell you, little fool that you are . . . The above terminations are most frequently used as diminutives. The peculiar force of each, will appear by the following description, translated from the Gram- mar of Biagioli. The first termination, ino, expresses not only the littleness of the object, but sometimes also that afiec- tion and tenderness with which Nature inspires us for beings who have the greatest need of our assistance. * The word between parentheses is the original. 59 Observe, that nouns so modified, convey to our ima- gination some peculiar grace or charm in the objects to which they are applied, and this idea the cadence itself supports. The second, etto, may express — 1. Simply an idea of littleness, as in the form giardinetto, of the second example.— 2. It may express both littleness and grace, as in this example of Dante : per le sorrise parolette brevi; by these short and gracious words, attended with a smile. — 3. It may be expressive both of lit- tleness and contempt, as in mnetto, a little man, in the following example from Caro : Chi e questo ometto che ci e venuto a dir villania in casa nostra? Who is that contemptible little man that came to our house and abused us ? The third, iiccio, denotes littleness ; but it may also represent an idea either of contempt or of grace. Dante gives us an example of the first meaning, in the word cannucce, of the third example. Matte o Villani gives us an example of the second in the word cappelliiccio, saying, con vil cappeUuccio ; with a mean little hat. Lastly, Boccaccio offers us an example of the third modification, when he says, con una boccuccia picco- Una; with a pretty little mouth. The fourth, uzzo, used as a sign of littleness, with regard to persons, indicates an excessive leanness; but it may also be the expression of grace. It con- veys the first idea in the form tisicnzzo, in the fourth example of Boccaccio. The other is apparent in the word occhiuzzo, diminutive of occhio, in the following example, taken from the Fiera of Buonarroti : Ha ella pill quegli occliiuzzi rihaldi che mifer pazziar? Has she still those little malicious eyes which made a fool of me? i2 60 The fifth, uolOf marks smallness and contempt; Boccaccio affords the first signification, in the word lacciuolo, of the fifth example; and expresses the second in the following sentence : Mercatantuolo, di quattro denari ch' egli e! Shabby merchant, not worth a groat ! The sixth, icciuolo, signifies smallness ; but it may also express little value attached to the person thus qualified. Ariosto gives us the first signification, in the word omicciuolo; he says, Gli dimostro il bruttissimo omicciuolo ; He showed him the very ugly little man : and Boccaccio expresses the other by the word omic- ciuolo, of the sixth example. The seventh, ello, may express simply an idea of insignificance, or of contempt for the person so qua- lified. Dante gives the first meaning, in the word vasello, Firenzuola affords us the other signification, by the word procuratorello, a mean attorney, in the pas- sage, Che direte d'un certo procuratorello, il quale ella fece diventare un montone? What will you say of a certain mean attorney, whom she metamorphosed into a sheep ? The eighth, iceZ/o," may express — 1. Merely small- ness. — 2. Contempt. — 3. A certain interest for the individual. The first signification is given by Dante, in the w^ord navicella, of the eighth example; the second by Boccaccio, in the word fraticello, little monk, by saying, un fraticello pazzo, a mad and con- temptible monk ; and the last in the same word by Pe- trarch : e i nerifraticelli, e i bigi, e i hianchi; and the poor monks, the black, the brown, and the white. The ninth, erello, may denote simply the littleness of an object, and also its slightness. Redi affords us the first example, in the word coserella, a little things 61 as thus, I lihri son tutte coserelle stampate in questa citta; The books are all trifles, printed in this town. Firenzuola gives us the second, in the yt oxdi pazzerella, a little fool, in the ninth sentence. There is yet another termination, icciatto, or icciat- tolo, and which marks the most thorough contempt. Crusca produces the following example: Egli e un certo omicciatto, che non e nessun di voi che veggen- dolo, non Vavesse a noia; He is a little man, so con- temptible, that there is none of you, who, on seeing him, would not be disgusted with him. Sometimes a noun altered by one of these termina- tions, changes its gender. In the first example, for instance, from scodella, feminine, we have formed sco-- dellino, a masculine noun ; so, from hotte, cask, hotti- cello, a little cask ; and some others. The terminations one and accio, of the first and se- cond paragraph of augmentatives, may be applied to every word. But it is impossible to establish rules for diminutives ; one modification is more proper for one word than for another, either from its harmony, or from custom ; and by practice alone can we acquire a correct taste in the application. For this reason, there- fore, in the following exercise, the proper termina- tions, excepting the two last mentioned, will be placed under the English adjective; and, by substituting them for the final vowel of the noun, the student will form the augmentatives and the diminutives. 62 EXERCISE V. 1. My child, thou art now rather tall. figliuol mio — — oggimai (icello) grande. 2. He who rides before, is a youth, questi che cavalcareQl^ avanti(^i') — — - gicvinetto a relation of ours. nostra parente 3. The girl broug-ht him to the house of — (icella fante) €ondurre(2) il(l) — casa —^ this man. costui 4. Now there was by chance a poor little woman allora(2) (1) — awentura ( etta) femmina on the shore. a — marina 5. He knew perfectly both the place and the little — sapere ottimamente — luogo — — (icella J tower. 6. If you are content to leave this little childt — — contentarsi* — lasciare questo* (etta) Jigliuola with me, I will willing-ly take her. appresso di (3) prendere(2) la (I) 7. As they travelled along, talking of various things, camminando insieme e ragionare — — — they came into a large solitary vale, surrounded pervenire — — * (2) (1) e chiuso with high grottos. * t When a word containing the syllahle mo, suffers an alteration, the accent which is upon the o, passes to a following vowel; and for that reason, the u of the radical is taken off. Thus, from uomo, figliuolo^ we make omettOy omuzzoy &c. figlioletto, figliolino, &c. ; from gmoco, play, nuoto, swimming, we say, giocoso, pleasant, notare, to swim. The syllable ie is sometimes subject to this alteration ; for instance, pietruy stone, from the authorities, Dante and Boccaccio, makes petronc, petrina, pe- truzza. 63 8. The lady being* left alone, disconsolate, as soon — donna rimaso* — e sconsolato as the nig-ht set in, went to a little come — — fu venuta andarsene * — — (ettaj neig'hbouring' village. vicino (2) villa ( 1 ) 9. You see he is a great, ugly, stupid vedere che un cotal * sciocco (2) fellow, who has outgrown his wit. giovane^l) cresciuto avanti a ilf senno 10. Though he was covetous, he yet possessed some quantunque fosse (2) (1) avendo in se alcuna small sparks of gentility, and received Pietro with (uzsaj favilla — gentilezza — — — very friendly words and a cheerful countenance. assm(2) amichevole(S) (1) lieto viso 11. We are here near a well, where there is usually — — qui presso a — — al quale suole sempre essere a pulley, and a very large pail. la carrucola — — gran * secchia 12. If it were agreeable to you and my father, I quando piacere(5) * (4) (3) mio(l) (2) — would gladly have a little bed made volentieri (2) fare (I) (4) ficelloj (5) /are (3) on the terrace. in su — verone 13. Oh, you would think her a very large and fine woman. oh ella vi parrehbe la (accia) hello femmina 14. Seeing about twenty persons kneeling before a — fo7'se — — ginocchioni innanzi a — small altar, I asked one of them what sort of (ino) — domandare — — loro che devotion it was. — quellaQl) (\) 15. Let me remove this small nosegay that I lascia * levar questo (olino) mazzo di fiori che — have in my cap, which the lady has given me. la berretta che — dama(5) (2) donati(3) *(1) t When one of the prepositions mentioned in page 24, is separated, in the exercises, from the article, it is for the student to unite the two words. 64 16. Last nig-lil he broke open the house of a poor little stanotte e' rompere — uscio a (icciuola) woman. donna 17. Ah, impudent liar! he has the audacity to look at me, ah (one) hugiardo — mi guar da anche insolent scoundrel ! (accioj sfacciato 18. Every part was strewed with sweet-smelling- little ogni cosa — seminato — odoroso(2) (uccia) herbs, and pretty flowers. erba(\) — he' fiore 19. The same day, having- had a small cask filled quel medesimo di fatto — (icello) hotte riempiere with wine, he sent it to his house. * vino ilfece portare — (2) (1) 20. He had put some little stones into his — s* aveva messe alcuno * (usza) pietra — mouth. 21. If you continue in your obstinacy, I dove — steste duro in su la vostro * — — shall think you a g-reat blockhead. avrei per — — * sciocco 22. He threw upon it the coarse cloth of a gittare (2) sopra (3) vi (^1} un * panno , large sack. * 23. He opened a little door which was there, and — — (uolo) uscio il quale (2) v' (\) — went down into the cave. discendere (a) (1) (2) grotta(d>) 24. I had not even the slightest thought of doing — — — pure un fuzzo) — — fare what you say. quello che — — 25. Know that I was then a little boy. sapere — — — allora piccolino 65 CHAP. X. OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. COMPARATIVES OF EQUALITY. Words employed to mark such Comparisons, First Term. cost, - as, or so ; sij - - as, or so ; cost tosto, as soon ; cost pill tosto, as soon ; Second Term. come, - as. come, - as. come tosto, as. come piu tosto, as. as. *„ * (as, or so much,) quanto piu, the more ; tanto piu, - the more. quanto meno, the less ; tanto meno, the less. tanto piu - so much more; quanto piu, as much more. I. 1. lo mi credo che cosi sia come voi mifavellate. B. 2. lo non son si vecchio come vi pare, B. 3. Foi won ve ne avvedeste cosi tosto come ha fatto egli. B. 4. Verrete come piti tosto potrete, B. I believe it is as you tell me. I am not so old as you sup- pose. You did not perceive it so soon as he did. You will come as soon as you can. From the above examples, we see that, in a com- parison of equality, the term corresponding with si or cost, is come. If the word tosto or piii tosto be added to the form of comparison, it must be omitted either the first or second time, to give greater rapidity to the K expression. Then, in the third example, tosto is omitted in the second form ; and in the fourth, the first form of the comparison, cost piii tosto, is under- stood. II. 1. Di questo mondo ha cia- scun tanto, quanto egli se ne toglie. B. 2. lo v' attendei^o quanto vi sard a grado. B. 3. Quanto piii io uso con voi, tanto piti mi parete sa- vio, B. 4. £'piu tanto sono essi ancor migliori, quanto son piu vicini al pastor princi' pale. B. Of this world, every one en- joys as much as he is able. I will wait for you as long aa you please. The more I live with you, the wiser I find you. They are so much belter as they are nearer to the principal pastor. 5. Quanti nella sala erano parevano uomini adorn- braii. B. 6. Fede portai al glorioso ujfflsio tanto, ch' i' ne perde' le vene e i' polsi, D. All the persons in the room seemed converted to sta- tues. I exercised my office so faith- fully, that it caused the loss of my life. The first example shows that the term answering to the adjective tanto, when it marks comparison, must be quanto. From the second we learn that, if it be immediately followed by quanto, the former is omitted, unless it be emphatical, as in the first example. Like- wise, the expressions quanto piii, quanto meno, have for their correlatives, tanto piu, tanto meno; as appears by the third and fourth examples. The expression of the third is inverted, and when the English sentence begins with the more, the first term in Italian must be quanto piu. The adverbs piii and meno are not to be expressed, if the comparison fall upon adjectives in themselves implying comparison ; for instance, tanto 67 maggiore, quanto maggiore, the greater; although, in order to force the comparison, Boccaccio says in the fourth example, tanto piu migliori. To feel the weight of the adjective quanti, of the fifth example, it is neces- sary to restore the words omitted by ellipsis, viz. (tanti uominij quanti (erano quelli die) erano nella sola (tutti) parevano, &c. from which we learn that quanti may supply the English words, all the people who, all the persons who, &c. The sixth example is given, to show the student that if the word tanto denote excess, namely, when the expressions so, so much, so long, &c. are followed by that, instead of than, the former is to be supplied in Italian by che, and not by quanto. The words cosi, come, are used to express compa^ rison of the quality of objects; tanto, quanto, express- ing comparison of quantity. In the English language, the forms so and as are used in both comparisons ; and to give a simple rule for the proper use of these Italian terms, we shall observe that, if the particles as and so are followed by the words many, much, &c. we should employ tanto, quanto; but if not, cosl, come, must be used. The word such, employed for so, before an ad- jective, and for so great, so much, &c. before a sub- s^tantive, are translated by cost, si, tanto; as, for in- stance. He was such a vile man. Era si malvagio uomo; They made such a noise, Facevano tanto romore, &c. Comparisons of Superiority and Inferiority. III. 1 . Chi starebbe meg-lio di me, se quegli denari fosser mieii B. 2. Valeva piu di tre mila lire, B, 3. Voi potreste esser caduto in mag'g'ior pericolo di questo. B. 4. Eir ^ piu innamorata che savia, B. 5. Tutti e tre a Firense piu che mai strabocchevol- mente spendevano. B. 6. il me era assai piu a grado la morte che t7 |?ii^ vi- vere. B. 7. Ti^^fe le sense che allega sono piu brutte che *7 /a^^o stesso. Caro. 8. Jo .9fo meg-lio che npn state voi. B. Who would be luckier than 1, if that money were mine? It cost more than two thou- sand pounds. You mig-ht have incurred a greater dang-er than this. She is more enamoured than wise. At Florence they were all three more extravag-ant tuan ever. Death would have been much r/iore welcome to me than life. All the excuses which he makes, are more shameful than the action itself. I am better than you are. Some adjectives express comparison only by them- selves ; as maggiore, elder or greater ; minore, younger or less; migliore, better; peggiore, worse. Also the adverbs meglio, better; peggio, worse. In every other case, the comparative is formed by applying the ad- verbs piii and meno, more and less, to the adjective, and its correlative form may be di or che; upon which two forms, as they are differently employed, we shall give the following rule : If the second particle of the comparison, than, is applied to a personal noun, a pronoun, a demonstrative, or a numeral adjective, the preposition di must supply thaiiy as may be observed in the three first examples ; if the second term of com- 60 parison be an adjective, an adverb, or any other word, except the three above-mentioned, the particle than must be translated by che. As appears from the last example, than is rendered by che, even be- fore a pronoun, if it represent the subject of a verb expressed. For those, however, who may wish to look at the nature and causes of things, I shall here enlarge upon the subject. We shall, in the first place, establish that the word che* is but the word which, an adjective ge- nerally relative to questo or quello, this or that. Besides, in comparisons of superiority and inferiority, there is always the idea, messo a fronte, that is, put in com- parison with, or, set in opposition to, either expressed or understood. Then, by supplying, in such compa- rative propositions, the words omitted by virtue of ellipsis, we shall see that the second term of the com- parison is subject to variety, by means of the connec- tion of words, and is represented by che, when the expression a fronte di (which cannot be applied to a verb, an adjective, or an adverb) wants the support of the demonstrative quello. The following is the analysis and entire signification of the above-mentioned sen- tences : 1. Chi starebbe meglio (messo a fronte) di me; — 2. Valeva piu (il suo valore essendo messo a fronte) di tre mila lire; — 3. Voi potreste esser caduto in maggior pericolo (quello supposto essendo messo a fronte) di questo; — 4. Ella e piii innamorata (questo stato messo a fronte di quello in) che (e) savia; — 5. Tutti e tre spendevano piu (lo spendere d'allora essendo messo a fronte di quello) che (facessero) mai; i. e. in alcuno altro tempo; — 6. A me era assai piii a grado la morte {il piacere essendo messo a fronte di quello) che il piii * See Chap. XXVJI. Of Conjunctions. 70 vivere (mi fosse); — 7. Tutte le sense che allega sono piu brutte (messe a fronte di quello) che il fatto stesso (e); — 8. lo sto meglio (il mio stato essendo messo a fronte di quello in) che non* state voi, IV. 1. I suoi ragionamenti sono His discourses have been ^owgr stati piu lunghi che io er than I expected. non m' aspettava. Caro, 2. Priegovi che non mi vo^ I beg- of you not to insult me gliate ingiuriare piu di more than you have done, quello che vi abbiatefatto, F. 3. Non jia men creduto a me I will be trusted no less than che a voi, B. you. 4. Questa cosa non si pud This can be kept no longer tener piu segreta. G. a secret. 5. Disse alia huonafemmina He told the good w^oman che piu di cassa non that he had no farther avea bisogno. B. use for the chest. When the second term of comparison is represented by a sentence, the particle than, may be supplied equally by the words che non, as in the first example, and by the expression di quello che, as in the second. The former is always attended with the negative, be- cause, in fact, our expectation, supposition, or desire, is then negative ; viz. contrary to what happens. My meaning here is, that, in the first sentence, by the ne- gative non, the Italians express an idea which is sup- posed in English, the negative being always implied in the word than; for the expression, "his discourses have been longer than I expected," is equivalent to " his discourses have been long ; nay, I did not expect that they would be so long." Likewise, in this example * The cause of this negative is given in the next rule. 71 from Boccaccio, bevendo piii cite non avrebbe voluto, the expression, " drinkiog more than he wished," answers to " and he drank a good deal ; nay, he did not wish to drink so much." In the same way we might prove that tlie term than always implies a ne- gative proposition, and therefore corresponds with che non. The third example shows that, whenever the nega- tive precedes the adverbs, less, more, farther, &c. it must in Italian be placed before the verb. In the fourth and fifth examples, the word piu re- presents the first part of a comparison; the second term is understood in both languages. The full con- struction of that comparison is, per uno spazio di tempo piu lungo di quello che e scorso. The word piii is, there- fore, sufficient to supply the comparatives, longer, fur- ther, SLnd farther, when they signify length of time. It is to be observed that, in translating such comparisons, the negative is taken from the comparative, and placed before the verb ; and if this transposition be already effected in English, as, for instance, '' this cannot be kept any longer a secret," the word any is not trans- lated in Italian. 1. Faceva le piu belle favole He invented the most plausi- del mondo. B. ble stories in the world. 2. lo sard il miglior marito I will be the best husband in del mondo. B. the world. 3. Egli mi da grandissima He gives me very great trou- molestia. B. ble. The superlative relative, so termed, because denot- ing the highest degree of any quality in an object re- latively only to the same description of objects, is expressed in Italian by applying the article and the 72 adverb pm to the adjective, as in the first example; or the article to the comparative, as in the second. We perceive from the third, that the superlative, termed absolute, is formed in Italian by changing the last vowel of the adjective into issimo; and that the terminating vowel of the superlative is subject to the same rules of gender and number as the primary ad- jective in o. If the termination of the adjective be co, or go, it changes into cJiissimo and ghissimo in its superlative. There are some adjectives which have in themselves a superlative signification, as ottimo, per- fect; acerrimo, very rude, &c. The repetition of an adjective is to be considered as a superlative. Firenzuola, for instance, says : con una catena lunga lunga, with a very long chain ; but this, with greater propriety, may be termed an idiom of our language. EXERCISE Vt. 1. You are the happiest woman in the world I — — — * avventurato donna — — — 2. I, who am young, can work better than you, who — che — — — faticar — * — — are old. 3. Naples is a very ancient city, and perhaps as pleasant _ * (2) (1) — — * dilettevole as any other in Italy. * alcuno altro — — 4. Nothing becomes a woman more than nulla cosa star f bene (4) in (2) donna (3) (1) — courtesy. i* I adopt star, not that the verb may be left in the infinitive, but because stare bene vi'ould be contrary to the rules of harmony. I 73 5. My child, not far from hence is a holy man, Jigliuol mio — guari lontan cli qui — — — — who is a better master in that which thou art il quale — — — di cid che — andare seeking- than I am. 6. From certain interrogations^ he knew her to be as per — domanda conoscere lei — * simple as she appeared. — * parere 7. This man was as much distressed at the death of costui rimanere * sconsolato per — — — his wife as any other ever was. la sua donna * alcuno altro — rimanesse 8. My weakness did not induce me so much as la mia fragilitd — — * * » your want of solicitude. la vostra poca sollecitudine 9. She was one of the finest creatures that had ever — — — — * bello — — fosse — been formed by Nature. 10. My story will not be concerning- persons of such la mia novella — — di gente — si high rank as those of whom you have just — condi^ione * costoro de' quali — — spoken. raccontare 11. Many persons pay as much regard to dreams, as — prestare * fede — — * they would do to those things which they should see prestare — quello — che vedessero waking. vegghiare 12. In a short time it became so tame, that it — brieve spazio divenire * dimestico * never parted from me. punto non partirsi * — — 13. She, who was not less honest than fair, took no account ella — — — * hello niente si curava of those things, nor of him who did them. — quello — — — colui che (2) le{\) 74 14. No one is so much a friend as man to himself. nullo — piu — * — — * 15. I would rather have been dead than alive. — volere piu tosto — — — * — 16. The jew mounted on horseback, and as soon as he — — — a cavallo — * could, went to the court of Rome. potere andarsene* in — — — 17. The more we speak of the chances of fortune, the more * si parla — — fatto — — * there /remains to be saidx of them. \restare a poter dire/(2) ne (1) 18. We will make that determination which shall appear prendere quello partito che parere the best to you. * * 19. I have sold the greater part of my lands, — — farf vender e * le mie possessione and have brought hither as much merchandize as — — recare qui * mercatanzia che is worth more than two thousand pounds. valere * * — mila lira 20. Death will be more dear to me than life, with — — * — * * il vivere — consciousness of my baseness. rimemhransa — la mia viltd 21. Certainly I will defend her as much as I can. per certo — (2) la(\) * * — potrd 22. God has been more merciful to you than you have — — — * misericordioso di — * — been to yourself. medesimo 23. They were the most beautiful and charming children — — * bello — X vezzoso fanciullo in the world. f When there are two verbs for one, the first only must agree with the English. X The form expressing the superlative, must be repeated before every adjective referring to one substantive so qualified. 75 24. She confessed that the chamber was made as he — — cosi esserfatta la camera * — described it. dire 25. I love him more than I love myself. — (2) r(l) * * mestesso' 26. In the middle was a field of very smooth grass, — — — — — prato — * minuto — coloured with a thousand varieties of flowers, and dipinto * mille — — — — surrounded with very fine orang-e and cedar-trees. chiuso d'intorno — * verde — — cedro 27. We often see it happen, that the more hope — sovente(2) (1) avvenire * — decays, the more love increases. diventa minore * — maggior farsi 28. He had one of the most beautiful horses in aveva — — — * bello pallafr^eno * Tuscany. 29. Having" taken a light in a small lantern, he prendere — lume — — (etta) — went into a very long gallery in his palace. aindarsene * — — * — casa — il suo — 30. 1 can conceal it no longer from you. — celare lo — * vi CHAP. Xl. ADJECTIVES OF A PECULIAR KIND. Tutto, - all, the whole. Niuno, -^ no, not any, Ogni, - every, each. Nessuno, *-^none; nobody, Ognuno, -) every one or ^^^^^^> -) or not anybody. Ciascuno, - > h ' Nullo, - no, not any. Ciascheduno, j ' Niente, - nothing. Qualche, - some, any. Chiunque, - whoever. Alcuno, - 1 some, any ; Qualunque, ^ Qualcuno, - > somebody, or Qualsisia, ->any whatever. Qualcheduno , J anybody. Qualsivoglia,} l2 76 I. 1. Tutta la corte, B. 2. Tutta la brigata. B. 3. Ogni altra cosa sia vo- stra. B. 4. A tutti diceva die suoi figliuoli erano. B. The whole court. All the company. Every thing- else may be yours. He told every body that they were his sons. In Italian, the noun to which the adjective tutto is applied, must always be attended with the article, which ought to be placed between the two words. Ogni is invariable. When the word tutto is applied to men in general, the substantive may be understood as in the fourth example. II. 1. Tu dehbi essere qualche sciocco. F. 2. Dopo mlcun giorno riparlb alia cameriera. B. 3. JSssi sono alcuna volta da alcuna dinoi cautamente heffati. B. 4. Alcuni erano di piu crudel sentimento. B. 5. Per salvar la vita, senza colpa si sono uccisi f al- cuni individuij degli uomini, B. You are certainly a simpleton. Some days after, she spoke again to her chamber- maid. They are sometimes imposed upon by some of us. Some entertained a more cruel opinion. To save life, some men have been killed, without hav- ing committed any crime. The adjective qualche is invariable, and can only designate a single person or object; alamo may be employed for one or more persons or objects, and varies, therefore, according to the gender and number of the noun. The former requires that its noun be expressed. With the latter, if the noun be uomo, or 77 tiomini, it may be understood, as seen by the fourth example. It may be remarked in the first example, that the Italians use the word qualclie, and sometimes akuno, to denote one individual alone, when, in English, the particle a is employed. As the word alcuno does not merely denote one person alone, so it is very often used in the singular termination, although it expresses the plural number. Thus, in the second and third examples, the expres- sions alcun giorno, alcuna volta, alcuna di not, do not signify one day, once, one of us, but some days, some- times, some of us; so that the word some is frequently rendered in Italian by alcuno in Ihe singular. Alcuno is used in preference to qualcuno and qualcheduno. The adjective alcuno is sometimes omitted in Italian as well as its substantive, as in the lifth example; especially when the word some is applied to a noun in the singular, as in the following sentences: Pianger senti' fra'l sonno i I heard my children crying- mieifgliuoli, e dimandar in sleep, and asking some del pane. D. bread. (Dated) del cacio e delle Give us some cheese and frutte, e sopra tutto buon fruit, and especially good vino. F. wine. These examples seem to be in opposition to the principle laid down in the Chapter on the Article, wherein we state, that the noun, taken in a partitive sense, does not admit of the article; but the student will recollect, that at the end of the same chapter we observed, that the expression partitive sense, is em- ployed to use words which, though less precise, might appear clearer; as, however abstruse the reason given respecting the application of the article to the word 78 constancy (page 27), may appear, it is the only one which can be called precise; and those only who adopt that principle, namely, that the article is ap- plied to a noun either when it is determinative or determinate, will be able to understand the theory of the application of an article. We there remarked, that the word constancy is a determinative of the generic name virtue; in like manner, in the above examples, pane and cacio are determinatives of ciho, food, and frutte, of prodotto, production ; and our determination, in that case, is intended to distinguish those foods and productions from others. In fact, the speaker does not apply the article to vino, in the second example, because his mind is occupied by the quality of the species, and not by the species of the generic liquor. I do not expect the student, whenever he has to use a noun, to bewilder himself by consider- ing in this way, whether or not it requires the article ; but I trust that he will endeavour to comprehend the reason, why Italians employ the article when it is omitted by the English, and vice versa; in order that he may profit by practice. The literal translation oi Dimandar del pane; Dated del cacio e delle/rutte, is. To have of the bread ; Give us of the cheese and of the fruit. In this we could find no meaning, without supplying those words which are implied by the ellipses : i. e. dimandar (alcuna porzione) del (ciho) pane; dated (alcuna porzione) delle (produzioni) frutte. Then, as the word alcuno, some, which the English express in similar sentences, is always omitted in Italian ; whilst the preposition eft, of, and the article, which the Italians express, are, on the contrary, omitted in English ; we may conclude that whenever 79 the word some is employed to denote a portion of something, as when it is applied to those words which are most used in the singular, as, pane, bread ; vino, wine; acqua, water; grano, corn, &c. the preposition di, with the article, supply its place. III. 1. Niuno rimedio veggo. B. I see no remedy. 2. Non ci ha mandata can- He has sent us no candle. dela niuna. B. 3. Non vo' dir niente. F. I will tell nothing. 4. Non faro nulla. B. I will do nothing". The words niente, nulla, nessuno, niuno, do not ad- mit of the negative when preceding the verb ; but it is requisite before the verb when followed by those words. The first mode of expression is, however, the more forcible. The substantive may be omitted when the word nulla has reference to cosa, thing, as in the fourth example. When the word no is applied, either to a plural noun, or to one of those which are used only in the singular, as, bread, patience, wisdom, &c. it is trans- lated in Italian by the simple negative non, placed before the verb, thus: "there were no men; he will have no patience ; he has no wisdom ;" non c'erano uomini; non vuol aver pazienza ; non ha senno. There- fore, when this word no is represented by not any, and applied to such nouns as the above, viz. He will not have any patience, — then any is not translated ; non vuol aver pazienza. The adjectives nullo, nessuno, and niu7io, being compounded of the negatives non, ne, or ni and uno, cannot, therefore, be used in the plural. 80 IV. Cost detlo licen^io ciascuno. B. Ognun direbbe, ben li sta F. Chiunque veniva faceva ricevere. B. Fuggi i tempestosi mart, ateea qualunque altro. B. Saying- this, he dismissed every one. Every one would say: he has deserved it. He desired that whoever came should be received. Fly from these seas, tempes- tuous for thee and for any other man whatever. Eoth ciascuno and ognuno may be used to signify every one, as well as ciascheduno; the latter is, how- ever, seldom employed. Chiunque answers to whoever, which may also be represented by qualunque: as, when Dante says, Qualunque priva se del vostro mondo ; Whoever deprives himself of bis life ; but then the word uomo is understood, which is implied in chiunque. Ognuno and chiunque may be styled pronouns, as they stand by themselves. Qualunque is used rather than qualsisia and qualsivoglia, to express any whatever^ and must be placed before its substantive. 1 . Una mia vicina mi disse che Vuna e I'altra fu vera. B. 2. Si per la sua nobiltd. e si per la sua sciensa, cit- tadinescamente viveasi. B. 3. PercM me ne incresce, e per levar via gli scan- dali. F. 4. Per lo loro senno, o per la loro buona ventura. B. A neig-hbour of mine told me that both stories were true. Both on account of his rank and learning-, he lived as became a citizen. Both because it grieves me, and to prevent scandal. Either by their prudence or their g-ood fortune. The words either^ neither, and both, may be trans- lated in Italian by Vuno o V altro, ne Vuno ne r altro y 81 Vuno e Valtro, when referring, as in the first ex- ample, to something already spoken of; but they are not translated when specified by two following nouns or sentences, as appears from the third and fourth examples. ThQ particle si, repeated as in the second example, may supply botJi. Si is one of the terms of comparison treated in the preceding chapter ; in this case we repeat si, instead of employing come for the second term. The diction of the third, omitting both, is most frequently employed. Each other is ren- dered in Italian by run Valtro; for instance, the three (spirits) looked at each other; i tre guatarf Vun Valtro; — they said to each other; diceva Vuno alValtro, EXERCISE VII. 1. The worthy man used to come some times to — valente — essere usato — — * volta — Florence. 2. Every one took out his ring. * produrre — il suo — 3. Whoever saw him, fled. * (2) i7(l) fuggire 4. He fell in with some persons who seemed to be abbattersi* in * li quali parere merchants^ and they were highwaymen. mercatante — — masnadiere + Guatar, a syncope of guatarojw. In these two examples we remark that one verb, gnatar, is in the plural, and the other, diceva, in the sin- gular ; for which seeming inconsistency two reasons may be assigned. The first is, that in the former instance, the subject is expressed in the plural, t ire; whilst, in the latter, it is in tlie singular, as the direct construction is, I'uno diceva alValtro. Secondly, by the plural guatar, Dante represents the three spirits looking at the same time at each other ; which is not the case with Boccaccio, in the other sentence, as they could only speak one at a time. M 82 5. Let none of you dare to touch me, * — — essere ardito — — * 6. The whole people of the town flocked to the house * popolo — concorreva — — — where his corpse was lying-. nella quale il suo — giacere 7. No one in the world knows it. * persona * — — sapere(2') t7(l) 8. Among-st his other servants, he had a youth, fra gli altri suoi famigliari — — giovinetto g-enteel, and fit for any thing whatever. leggiadro — destro a * — * 9. God alone knows perfectly what is necessary Iddio — sapere ottimamente cid che fare mestieri for every one. a * 10. She understood little or nothing- of that languag-e, — intendere — — — — quello lingua 11. Lady Isabella's presence of mind, related by madonna — * avvedimento raccontare — Pampinea, was admired by the whole — — tenere maraviglioso — * company. hrigata 12. Seeing- some women dance after the Majorca fashion, — * donna hallare a — Maiolica* maniera she danced after that of the Alexandrians. — — — la maniera Alessandrina 13. Every part of the house was full of merry feasting^. * — — — — — ripieno — lieto festa 14. Having sat down, they first had some pease postisi a tavola pi^imieramente — * cece and tunny-fish, and then some fried fish, without — * so7'ra — appresso * (2) (I) — any thing- else. piu 83 15. Gentlemen and ladies, it is your custom to send every signore — donna — — usanza — — * year to the poor brethren of the baron Saint Anthony, — — — * — — baron — — some of your corn. * vostro — 16. To him who has understanding-, no grief is equal to — chi — conoseimento * dolore — pari — that of having- lost timet. quello — avere (2) (1) 17. She was considered a saint almost by everyone. — tenere — — — — * 18. Cj'mon was known almost to every one in the country, Cimone — nolo — — * di — paese both for his rusticity, and his father ^s nobility and si — la sua ros^ez^a — * il — * — — wealth. 19. He, who had more desire to eat than sleep, — die — maggior voglia — — * — asked whether there was any thing- for supper. domandare se vi fosse * — da cena 20. Whoever does otherwise, sins. * (2) (I) - 21. Certainly the learning: of every other man whatever certo — dottrina — (2) *(1) is tardy, in comparison with thine. — — a rispelto di la tua 22. This must be some trick of his. questo dovere — * inganno 23. Could you tell me of any thing- that has never potere — insegnare * * — che mai non yet been seen? fosse — — t To distinguish if the word tempo requires the article in this case, the student must consider whether the mind of the speaker intends to designate the length of time, or to determine by that word the generic nature of the thing lost. See page 27 , the argumentation on the word constajicy. m2 84 24. In stature and comeliness he exceeded all di grande^za — * hellezza di corpo trapassare * the other young- men. 25. This novel afforded very great mirth and pleasure questo — porgere * — solla^so — — to the whole company. — * hrigata 26. I promise you I will do him no harm. — — * che (2) gli(\) * — 27. I desire and command, that every one may be prepared — volere — — — * apparecckiarsi* t to treat to-morrow upon what has happily di dovere domani ragionare di cib che felicemente befallen some lovers, after some cruel and unlucky avvenisse a * amante dopo * fiero — sventurato accidents. accidente 28. I have a g-reat desire to have some of those pears : — — — — — — * — quello pera (thou) climb the tree, and throw a few down. X montaresu — alhero — gittarne * (2)g-tw(l) 29. Give the priest some wine from the cask placed dare a — — * — di — hotte ag-ainst the wall. di lungo — — 30. If I thoug-ht that thou wouldest tell it to no dove — credere — — appalesassi (J>) ^(4) (1) *(2) person, I would reveal it to thee. (3) — insegnare I' — — i* See the note to the verb empiere, at the end of the Grammar, in the table of the regular verbs ending in ere. I The personal noun is added, to show that the verb is in the singular. 85 CHAR XII. OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. Cardinal Numbers. Ordinal Numbers. Uno, one. Prima, first. Due, two. Secondo, second. Tre, three. Terzo, third. Quattro, four. Quarto, fourth. Cinque, five. Quinto, fifth. Sei, six. Sesto, sixth. Sette, seven. Settimo, seventh. Otto, eight. Ottavo, eighth. Nove, nine. Nona, ninth. Died, ten. Decimo, tenth. Undid, eleven. Undecimo, eleventh. Dodici, twelve. Duodecimo, twelfth. Tredici, thirteen. Decimo terzo. thirteenth. Quattordici, fourteen. Decimo quarto. fourteenth. Quindici, fifteen. Decimo quinto. fifteenth. Sedici, sixteen. Decimo sesto. sixteenth. Diciassette, seventeen. Decimo settimo. seventeenth. Diciotto, eighteen. Decimo ottavo. eighteenth. Diciannove, nineteen. Decimo nono. nineteenth Venti, twenty. Ventesimo, twentieth. Venf uno. twenty-one. Ventesimo primo, twenty-first. Ventidue, Sfc. twenty-two. Ventesimo secondo,&,-i ?. twenty-second. Trenta, thirty. Trentesimo, thirtieth. Quaranta, forty. Quarantesimo, fortieth. Cinquanta, fifty. Cinquantesimo, fiftieth. Sessanta, sixty. Sessantesimo, sixtieth. Settanta, seventy. Settantesimo, seventieth. Ottanta, eighty. Ottantesimo, eightieth. NovantOy ninety. Novantesimo, ninetieth. Cento, hundred. Centesimo, hundredth. Mille, thousand. Millesimo, thousandth. The forms, dodiceshnOy twelfth ; tredicesimo, thi teenth ; quattordicesimo, fourteenth, &c. are used only in familiar language. The placing of the inferior before the superior number, as three-and-twe?ity, four-and- 86 twenty, &c. is not admitted in Italian : we must say, venture, ventiquattro, &c. I. 1. In tutto lo spa^io delta sua vita, non ebbe piii che una figliuola, B. 2. Piu tosto un altro uomo pareva, che il conte. B. 3. Faceva sempre ardere nella cameretta un gran fuoco. B. 4. Secondo uom di villa (egli erafatto), con bella per- sona. B. 5. Con gran pompa entrb in cammino. B. 6. Voi mi dite che siete stato mercatante? B. 7. Parla tu, questi e La- tino. D. 8. /' fui uom d' arme, e poi fu' cordigliero. D. In the whole course of his life, he had no more than one daughter. The count was nothing* like the same person. He kept a g-reat fire con- stantly in his little room. For a country-man, he was of a handsome person. He set out with a g-oodly train. You say that you have been a merchant ? Speak thou : this is an Ita- lian. I was a military man, and then a cordelier. The adjective uno may appear under two different views; either as a numeral adjective, when we intend to express the number rather than the species, as in the first example, or as a specific adjective, when our intention refers rather to the species of the object pointed out, than to the number, as in the second and third examples. The fourth and fifth show that, when this adjective is specific, it may be understood; in- deed, it is expressed only when we intend to mark a certain peculiarity in the object; for instance, when we modify a noun by an augmentative or a diminutive; but in no other case is it expressed. This word, placed in English before nouns denoting profession, condition, or nation, as in the three last examples. 87 is not admitted in Italian. When it follows such, so long, so great, &c. it is generally omitted in Italian ; and if it be rendered, we place it before those words j for instance, " such a thing," wia cosi fatta cosa. II. 1. Gli uomini sono huoni a mille cose. B. 2. Piu di cento spirit entro sediero. D. 3. Tre mila dugento cin- quanta miglia. D. 4. Vid' io raigliaia di lu- cerne. D. Men are fit for a thousand things. More than a hundred spirits were sitting in it. Three thousand two hundred and fifty miles. I saw thousands of lights. The Italian does not admit of the particle a placed, as in English, before hundred and thousand. Cento does not change ; but mille makes mila, when signifying more than one. We do not require any conjunction between numbers ; that which precedes fifty, in the third ex- ample, is consequently omitted in Italian. Hundreds and thousands are rendered by centinaia and migliaia, of which the Italians have the singular also, viz. centinaio and migliaio. III. 1. Guglielmo Secondo, re di Sicilia, ebbe due Jigliuoli. B. 2. Libra primOfCapitolo terzo. 3. Di Parigi, ilprimo di Fcb- braro. Bentivoglio. 4. Alii quattordici Gennaio. Davanzati. 5. Di Roma, li tredici diSet- tembre. Caro. 6. Inl' era prima. P. William the Second, king of Sicily, had two children. Book the first, chapter the third. Paris, the first of February. The fourteenth of January. Rome, the thirteenth of Sep- tember. At the first hour. By the first and second examples, we learn that the ordinal number placed after a noun, is suflicient, in 88 Italian, to determine it, without the concurrence of the article. From the third, fourth, and fifth, we see that, to mark a date, excepting the first day of the month, we make use of the cardinal number, and therefore put the article in the plural, which may be attended with the preposition a. The last example shows that the ordinal number varies in its termination according to the gender and number of the qualified word. IV. 1^ Tutti e tre parimente gli He loved all three equally. amava. B. 2. Si spogliarono tutti e sette. All seven took off their B. clothes. 3. Era in pericolo di perdere He was in danger of losing tutti due i figliuoli. both his children. Pecorone. When the word tutto is applied to a number, the con- junction e is placed between them in Italian, as in the two first examples. We may say also, tutti tre, and tutti a tre; tutti sette, and tutti a sette; but the form of the two first examples is the most prevalent. If the object, to which the word tutto and a number are applied, is expressed, as in the third example, the article necessary, in that case, must be placed after the number. V. 1. Tennemi Amor anni venf Love held me in his chains uno. P. twenty-one years. 2. Poi, per la medesima via, Then, by the same way^ it par discendere altre no- seems to descend ninety- vajif una rota. D. one turns more. S. Ogni cosa era pieno di tor- There were plenty of small chietti di me^sa libbra. wax-candles, half a pound Crasca. each. 4. Essendo in Firen^e nion- The alloy silver at Florence tato r argento delta lega amounted to eleven ounces d'once undid e meszo and a half in the pound. per libbra. Crusca. 89 When we make use of the numbers 2f, 31, 41, &c. we must put the noun of the object designed in the plu- ral, if we place it before those numbers; while the noun must be in the singular, if we make it follow them. From the third and fourth examples it appears, that if the adjective mezzo, half, be placed before the qua- lified noun, the former must agree in gender with the latter; but if mezzo be placed after the noun, the ad- jective retains the masculine termination. The particle a, applied to the word half, is not trans- lated ; but sometimes, when denoting only one half, as " half a mile," un mezzo miglio. VII. 1. Cento venticingue Jiorini A hondred and twenty-five per uno. Davanzati. florins a head. 2. Non ne vuole meno di Re reqinr8s.no less than thirty trenta per centinaio. B. per cent. 3. Si facevano fosse grandis- They made very large ditches, sime, nelle quali a centi- into which those who naia si mettevano i so- were carried there, were pravvegnenti. B. put by hundreds, 4. Andate a quattro a quat- Go four by four. tro. B. 5. Di set mesi in sei mcsi si They are changed every six mutano. B. months. 6. Tre via* tre, nove. Three times three make nine. 7. lo aveva sette anni. F. I was seven years old. 8. Egli era d'etd forse di He was about forty years of quaranta anni. B. age. It is to be remarked, that when we indicate the share assigned to each person, as in the first example, or the interest of money, as in the second, the numbers uno and cento, or centinaio, are to be marked by the pre- position per. When we make a distribution of things, as in the third example, we designate the number by * The word via is an alteration of fiata, time— -Biagioli. N 9Q the preposition a, which ought to be repeated, if, as in the fourth, there is a repetition of the number. From the fifth example we learn, that to mark distri- bution of time, the number is to be repeated, and that we must distinguish it the first time by the preposi- tion di, and with m, the second. The expression of the sixth, is the usual formula of multiplication. The expression of the seventh is more used in fami- liar discourse, than that of the eighth, to indicate age. The Italians cannot understand the word anni as in English, viz. " He is forty." We must say either, Egli ha quaranf anni, or Egli k d'etd di quaranf anni. EXERCISE VIII. 1. If a sheep were to throw itself dawn a precipice of a — * — si gittasse da * ripa — * thousand feet, all the others would follow it. * passo * — andar(2) dietro(3) ^(1) 2. I will speak more at larg-e of this virtue in the dire — pienamente — questo — — — fourteenth treatise. * 3. He broug-ht him two slices of toasted bread, and portare(2) gU(l) * fetta — arrostito(2) (1) — a large glass of Wernaccia. * gran — — Vernaccia 4. This will be the bread of which thousands will be fed. questo — guel — del quale * (2) saUollarsi(\) 5. Yours of the twenty-third, broughtf by Romiero, la vostra — — * portare — — afforded us matter of reflection for a long time. dare * da ruminar — * pezzo t The form of the participle past being in English similar to that of the preterite, viz. the perfect and imperfect, the student will occasionally con- found them. The two forms may be distinguished from one another by the word which governs them. The participle past is always under the imme- 91 6. I am a merchant, and not a philosopher; therefore I * mercatante — — * — e shall answer you as a merchant. (3) (1) * (2) 7. Bet five thousand florins of thine ag-ainst one thousand mettere * — de' tuoi contra a * * of mine. de' miei 8. In the centre of the meadow, was a fountain of — — mezzo — — — — * fonte — very white marble, beautifully carved. * (2) (1) e con maravigliosi intagli 9. He is an Athenian, and I a Roman. * Ateniese * — 10. Virg-il says, in the fourth book of the iEneid, that — — — — * — — Eneide che Fame has life, because it has motion. — vivere per esser mobile 11. The young- g-irl was very simple, and about fifteen — giovane — * — forse(3) * (4) years of age. (5) (1) (2) 12. Tancred, prince of Salerno, was very humane, Tancredi — — — — signore assai umano and of an affable disposition. — — * benigno ingegno 13. At every twist of wool she spun, — * passo — lana filata che al fuso avvolgeva she vented a thousand sighs, more burning than fire. gittare * * — — cocente * — 14. I am a Lombard, of a city called Pavia, a poor ^ — — * — chiamare — * — man, and of low birth. — — — basso condizione diate dependance of an auxiliary, either expressed or understood ; whereas the preterite must be governed by a subject, expressed or understood, with- out any intermediate auxiliary. Now, in this case, the entire expression is, which has been brought. n2 92 15. After the death of the emperor Frederic the Second, appresso — — — (3) (1) * (2) Manfred was crowned king- of Sicily. (6) (1) (5) (2) (3) (4) 16. In a very short space of time, he not only — * assai brieve — — — — solamente acquired the first rudiments, but became apparare{4) Q) *(2) letter a (3) ma divenire{p) very eminent among- the philosophers. * valoroso(\) tra (2^ (3} Jilosofante(4) 17. When they were about eig-ht miles distant from Rome, come — forse * — dilungato -— — they turned by a road to the left. mettersi* per * via — sinistra 18. I would rather have a man that wants — voglio avanti * — che ahhia bisogno di riches, than riches that want a man. ricchezza * ricchezza — — * — 19. He who had sneezed, still sneezing a quegli che (2) starnutire{l) ancora(2) (1) la third, and a fourth, and a fifth time, * volta —la * __ _ * surprized us all. far (3') maravigUare (4) (2) (1) 20. What he devised for the satisfaction of all three, quello che — — a soddisfacimento — * has escaped my memory. m' e uscito di mente 21. I am one of the three merchants to whom your lady ^^ . — I'* — — * — a' qualiladonnavostra gave these robes. donare questo roha 22. Our citizens come back from Bologna, one a i nostri — tornare(4) c^(3) (1) (2) qual * lawyer, another a physician, a third a notary. giudice qual * medico qual * notaio 23. In a little gallery, he had painted the battle of the — * (etta) loggia — dipinta — — rats and the cats. topo — — gatta 93 24. The five hundred pounds that you returned me, I — * lira che — rendere * — sent instantly to Naples, to lay out in cloth. mandare incontanente — — ad investire — tele 25. The years had already reached the number of — — essere gid pervenuti a — — — a thousand three hundred and forty-eig-ht. * * 26. How old were you when your father broug-ht you quanti anni * quando vostro — levare * from Palermo? 27. They all four dined together. * desinare — 28. Your lordship ^s letter of the twenty-fourth of vostra signoria * — — — * — November came into my hands but four days — m' e capitata nelle mani se non * giorno ag-o. sono 29. They established a society of about five and twenty ordinare * hrigata — forse * * persons. uomo 30. His life may be of greater service to the world thant la sua — — — piu utile — * a hundred thousand like yours. * vostre pari 31. You do not let me rest even half an — — lasciare — riposare(2) pur (I) * — hour in the day. — di — giorno t In this comparison the implied words ^re, ia sua utility essendo messa afronte di quella. See page 69. M CHAP. XIII. OF POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. singular. Plural. Masculine. Femiuihe. Masculine, Feminine. mio. mia, miei. mie. my, mine. tuo, tua, tuoi. tue, thy, thine. suo, sua, suoi. sue. his, her, hers, its. nostra, nostra. nostri. nostre. our, ours. vostro, vostra, vostri. vostre, your, yours. loro*, loro. loro, loro, their, theirs. The following are the rules of syntax applicable to the above words. I. 1. Non accorgendosi ch' egli Not perceiving that he was era uccellato, mando per imposed upon, he sent for I'amico suo, B. his friend. 2. Contentate il piacer vostro. Gratify vour pleasure. B. 3. A me bisogna la vostra I have need of your faith. fede. B. 4. lo non intendo di rispar- I do not intend to spare my miar le mie for se. B. strength. The possessive is in Italian usually attended with the article ; for the possessive serves only to qualify a thing, to represent it, for instance, as mine; but as the things, even of the same species, which may be so qualified, are various, I must employ the article to designate the whole, the peculiarity or eminence of objects of mine. In the two first examples, then, the * Although this word is a pronoun, we must place it among these adjec- tives, because it supplies the possessive of the third person in the plural, which does not exist. 95 author designs by the article, a particular /n'g/ic?, and •pleasure, already mentioned ; in the third and fourth, the article designates the wliole faith and the whole strength spoken of. The possessive may be placed either before or after its noun, although it more generally precedes the noun. The possessive ought always to follow a noun when we address a person ; as, signor mio, my lord ; amico mio, my friend ; and cannot be understood after a noun of relation, as in English, saying, father, sister, &c. We say, padre mio, sorella mia, &Ci II. 1. Chi fu tuo padre? B. Who was thy father? 2. Fratel mio, questa h mia Brother, this is my daughter. figliuola. B. 3. lo sono la tua sventurata 1 am your unhappy daughter. Jiglia. B. 4. A me parve, come io vi When I saw you, I thought I vidi, vedere il padre mio. beheld my father. B. 5. Sensa altroconsigliopren- Without taking any other dere pose i suoi Jigliuoli advice, he put his chil- a cavallo. B. dren on horseback. 6. Io son deliberato di far I am ready to do what your quel che vostra eccellenza excellency desires. desidera. Caro. The two first examples show that, when placed be- fore nouns of kindred, as, padre, madre, fratello^ , &c. in the singular, the possessive is sufficient to deter- mine them ; and the article is therefore most frequently omitted ; but if either another adjective be added to the noun, as in the third example, or the possessive placed after it, as in the fourth, the article is then * The words donna (used instead of moglie, wife) and sposa, spouse, are excepted. 96 necessary, in order to designate, in the former case, the determination of that adjective, and in the latter, the determination of the possessive itself. See the Sixth Chapter, on the Application of the Article. We have before observed, that the possessive, ap- plied to such nouns, refuses the article when they are used in the singular; for the fifth example shows, that with regard to the plural, the article is necessary. By the sixth example we learn that the possessive, applied to words denoting title, as, signoria, lordship or ladyship, eccellenza, maestd,, &c. is also sufficient to determine them, and they therefore do not admit of the article in the singular. The word loro must always be attended with the article. III. 1. Sempre per suo amico He always considered him a I'ebbe. B. friend. 2. II domandb se suoi erano He asked him whether those quegli Jigliuoli. B. were his children. 3. II giudice niuna cosa in The judge woold bear no- sua scusa voleva udire. thing- in his defence. 4. lo non posso far caldo e I cannot produce warm and freddo a mia posta. B. cold weather at my plea- sure. 5. Deh! animamiadolce! B. Ah! my sweet love I The possessives suo, of the first example, and suoi, of the second, are not marked by the article, because neither peculiarity nor totality of possessed things is indicated. In the first instance the author means to say, as one of his friends ; in the second, whether those children belonged to him. Should the article be applied to suo amico, it would afi'ord to that word the force of most intimate. Likewise, an article affixed to suoi Jigliuoli, would give it the wider sense of totality. 97 Therefore, when we specify only a part of the object possessed, whatever it raay be, we omit the article. As we see from the third and fourth examples, the article must not be applied to the possessive in the adverbial expressions, a mia posta, a mio senno, a mio modo, at my pleasure, in my own way ', in mia scusciy in my defence, &c. the words posta, senno, modo, and scusa, being then in an indeterminate sense. The possessive applied to the person addressed, as in the fifth example, does not require to be pointed out by any article. IV. 1. Omai h mio il pallafreno Now the horse which was chefu tuo. B. thine, is mine. 2. Nan^atemi i vostri acci- Tell me your adventures, and denti,echevitasia stata what kind of life yours la vostra. B. has been. 3. lo voglio considerare i I wish to consider his ways suoi modi e i suoi costu- and manners. mi. B. 4. Lascib per erede un suo She left as her heir, a son Jigliuolo gid grandicello. already rather tall. B. We see from the first example, that the same pos- sessives, mio, tuo, suo, &c. answer also to mine, thine, his, &c.; still we mark them with the article, when we intend to denote either peculiarity or totality of pos- session, as in the second example. By the third we learn, that the possessive and the article must be repeated when there is more than one noun ; and by the fourth, that, in Italian, the pos- sessive ought to agree in gender and number with the object possessed, and not with the possessor. V. 1. Ella desidera di tornarsi She wishes to return to her al padre. B. father. 2. Quasi morta nelle hraccia She fell almost dead in the del Jigliuol cadde, B. arms of her son. 3. Bassa gli occhiin terra ; Let your eyes fall upon the non le guatare, B. g-round ; do not look at them. 4. Non tanto il perduto ma- She did not bewail the loss rito quanto la sua sven- of her husband so much tura piangea. B. as her own misfortune. When the object of possession is related to the person representing the subject of the proposition, the possessive is more elegantly understood ; nay, if that object be a member, or some other thing connected with the person, we must omit the possessive, unless there be a contradistinction, or the omission of the possessive offers an ambiguity. But the article must then point out the object which is determined by the possessive understood. It is then obvious, that the word padre, in the first example, is referred to the person spoken of, to her who is the subject of that sen- tence; in the second, the word figliuol is related to the person spoken of, the understood subject of the sen- tence; in the third, the eyes belong to the party ad- dressed, and who is still the subject of the proposition ; in the fourth, the possessive is omitted before marito, which word oflfers no ambiguity, but it must be ex- pressed before sventura, otherwise that word might be taken in a general sense. The possessive its, is usually supplied in Italian by the article, for the same reason; for instance, "its top was surrounded with trees," la cima era intorniata d'alheri. 99 vr 1. Con un suofamigliare. B. 2. Amenduni glifece pigliare a tre suoi servitori, B. 3. Informato un de' suoi. B. 4. Vedi a cut io do mangiare il mio. B. With a servant of his. He got three servants of his to seize them both. Having- informed one of his servants. Behold, to whom I give my fortune to sauander. It is a general rule, that when the expressions, of his, of hers, of ours, &c. are placed after the noun, as in the two first examples, the possessive, without a preposition, ought in Italian to precede the substan- tive, and to agree with it in gender and number j and when the like expressions follow the noun, they are literally translated into Italian, as in the third ex- ample. In the third, the word famigli, and in the fourth, bene, fortune, are understood. In the same manner we usually understand the words danaro, money; parenti, relations; soldati, soldiers, and some others. VII Poi che gli arcieri del vostro nimico avranno il sua sa- cUamento saettato, e i vo- stri il suo, sapele che di quello che i vostri saettato avranno conv^rrd che i vostri nemici ricolgamo, e a' nostri converrd rico- glier del loro. B. When the bowmen of the enemy have discharged all their arrows, and your men their:>, yon know that your enemies are obliged to gather up tliose which your men have discharged, and your archers are o- bliged to gather up theirs. It is to be remarked, that if the possessive refer to several persons representing the subject of the sen- tence, we may use the possessive in the singular, to avoid ambiguity. The lirst possessive, sua, of the o2 100 above-quoted example, applies to the word arcieri, the subject of the verb avranno; the second, swo, to vostri arcieri, the subject of the verb avranno under- stood ; the third, loro, is in the plural, because it is not in reference to the subject of the proposition re- presented by nostri. Should loro be employed in the two former instances, there would be an ambiguity, as it might then be referred either to arcieri or to vostri; whilst suo, in that case, may be applied to the subject only. From the words ai, to the; dei, of the; dai, from the ; 7tei, in the ; coiy with the, the i is always cut off, and supplied by an apostrophe, when they are fol- lowed by one of the possessives, miei, tuoi, suoi; thus, de* miei, co* suoi, ne tuoi, &c. Remark also, that if a noun ending in re, is put before the possessive, the e is cut off; viz. dolor mio, amor mio, &c. EXERCISE IX. 1. On the third day, the g-ood woman returned for her — — dt — — donna tornare — * chest. cassa 2. Putting his breast upon the edge of the urn, he posto * petto sopra — orlo — — area carried his head forward, and put his legs volgere * capo in fuori — mandare(2) (3) (4) within it. (1) 3. Let him eat of his own, if he has any ; for of ours * 6' — (2) ne(l) che — * he shall not eat to-day. (3) (1)(2) (4) 4. I do not intend to deviate from my predecessors, — — — — — — * passato 101 5. In a very short time he astonished his father, — * * hreve — far maravigliare *- — all his relations, and every body else that knew e — * — ciascuno altro che (2) him. 6. He lived very straitly on the rent of a very viversi * strettissimamente di — — small farm of his. (etto) podere * 7. It is more difficult for men to show egli — — malagevole a — * mostrare altrui their wit and virtue, than their folly and * senno — — che sia * sciocchessa — bad dispositions, vizio 8. I do not know whom I can appoint to collect — sapere cui — possa lasciare a riscuotere my money. * 9. Have you heard how your good brother-in-law uses — — udire come * — — trattare your sister ? * 10. Taking the most discreet of his men aside, he accostatosi a — — — — * told him what he should do. imporre(2) gli{l} quello che — av esse a fare 11. Each thing being directed by a particular ciascuno — impinta{4) {I) di propria natura(3) providence, tends towards its perfection. (2) esser inclinahile a * suo — 12. He who praises or blames a man to c/l^(3) (4) (5) (6) alcuno (\0) dinansi (7) (8) his face, offers him an insult. * viso(9) fare(2) villania(\) 13. Every prophet is less praised in his own country than — — — — onorato — * patria elsewhere. ^ 102 14. Having" provided for both his son and — acconci(5) "^ (I) Jigliuolo(2) (3) daughter, he determined to stay no long-er in figliuola (4) pensare — non voler * dimorare — Ensrland. 15. My son, I could never have believed that thou — — — non — mat credere — vs^ouldest have concealed any of thy /osst(6) guardarsi (J) d'alcuno{\^ O (2)* wants from me. desiderio (3) (4) (6) 16. You will remember to tell your father, that your ricordarsi * — — * — — * children, his and my g-rand-children, are not born of Jigliuolo * — * nipoie — — nascere — beg-g-ars. paltoniere 17. Madam, commend your soul to God. madonna raccomandare *(2) (1) — — 18. Sir, these things are mine, and 1 will not sell them. — le — — . * — — le vendo 19. Certainly she is my wife. per certo * -— 20. Examine their virtue, their manners, and their customs. — * — * costume — * maniera 21. He began to pretend to stretch out one of cominciare — ' far sembiante — distendere V his fingers, and then his hand, and afterwards his * - — — appres^ * — — pot * arm. 22. It pleases me to follow your advice. eg/i piacere — — eeguire * consiglio 23. Before the house he saw four brothers of his, all davanti — — — — — * — dressed in black. vestito di — 103 24. I am preparing- to do what will be for your — prepararsi * — far quello che dee essere * g-ood and comfort. — — * consola^ione 25. She set out with a cousin and a essa entrare in cammino — — — — — maid-servant of hers, and never stopped till she was cameriera * ne mai ristare si — - in Florence. * - 26. If you deceived me, you would frustrate your purposes — — ingannare — — guastare * (2) fatto(l) and mine. 27. By a very trusty servant of his, he conveyed — — * segreto famigliare * mandare(2^ it to his daughter. *7(1) — * figliuola 28. There were in Messina three young brothers, become — — — — — — rimaso very rich upon the death of their father. assai — dopo — — — * — 29. From that time forward they made no distinction d'allora innanzi (3) *(1) (2) between their mother and her. da "^ — a lei 30. Poverty exercises our sensitive virtues, and — esser esef^citatrice di * (2) (1) — awakes our minds ; whereas riches paralyze destatrice * ingegno Id dove ricchezza addormentareQl) (both. \ e quelle e questi){\.) 104 CHAP. XIV. OF DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. I. 1. Sia preso questo traditore. Let this traitor be seized. B. 2. Innansi che cotesto ladron- Before this fellow, who stands cello, che v' ^ costi dal by your side, goes away, lato, vada via, &c, B. &c. 3. Anche voi dite che quel la You also say that that house casa e mia ? F. is mine ? 4. Come dite voi coteste pa- How can you utter those role ? B. words ? There are three demonstratives in Italian ; the first, questo, this, points out an object near the speaker; the second, cotesto, this or that, designates an object near the party addressed ; the third, quello, that, de- notes one distant both from the speaker and the party addressed. From their quality of adjectives, they must change their final vowel according to the gender and number of the word designated. Quello is subject to peculiar variations ; it is shortened into quel, and into quel in the plural, before a masculine noun beginning with a consonant, except the s, followed by another conso- nant; it admits of ellision before a vowel, and makes quegli in the plural, before a vowel and the above 5/ quella and quelle in the feminine. From the fourth example, we perceive that these adjectives are likewise employed to designate artificial or abstract things. I make this observation, lest, from the word *' demonstrative," it might be inferred that they should be used to mark physical and real things only. 105 II. 1. Quando intese questo fu When he heard this, he was oltre modo dolente. B. extremely sorry. 2. Ditemi quello che io posso Tell me what I can do for per vol operare. B. you. 3. Noi vogliamo andare a We will g-o and see ^/u's saint. veder questo santo. B. 4. /Se questo avviene, ilpopolo Should that happen, the peo- di questa terra si lever a pie of this country will a romore. B. rise in rebellion. 5. Mi ha pagato di quella He g-ave me such a reward moneta ch' io merito. F. as I deserved. The adjectives questo and quello are also used to denote ideas present to, or distant from, our mind. Questo indicates something present to our mind, be- cause it has already been spoken of, and therefore wants no declaration, as in the first example ; quello designates what is distant from our mind, or has not been already mentioned, and is therefore always fol- lowed by a declaratory clause, as in the second. Thus, having already mentioned the saint, in the third ex- ample, the speaker designates him by the demon- strative questo, though the real object be distant from his view. We remark from the fourth example, that the Eng- lish designate a thing just mentioned, by the demon- strative that, which is in direct opposition to the Italian mode of expression. The reason is, that they entertain a different idea; considering the event as distant, because it is merely a supposition j Italians, on the contrary, represent it as present to the mind, inasmuch as it has just been spoken of. For this reason, when the demonstrative that is referred to the subject of the discourse, and is not followed by a determination, it must be rendered by questo, p 106 When the word as refers to such, as in the fourth example, it is rendered in Italian by che; and, in that instance, the adjective quello answers to such. III. 1 . Piacemi forte la vostra Your clear conscience in this, pur a coscienza in cid. B. pleases me much. 2. Cid che dile vi credo, B. I believe what you say. The word cid, it, has the same signitication with both questo and quello, when relating, as we have explained in the preceding paragraph, to the subject of the discourse, and may supply the place of either, as appears from the above examples. The word what is expressed in Italian by quel che, quello che, or cid che, that which. IV. 1. lo ilfeci&isLnoite prendere. I had him seized last night. B. 2. Stamane egli entrd in un This morning he entered a mio giardino. B. garden of mine. 3. Fate che stasera noi siamo Let us meet together this insieme, B. evening. The forms stamattina or stamane, stasera and sta- notte, are usually employed, in familiar discourse, instead of questa mattina, questa sera, questa notte. Stanotte may signify last night, or to-night; the adjec- tive passata, past, being understood in the former, and seguente, following, in the latter. We must observe, that when, by the expression last night, we intend to denote the past evening, we use ieri sera, or iersera. 107 V. 1. In questo (stesso tempo) la fante di lei soprav- venne, B. 2. Era Tito per ventura in quella ora (stessa) ve- nuto al preto7'io. B. 3. In quelle (stesso tempo) la gente di messer Filippo posero il ponte. Crusca. 4. Lasciami saziar gli occhi di questo tuo viso dolce. B. Upon this her maid came in. Now it happened, by chance, that Titus came into the hall at that very time. Then the men of sir Philip threw the bridge across. Let me satiate my eyes with that sweet face of thine. It would be inapossible for the student to compre- hend the expressions, in questo, in quello, in questa, in quella, without knowing the words understood, and which are supplied in the above examples. The second example, wherein Boccaccio uses the word ora, may serve as a proof that the words supplied are understood in similar expressions. They corres- pond with just then, and with the expressions, upon this, upon that. The possessive and demonstrative, in the fourth example, are employed together to point out an ob- ject with more precision ; and in that case, the pos- sessive, which is placed in English after the noun, must in Italian precede it, without a preposition. VI. Queste catene delta gola, quanto piu le allarghi, piii ti st7'ingono. F. Queste streghe diventan gatte e cani. F. The more you loose the chains of gluttony, the more they bind you. Witches become cats and dosTS. Sometimes we make use of the demonstrative, in- stead of the article, to denote either all the individuals p 2 108 of the same class, or objects of the same kind. The reason is, that, in such instances, we represent the objects as present to our imagination. In the first example, the speaker employs the demonstrative, be- cause he is speaking of gluttony, and is himself a glutton. In the second, the demonstrative implies the words, cJie si senton ogni di ricordare, of which we often hear. VIT. 1. Levatasi la laurea di capo, Having taken the crown from (\Vie\\2i pose soprala testa her head, she placed it a Filostrato. B. upon that of Philostratus. 2. A me pare che egli si pro- It appears to me, that he cacci di ridurre al nulla strives to overthrow the la cristiana religione, christian religion, whereas laddove fondamento e he ought to be the chief sostegno dovrebbe esser succour and support of t^. di quella. B. 3. Sentendo lifatti suoi molto Finding- his affairs much em- intralciati, pensb quegli barrassed, he resolved to commettere a piu per- commit them to the care sone. B. of several persons. Quello, quella, quegli, quelle, are often used as pro- nouns, to avoid the repetition of the noun, as in the above examples. In the first, the word quella supplies la laurea; in the second, quella represents religione; in the third, quegli is in reference to fatti. In such instances, they answer to the English pronouns it, them, when they require emphasis, and, of course, when they are attended with prepositions; for the pronouns lo, la, gli, le, mentioned in Chapter XVI. having no force in themselves, cannot support the inflection of the voice. 109 EXERCISE X. 1. Do not tell me that to comfort me. * per 2. When they went into the church, there they saw this entrati — — — — * bed so wonderful and rich, and upon it the knig-ht — cosl — — — — sopra * — cavalier lying- fast asleep. che dormiva 3. I have heard what you have been saying- about me. — — intendei'e * — ragionato di — 4. She asked him whence he was, and whether — domandare (2) *^(1) d'onde fosse — se those were children of his? * — Jigliuolo * 5. In my opinion, this journey of yours is unnecessary. a * par ere * andata * — di soperchio 6. These (which you mention) are things to be done by * — •— dafarle wicked men, reo — 7. It happened that the good woman departed this life. avvenire — — — donna passare da * — 8. From this time afterwards, he was the most liberal and — * innansi — — — — — gracious g-entleman in Genoa. * — gentile uomo che — — fosse 9. Among- these merchants, was a young- man called tra * mercatante — — — chiamare Ambrose of Placentia. Ambrogiuolo da — 10. I wish to converse a little with you upon this volere ragionare — — — — sopra * subject. materia 110 11. When I was labouring- in the garden, one would cry, — — lavorare — orto Vuna diceva (thou) Put this here; and another. Put that here; and /?orre*(2) (1) — Valtra ~*(2) (1) — a third would take the hoe out of my hand. I'altra mi toglieva — zappa — — 12. Quiet and peaceful is the abode of that Supreme Being-, — — — luogo — * Somma Deitade who alone sees every thing fully. che solo (2) (1) 13. My father, I beg you to obtain for me * — pregare — che vol facciate che io ahbia one of those goslings. — — * papera 14. In this intercourse, the abbot found that Ferondo — * — — accorgersi* — had a handsome wife, avere — hellissimo dpnna per moglie 15. I was just g'oing to send one of these fellows — — teste in pensie^'O di — — - — * of mine to a place near Payia, upon some business. * infino vicin di — per — cosa 16. Among other natural things, that which least brooks tra — — — * che — ricevere an adverse counsel, is love. * consiglio in contrario — — 17. Thou hast obtained such a sepulchre from thy (7) *(5) sepultura(6) (1) (2) very enemy as thy merit has deserved. medesimo (4) (3) * (8) — valore — — 18. It appeared to him, that there proceeded from those parevagli — si (6) movesse (7) (1) * (2) eyes a suavity which filled him with pleasure (3) (4) (5) la quale il riempisse * — never experienced by him before. mai non (S) provato(ji) (1) lui(2) 19. I should be extremely pleased if, this evening, you a me sarebbe grandissima grasia che * — would come and sup with me. venirsene * a cenar — — Ill 20. It appeared that I was in a fine and delig-htful forest, a me pareva essere — — — selva and that I was hunting* in it. — andar(3) cacciare (A) (1) (2)* 21. Oh ! said he, that, I can assure you, I have very — dire — * vi dico io bene die — — molto often done. 22. Upon- this, having- awaked, and seen the light, he put * destarsi * — — — lume porre his head under the bed-clothes. * capo — — panni 23. I would not have you suppose that we should appear volere — che voi credeste ■ — — stare there in this dress, or with these clothes which you Id — * abito — — * panni che see upon us. — c^ 24. Last nig-ht I was at our meeting*. * — — a * brigata 25. I have carried on my little trade, and by it have — fatte mie piccole mercatan^ie — in * — desired to g-ain something-. 26. Be this evening- upon one of those raised tombs. — * in su — — * rilevato(2) avello{\) 27. We had last night so many blows, that with abbiamo * avute * bussa — di less, an ass would go to Rome. - (2) (3) (1) 28. I already imagine I see thee, with those teeth e' mi par pur vedere — (2) * (3) (5) of thine, like pegs, biting her * (4) fatti a bischeri (6) morderle (1) quella Vermillion mouth, and her cheeks, which resemble suaboccavermigliusza — * gota che parere two roses. 112 29. The Jew answered, that he esteemed no religion — Giudeo rispondere — — credere — fede buona like his own ; that he was born in it, and in fuor die la giudaica (3) (4) (1) * (2) it he intended to live and die. * — e — — — CHAP. XV. OF CONJUNCTIVE ADJECTIVES. 1. Quasi niuno era che non There was scarcely any one sapesse cM fosse. B. who knew not who he was. 2. Non rifiutate la gratia Refuse not the boon that God che Iddio vi manda. B, sends you. 3. Questo ^ I'uomo di che vi This is the man of whom I ho parlato. B. have spoken to you. 4. Comandd che da ciascuno He commanded them to shew cost onorato fosse come him the same respect that la sua persona ; i\ che da they would to himself; quindi innansi ciascun which every one after- fece, B. wards observed. The conjunctive adjective die, which serves to join a noun not yet determined, to its determining proposi- tion, relates both to things and persons, of any gender and number whatever. It may represent the subject as well as the object of the sentence, and even their relations with prepositions. It corresponds with the words who, that, and which. When the adjective which refers to a whole preceding sentence, the article is re- quired in Italian, as appears from the fourth example. im II. 1. Teodoro,ondefosti, e (di) Theodore, of what country cui Jigliuolo? B. and whose son are you ? 2. Vedi (a) cui io do man- Behold, to whom I give my glare il mio. B. fortune to squander! 3. Sopra il monte Tarpeo ve- On theTarpeian rockyouwill drai un cavalie?' ch' Ita- see a knig-ht, to whom all lia tutta onora. P. Italy pays reverence. 4. Egli vi troverebbe me, in Fie vs/ould find me there, in- luogo di colui cui trovar stead of him whom he vi si crede. B. expects to find. The conjunctive cui may be employed as exten- sively as che; but cannot represent the subject of the proposition, and is applied rather to persons. The preposition di, is generally understood before cui, especially when, in English, the word whose is em- ployed; and the article, in this instance, if it be re- quired, must be placed before cui, as in the following example from Boccaccio : II maestro, la (di) cui scienza, &c. the doctor, whose knowledge, &c. The preposition a, may also be understood, as we see from the second example. As we have already mentioned, che may represent the subject as well as the object of the sentence; but cui, only the object. Now, in employing che for the object, it may sometimes happen that we fall into an equivocal sense, so as with difficulty to distinguish whether it represents the subject or the object, as in the third example from Petrarch, wherein che, repre- senting the object, might be taken for the subject; in such a case it is better to employ cui, as in the fourth example, to avoid that equivocation. 114 ITT. 1. La quistione la quale voi mi fate h bella. B. 2. Questa cosa apparve in due nostri cittadini, de' quali io intendo di ragio- narvi. B. 3. Tale quale la fortuna tel concedette. B. It is a pretty question which you ask me. This was verified in two of our citizens, of whom I am now g'oing to speak. Such a one as Fortune allot- ted to thee. The adjective quale, which makes quali in the plural, relates both to things and persons of both genders, and may represent the subject, object, and their relations. It is always preceded by the article, except in inter- rogation. Quale is used rather than che, when the conjunctive must be pronounced with emphasis, and is therefore employed in preference to che, when the words which and whom are attended with a preposition, as appears from the third example. Such as, are ren- dered also by tale or cotale, and quale. Cotale is com- pounded with cost and tale; and both tale and cotale answer to such a one. IV. 1. Chi siete voi che fuggito Who are you that have fled avete la prigione eterna ? D. 2. Chi loda se, mostra che non creda esser buono tenuto. D. 3. Ciascuno amico si duole del difetto di colui che egli ama. D. 4. Chi tenea con I'uno e chi con I'altro. B. 5.Erano in Parigi, qual joer una bisogna e qual per un' altra. B. from the eternal prison? He who commends himself as a good man, shows that he does not think others consider him so. A friend ever regrets the fault of him (whom) he loves. Some held with the one, and some with the other. They were at Paris, some for one business, and some for another. The word chi, who, or, he who, which implies both 115 uomo die and uomini che, may signify, 1. che uovno, or uomini; 2. I'uomo che; 3. uno uomo che; and is there- fore applied to persons only. In the first case, it is used for interrogations, as in the first example ; in the second it supplies, as appears from the second ex- ample, the words he who, him whom, &c. which may be equally well represented by colui che, as in the third example; in the third case it is used in the distributive enumeration of several individuals, as the word some is employed in English ; but then, the word chi being in the singular, the verb also must be in the singular, as in the fourth example. The verb essere is, in the latter case, always understood, and the entire expression is uno uomo era che. From the fifth example we see that the word quale, without the article, is also used in enumeration; and the words uno uomo era il, are then understood. A5 the word chi implies a noun, it cannot supply who, when relating to a noun expressed in the pre- ceding proposition; for instance, '* there was no 07ie vjho could guess," non v' ebbe niuno che potesse avvi- save, &c. In this sentence, the word who is translated into che, because it refers to the preceding one; but in the following, "behold, to whom I trusted,'' vedi a chi io mifidava, the word whom is translated into chi, be- cause it has no preceding reference. V. 1. Che paura avete voi? B. What are you afraid of? 2. Qual sarehhe la lor /•*- ^/la^ would be their answer? sposta ? B. 3. Qiiali leggi, quali minacce, What laws, what threats, or qusi\ paura? B. what fear 'i 4. Che dolci accoglien.ze! P. TF/ia^ an agreeable reception! 5. Io faro quello che detto 1 will do what 1 told you. V' ho, B. q2 116 There is a delicacy to be remarked in the use of che and quale, in interrogation. If I wish, for instance, to know the substance of a law, I should say, Che legge e questa ? but if I ask the choice of one, among several laws, I sa3% Qual legge vi par migliore? the former referring to substance, the latter to quality. The word what^ in exclamations, is translated by che; and the particle a, which follows it in English, is not admitted in Italian. Except in the two above-mentioned cases of inter- rogation and exclamation, the word what is translated, as in the fifth example, by quello che, quel che, or by cid che, as v/e have already observed. VI. 1. Che cosa ^ questa? B. What is ihisl 2. II modo che voi avrete a The plan you are to follow tener Jia questo. B. will be this. 3. Hannomel detto le pecore 1 was told thai by the flocks la notte di Befana, che on the night of the Epi- tutte favellano. F. phaoy^i^/ienthey all speak. The two first examples shov/ that the conjunctive che cannot be understood, even before the word cosa; and though improperly used by some, no example can be found for its justification in good authors. In English, the word which, as in the second ex- ample, is sometimes understood. It must then be supplied in Italian. The word when may signify either at that time in which, as in the following proposition, " when I heard that," or, in which time, as in the third example. In the first case, when has no reference to any preceding word, and is translated by quando; in the second case it refers to a preceding word, as, in the example, it stands for in which Epiphany, and is then rendered by 117 die. The preposition in, and the word tempo, are then understood ; the entire expression being, in che tempo, viz. nel quale tempo. VII. 1. E stata una vcrgogna a un mio pari, che non sono unfanciullo. F. 2. Dimmi chi tu se' che questo mifai. B. 3. Voi non siete la prim,a, n^ sarcte I'uUima, la quale B. It was a shame for a man like me, who am not a boy. Tell me who thou art, who actest thus with me ? You are not the first, nor will you be the last, who is deceived. From the above examples it appears, that the con- junctives che, chi, cui, quale, may also represent every person of the verb, and that the verb following the conjunctive may agree with the personal noun or pro- noun; namely, io che, or, il quale, sono; tu che, or, il quale, sei; noi che, or, i quali, siatno, &c. In the third example, the word quale, not being in reference with the personal noun voi, but with a third person, the verb therefore agrees with the third person. VIII. 1. Avvenne una mattina che egli udi alia messa uno evangelio, nel quale eran queste parole ... B. 2. Udisli tu in quella cosa niuna ? B. The morning it happened that, during mass, the gospel was read, wherein were these words . . . Hast thou heard any thing therein? The words therein, wherein, hereby, thereof, &c. being equivalent to the following, in that, in which, by this, of that, &c. must be reproduced in the latter form, when translated into Italian. Those which are compounded with here and there, are translated by the 118 adjectives questo and quello, and their correspondent prepositions; those compounded with ivliere, are sup- plied by the adjective quale, mentioned in this chapter. EXERCISE XI. 1. On his fing-er he put a ring-, wherein was a in dito gli porre — — * — — carbuncle, so brig-ht, that it appeared a flaming- torch, — * lucente — parere — torchio acceso the value of which could scarcely be estimated. — valor * appena si poteva slimare 2. I have lost the labour which I thoug-ht — — — fatica * mi pareva I had well bestowed. ottimamente avere impiegata 3. As they went from Milan to Pavia, they met andando — — ■ — — scontrarsi* with a g-entleman whose name was Torello, who was g"oing- to a fine country-house of his. andarsene * — — — luogo * 4. Some went to sleep, and others, charmed with the * — — — — * vinto da — pleasantness of the place, would not. hellessa — — luogo andar non vi voile 5 It did not occur to his memory who could be so a lui non andava per * — * — * wicked a man. malvagio * — 6. No effect is greater than its cause, for the cause — — — maggiore t * cagione perohb — — cannot give what it has not. •}* It is to be observed, as an exception to the third rule given in page 68, that when the comparison is expressed by one of the words maggiore, mi- nore, migliore, peggiore, the particle than is rendered by di, whatever may be the word to which it is applied, excepting a proposition. 119 7. I know not who you are, nor do I seek to — sapere — * — — — addomandare — be informed any further than you desire I should. saperlo * — vi piaccia 8. I request that thou wilt wait for me a year, a month, — volere — — aspetti — — — — — and a day, without marrying- ag-ain, reckoning- from — — di — rimaritarsi * inconiinciare — this day when I depart. — — * — partirsi'^ 9. Let every one prepare to relate something- which — pensare di dire — * (■ may be useful, or at least agreeableX /to the possa — — — — — dilettevole/ (^) \ — — company. \ brigata /(I) 10. There lived at that time in Pistoia, a young- man whose essere allora — — — — * name was Richard, of low birth, thoug-h very — — — — piccolo na^ione ma molto (2) rich. (1) 11. Some took to reading romances, some to playing- at * darsi * — leg-g-ere — * — g-iucare — chess, and others at draug-hts, while the rest — — * — tavola mentre — altri were asleep. dormire 12. What reward shall I have from you for such a * guider done d ebb — — — — dicosifatto service ? servigio 13. He was in the camp of the Christians on the day they were surprised by Saladin — * — presi — il Saladino 14. You have now heard vvhat are the two things — dunque udire * sieno quelle — — that I must have. * aver mi si conviene 120 15. To the great wonder of the count and all the other con — — — — — — — — — persons who were present, the countess related all * -^ — — — raccontare — that had happened. 16. What was the word which induced you to * — quello — * muovere — — take pity upon iis? aver compassion di — 17. To-day we have a festival, in which some bring* (3) (J) /are (2)— festa — * * menare a man clothed like a bear, and others bring- — — • — a modo d' f — — * one dressed like a wild man. 0a guts a * — uom salvatico 18. The lady hearing* this of him whom she loved above — donna udire — — colui * — — piu ' all the world, was extremely distressed. che altra cosa — sommamente dolorosa 19. Certainly I confess 1 did wrong-; but who is he certo — — che male ma * — colui that does not sometimes err ? * alcuna volta mal nonfaccia 20. He came into a little meadow, surrounded with avvenirsi* — — (ello) prato circuito {A) * (\) very high trees, in one corner of which was a (2) (3) — r — de' canti — * -_ _ very fine cool fountain. * fontana efredda 21. /A servant of yours, who comes from Rome,\ V— — * * _ _ — ^(4) has happened to arrive/ at my house. \ essere(2) capitare (S) \ — — — ^(0 t Henceforward this particle will always be marked with a trace — , that the student may judge for himself whether or not it is to be translated. See Chapter XII. on Numeral Adjectives. 121 22. At Rome, which, as it is now the tail, was once the — — * come — oggi — — gid head of the world, there lived a young- man of a capo — — — essere — — — — very respectable family, called Peter. assai(2) onorevole (3) (1) — — 23. Who could have ever thought that you would have * — mat pensare — — doveste — been here ? — qui 24. I do not know what greater torture could have been — — sapere * maggior crudeltd si fosse potuta inflicted upon a traitor who had put to death usare in — — * avesse messa • — uccisione a whole city. * cittd 25. I am undone, for the ship which has on board — — diserto percib che — legno * (2) ^ (3) sopra(l^ the goods that I expected, has been taken by — mercatanzia * — — — — prendere — the corsairs of Monaco. 26. What estates, what rewards, what riches, but * — * merito * avan^o se non (2) friendship alone,/ could have induced Gisippo to amistd(S) \avrebher potuto indurre — — serve his friend ?\ soddisfare a * — / (1) 27. The favours you have received from me, should make — henejicio — — ricevuti — — dehbon — you both obedient and faithful. 28. The time is now come when I shall fulfil my (3) (4) (2) (I) * — sono per servare * promise to you, and when I expect you to do — * — * — volere che — la the like to me. serviate * 122 29. From thence he went home, where he declared that he quindi — a casa affermando se would return no more into the country ; which voler(2) (6) (1) (3) (4) villa (5) * was disagreeable to his father and relations, but guantunque grave fosse — * — — * yet they let him alone. pure lasciare(2) ?7(1) stare (S) 30. Thou art arrived at the end to which every one (2) venire (I) — — * — tends. coi-rere CHAP. XVI. OF PRONOUNS. Variations of the Pronoun Egli. Singular. Plural. Subject. egli; he, it. eglino; they. Relation of) 7 • i- y ^ i,- i- 7 7 (to them, tendency. \"i^''Sh,h,- to him, him. alorojoro;^ j^^^_ Object. lui,lo,il; him, it. loro,gli,li; them. Variations of the Pronoun Ella. Singular. Plural. Subject. ella; she. elleno ; they. ^ te'ndTncy! } "" '"'' ^' ' *° ^^'' ''<''• « '"'•''' '"^^ 'I * them™' Object. lei, la; her, it. lbro,le; them. There are then two forms for the object, as well as for the person towards whom the action tends; namely, For the Object. For the Relation of Tendency. lo,ovil; - lui. gli; - a lui. gli, li ; - loro. loro ; - a loro. la; - - lei. le ; - a lei. le; - - loro. loro ; - a loro. 123 Let us now observe their application. I. 1. lo Vamo sopra ogni altra I love her above every thing. cosa. B. else. 2. La giovane comincib non The young- lady beg-an to love meno ad amar lui che him no less than he loved egli amasse lei. B. her. 3. Mai non le dird villania. B. I will never abuse her. 4. Fa motto a lei non a me. Address thyself to her, not to F. me. We have already explained (yet the repetition of the principle will not be useless to the scholar, the theoretical and practical parts being both difficult), with regard to personal nouns, the application of which is precisely the same as that of these pronouns, that if one object alone depend upon the same verb, or the action be directed to one person alone, in a simple sentence, we must employ lo, la, gli, le, for the object, and gli, le, loro, for the person to whom the action is directed; but if two objects depend upon the same verb, or if the action be directed to two per- sons, in two similar sentences, in contradistinction, we must then use lui, lei, loro, for the former, and alui, a lei, a loro, for the latter, in order to give greater force to the expression. In the first example, her is the only object depend- ing upon the verb to love, and it is therefore translated by la, shortened into /'; but in the second, which con- tains two similar propositions, the verb to love, having two objects, him and her, they must be supplied by lui and lei. In the third, the negative action of the verb to tell, is addressed to one person alone, repre- sented by the pronoun her, and we therefore make use of le; in the fourth, however, the terms of the verb to address, being twofold, " to her and to me," a lui and a lei mtist be adopted. r2 124 II. 1. Lui ho preso (innan^i ad Him have I chosen (in pre- ogni altro), e lui voglio ference to any other), and Cnon altrij. B. him will I have (no one else). 2. Piil die se 1 'amava. B. He loved her more than /urn- self. 3. Ella non si ricordava di She had no recollection of lui. B. him. 4. Gli tenni dietro. D. I followed him. 5. Dirimpetto a se fece star He placed her opposite to lei. B. himself. According to the above established rule, although the word denoting opposition be understood, as in the first example, yet we must still employ the more for- cible pronouns, which must also be used, not only if accompanied with the preposition a (as in the relation of tendency when there is opposition), but also with any preposition whatever, as, in the third example, Mm is attended by of. The objects depending upon the verb to love, in the second example, being two, himself and herself, it would appear from the above remarks, that lei should be employed in preference to la; but the speaker does not there intend to mark a contradis- tinction. If I say, for instance, L'amate molto? Do you love her much? the force of my question falls upon the verb and its modification, and the answer must be, Vamo piii che me stesso; if I say, Amate lei? Do you love her? the whole force is then given to the pronoun; the answer is, consequently, amo lei piu che me stesso*. * Thus, it may sometimes happen, that the reader will find in authors some passages deviating from the general rales established in this Grammar; I find it needless to point out all the exceptions, but, from being accustomed, in the perusal, to investigate the causes and principles of things, the student tvill readily discover why one expression is used preferably to another 1 125 Besides the prepositions mentioned in Chapter V. there are other words so styled (of which we shall treat at their proper place), as, in the two last ex- amples, dietro and dirimpetto. When the pronoun in English is attended with such prepositions, we do not follow the same rule just afforded with regard to the other prepositions, of always employing the more for- cible pronoun, but we say, Gli tenni dietro, I followed him ; Le andai incontro, I went to meet her ; Levatigli dinanziy Get from before him ; placing the more simple pronoun under the dependency of the verb, not of the preposition; and, vice versa, we should say, tenni dietro a lui; andai incontro a lei; levati dinanzi a lui, if there be a second person or object in opposition, as in the fifth example. III. 1. Pigliatelo. B. Seize hi?n. 2. A'on la toccare. P. Oo not touch hei'. 3. Me la porta in una sco- Bring it me in a silver cup. delta d'argento. B. 4. Non sapeva come negarlo. He knew not how to deny it. B. 5. Voi non gli potete ne ve- You can neither see nor hear dere ne udire. B. tliem. 6. Non parendoXe tanio ser- As she thought she did not vire a Dio quanto voleva, serve God as much as she mormorava. wished, she complained. 7. Postole in mano nn bel~ Having put a fine ring into lissimo anello, la licen- her hand, he dismissed zid. B. her. 8. DiWe die vada per lei. B. Tell her to go for her. 9. FagW vezsi, e dagVi ben Caress him; give Aim plenty da mangiare. B. to eat. 10. Disse loro. B. He told them. The above examples are given, to show what place the pronouns lo, la, gli, le, must occupy, with regard to the verb upon which they depend. In familiar dis- 126 course, they should be placed after the verb. — l.When it is in the imperative, as in the first example; unless the command be attended with a negative, as in the second : I say, in familiar discourse, because we per- ceive by the third, that an author is not confined by this rule. — 2. When the verb is in the infinitive, or in both participles, (4th, 6th, 7th examples). The pro- nouns, therefore, must be placed before, and sepa- rated from the verb, when employed in any of the other three moods, the indicative, the conditional, or the conjunctive. The placing of the pronoun dependent on the infinitive, before the verb preceding- it, like an auxiliary, as in the 5th example, is adopted elegantly' We must also remark — 1. That when these pro- nouns are placed after the verb, they should be united in a single word (1st, 4th, 6th, 7th examples) ; — 2. That the last vowel of the infinitive is cut off (4th example), and that, in verbs ending in rre, an r also is cut ofi"; — 3. That in case of these pronouns being placed after a tense of a verb with only one syllable, or having the accent upon the last vowel, the consonant of the pro- noun is redoubled (8th example) ; — 4. That the pro- noun gli does not admit of this increase (9th exam- ple); — 5th, That the pronoun loro is always separated from the verb (10th example); — lastly. That loro is generally placed after the verb. IV. 1. MostrarW mi convien la I must show him the dark valle buia, D. vale. 2. Egli il farci. B. He shall do it. 3. lo nol so. B. I do not know it. 4. Gliela diedi here. B. I gave it him to drink. 5. lo non gliela ho data. F. I did not g-ive it her. 6. Egli dice die io ho fatto He says I have done that quello che io credo che which I think he has done egli abbia fatto egli. B. himself. 127 The forms, li, to him or them, and il, him or it, are used before a word beginning with a consonant, ex- cepting the s, followed by another consonant, instead of gli and lo. When the pronoun il is preceded by the negative, the two particles, non il, are united in a single word, nol. The fourth and fifth examples show that the pro- nouns, gli, to him; le, to her, must always precede the following: lo, la, it; le, li, them; ne, of it, of them; and, in that case — 1. The form gli, serves for both genders; — 2. An e is supplied between these words; — 3. They are united into glielo, gliela, glieli, gliele, gliene; which must be placed, with regard to the verb, as explained in the preceding rule. As the pronoun himself, according to the sixth ex- ample, is translated by egli, when representing the subject; so herself is rendered by ella; themselves by eglino, elleno, or rather essi, esse. 1. /o ne son molto dolente. B. I am very sorry /or it. ^. Seneva aire del Garho. B. She g-oes (from thence) to the king of Garbo. 3. Gi^ossa usura ne vuole. B. He expects an exorbitant in- terest (for it). 4. Gittane gill alquante. B. Throw some (of them) down. 5. lo ne [degli anni^ aveva I was seven years old. sette. F. 6. Forte vi studiava. B. He gave all his attention to it, 7. lo dalla mia puerisia I'a- I devoted myself to it from nimo vi disposi. B. my very childhood. Ne is a pronoun that refers to something spoken of, and then implies di questa, or quella cosa, as in the first example ; or it is referred to place, and then im- plies da questo, or quel, luogo, as in the second ex- 128 ample. By the third, fourth, and fifth, we learn that we cannot omit the pronoun ne^ when relating to some- thing spoken of, as in English -, it must be supplied in Italian, when understood in English. The word vi, though properly an adverb of place, may be used as a pronoun, as appears from the sixth and seventh examples, with reference to things, and to denote the relation of tendency. The place occupied by these pronouns, with regard to the verb, is the same as in rule 3. IV. 1. Cost s'amaimno come se They loved each other as if stati fossero fratelli. B. they had been brothers. 2. Ciascuno aveva e castella Each possessed castles, and e vassalli sotto di se. B. vassals under him. 3. lo ho a parlar seco d'un 1 have to speak with him mio fatto. B. upon business. 4. Piangendo gii si gittd a' Weeping", he fell down at his piedi. B. feet. 5. Tutti i panni gli furono All his clothes were torn from indosso stracciati. B. his back. 6. Lauretta, levatas'i la lau- Lauretta took the crown from rea di capo, in testa ad her own head, and put it Emilia la pose, B. upon that of Emilia. The office of the pronoun se, is to represent the object, and all its relations, referred to the subject of the proposition. Thus, when the pronouns, him, or him^self; her, or herself; them, or themselves, are refer- red to the subject of the proposition, namely, to the agent, they must be translated into Italian by the pro- noun se. It may, therefore, be applied to persons of both genders and numbers. Se, is subject to the rules above-mentioned respecting the other pronouns; and therefore we use si in a simple sentence, as in the first example, and se, to mark contradistinction ; as, Ella 129 venne a scusar se e a confortar me — She came to excuse herself, and to comfort me;— or when it is attended with a preposition, as in the second. It may also be observed in the first example, that the words each other, may be supplied in Italian by si. From the third it appears, that se may be employed instead of lui or lei, without having reference to the aubject, when united to the preposition con. We must however avoid ambiguity -, for if we were to translate, '' They walked on, talking with him,*' by Andavano seco favellando, the pronoun se might be mistaken as referring to the subject they; and it would then signify, they walked on, talking together; and although, in the second case, we rather use the pre- position fra, yet in Boccaccio we find, seco medesimi cominciarono a ragionare. We should therefore, in the former case, say, Andavano con lui favellando . The diction of the the fourth, fifth, and sixth exam- ples, is peculiar to Italian, and worthy of remark. The Italian style would be violated, if we were to say, " Piangendo si gitto a' suoi piedi; Tutti i suoi panni furono stracciati indosso a lui; Lauretta levata la lau- rea del mo capo J' If the possessive refer to the person to whom the action is directed, we employ a pronoun, indicating the relation of tendency, instead of the possessive, unless there be the oft-mentioned opposition or contradistinction. Thus, in the fourth and fifth examples, the possessive his, is supplied in Italian by the pronoun gli, to him ; and in the sixth, the possessive her, is represented by the pronoun si, to herself. Then, of course, the pronoun supplying the possessive, must be put immediately before of after the verb, according to the third rule. I have observed, that some of my students confound the dic- s 130 tion of the sixth example with that given in Chapter XIII. rule fifth, and they therefore omit the posses- sive, without substituting a pronoun. The pronoun is to be substituted, when the action tends to the agent. In the two sentences, " Let your eyes fall upon the ground — Bassa gli occhi in terra; He put his breast upon the edge of the urn — Pose il petto sopra Vorlo delV area;'' the actions fall upon ground and edge, and there is, therefore, no need of any pronoun; but in the expression of the sixth example, and the following, Postosi alcune petruzze in bocca — Having put some little stones into his mouth— the actions tend to the agent himself, and the pronoun si is, for that reason, substituted for the possessive. These peculiarities of the Italian language are too much overlooked, both by teachers and learners. From the sixth example it is also to be remarked, that no article is applied to the word capo, although it is used when the pronoun is substituted for the posses- sive, or when the possessive is understood, as in the above-mentioned examples — i panni gli furono strac- ciati; bassa gli occhi in terra. The article is, in that case, sometimes omitted, when the word to which, in English, the possessive is affixed, is attended with a preposition. The following are other instances: Presa una galla, gliela posi in bocca; Taking a pill, I put it into his mouth — Se la trasse di tasca; He drew it out of his pocket — Gli feci cenno con mano; I made him a sign with my hand— wherein we see that bocca, tasca, and mano, are used without the article. VII. 1 . Voi ce r avete fatta hella. You have played us a fine F. trick. 2. La piglia per lui. F. He takes his defence. 131 The pronoun is used when either a person or thing has already been spoken of; and therefore the object io which the pronoun refers is known. But there are some cases in Italian, in which we employ the pronoun, without any preceding mention of what it refers to; and custom alone will enable us to understand it. Such are the above examples ; in the former of which, the pronoun implies beffa, trick ; in the second, difesa, defence. Thus, when we say, Me la colgo, the pro- noun refers to fuga, I take flight : sard, meglio darla di qua; the pronoun la is referred to volta, turn ; It will be better to take this turn. The modern Italians have introduced the ridiculous form of address by the third person feminine, under- standing the words vostra signoria, which are expressed every moment, and bestowed indiscriminately in some parts of Italy ; and, consequently, increase the ab- surdity, by making the adjectives, which are applied to the person addressed, take the feminine termination. For instance, A che ora e tornata vostra signoria ? In order to avoid expressing this title, the pronoun ella should be used for the subject; but, generally, some make use of lei, and some of lui, which pronouns can only represent the object. Fortunately, this mode is admissible only in conversation and in familiar writing; for it cannot but tend to deprive the language of force, fluency, and dignity. Even in comedy, which is a representation of manners and customs, this servile politeness has not been admitted. s2 132 EXERCISE XII. 1. Having kept this money nearly a year, in order to — serhati — danari bene — — per return it him, and not having- seen him again, I rendere * * — — rivedendo * — at last gave it for the sake of God. dare * — — amor — — 2. (Thou) give him a pair of poor shoes, an dare * qualche paio — scarpetta — old coat, and foster him. cappuecio vecchio — lusingare * 3. They divided his works in such a manner, that he par tire — fatica — sifatto — — — — was able to support them. potere comportare * 4. I reproved him the other day, and he has ill — riprendere * — altrieri — — m' performed what he promised me. attenere * — •* 5. He resolved to make a discovery oft himself, and to deliberare — palesare * — — remove her from the ignorance (which) she laboured trarre * — — inganno * (2) essere (3) under. in (1) 6. Though I be unworthy of it, I intend, with your come che — — non degno * — — — — leave, to take it. licensa — prendere * J7. God had mercy on him, and received him into his — — misericordia di * — (5) *(4) (1) (2) kingdom. regno (3) t This preposition is omitted in Italian, because the relation of qualifica- tion is changed into an object. The student will meet with similar alterations in the Exercises. 133 8. We have taken this man out of the frying--pan, and — — trarre costui — — padella — have thrown him into the fire. gittare * — — — 9. (Thou) go then, said the lady, and call him, and — dunque — — donna — — * — bid him to come hither to the fire. dire * die qua se ne venga — — — 10. They resolved to tie him to the rope, and to let deliberare * — — fune — — collare him down into the well. * — — — 11. He yawned, and rubbed his eyes. — shadigliare — stropicciare * — 12. By many arguments he endeavoured to turn her con parole assai ingegnarsi* — rivolgere * from so cruel a resolution. — SI fiero — proponimento 13. 1 loved your daughter, still love her, and ever — — figliuola e — — (2) shall (love)> because I hold her worthy of (1) perci^ che reputare (d^) * (2) (1) — my love. 14. She could never remove him from herself. non potere mat partire * — * 15. The lady, seeing- (him), and hearing" him, desired he — donna — * — udire * pregollo would come into the tower, that she might speak che venisse — — — accid che — potere — to him. 16. If you will not grant me this favour, send me — — volere — fare * — grasiafar venire — at least a glass of water, that I may moisten my almeno — bicchier — — che — potere bagnare * lips, bocca 134 17. Though I have not a thousand, I had a hundred, perche — abhia — — * — and even tv^o (hundred), to give you. — anche — — da — — 18. There, many times, they talked together, and quivi spesso volta favellarsi* — — shook hands. toccarsi * la mano ** 19. She called to her one of her maids, in whom she — a * — * earner ier a di * — had great confidence, and thus said to her. conjidarsi * molto — si dire * 20. Let us use them and their things, as they do trattare * — * — — * trattare (4) us and ours. *(1)(2)*(3) 21. (Thou) make use of Fortune's offer; do not expel usare — — * benejicio — cacciare her ; go to meet her, and receive her coming. * farsi* incontro * — (3) lei(\) vegnente(2) 22. Having taken him to a window, she made him open menare * — — g/^; — ^ his mouth. * 23. There is none of them that thinkf of it. 24. The delay of his departure from Rome, will be of — indugio — — partita — — — — greater injury to him than to you. — pregiudisio * — * 25. If I had any body under my hand, fit for it, I — — a * mani che fosse da do — would send him to her. mandare * * f Pensarc governs the relation of tendency. See Rule V. 135 26. He distorted /his hands, fingfers, arms, legs, mouth, storcere(^l) \ * — dito — — — eyes, and his whole face,\ in such a manner, that _ _ * * viso/(4){2) guisa(S) — he became frig-htfiil to look at. ^era cosa pareva a vedere j27. The priest, having- taken off his cloak, gave it her. — — trarre o * tabarro — * 28. (Thou) leave it not to be devoured by the fowls, lasciar * — divorare — — uccello unless he ordered it. salvo se — comandare il * 29. Griselda went cheerfully to meet her, saying. Be — farsi * lietamente incontro * — hen welcome, my lady, venga la — donna 30. I thought he would take my defence, and, on — credere che pigliasse * — in the contrary, he takes hers. quello scamhio — — * per lei 31. Thou hast indeed played us a trick; but — — ben fare — * — nobody shall ever play us another. mai piu persona non — — * 32. Here is a wicked fellow, that has taken my purse egli e qua — malvagio uomo — — tagliare * — with about a hundred pounds. — ben — — lira sterlina 18G GHAP. XYII ON DEMONSTRATIVE, AND OTHER PRONOUNS, OF PECULIAR NATURE. 1. Chi e cestui che 'I nostra Who is this man that runs monte cerchia ? D. over our mountain ? 2. Costei e una bella giovane. This is a fine girl. B. 3. Udi cib che costoro di lui He heard what these people dicevano, B. said about him. 4. Colui che piil sied' alto, He who is in the most ele- Ridolfo imperatorfu. D. vated place, was the em- peror Rodolph. 5. L'altra b colei che s' ancise The other is she, who, being- amorosa. D. enamoured, killed herself. 6. Che dir em not a coloro J B. What shall we say to those men? The pronouns costni, this man ; costei, this woman ; which both make costoro, these people, in the plural, indicate persons near to the speaker; — colui, that man; colei, that woman ; and coloro, those people, refer to persons distant both from the speaker and from the party addressed. The word cotestui, denoting a per- son near to the party addressed, not being used, we may then make use either of costui or colui, costei or colei, according to the distance from the speaker. These pronouns may represent alike the subject, the object, and their relations. 137 II. 1. Questi e Rinier, D. This is Reynier* 2. S' V non fossi impedito, If I were not prevented, I cotesti . . . guarderei io. would look at him who D. is at your side. 3. Quegli e Omero, poeta so- Tliat is Homer, the prince of vrano. D. poets. The pronouns questi, cotesti, and quegli, this, or that man, and which must not be confounded with the plurals of the demonstrative adjectives already treated of in the 14th Chapter, can only represent the subject of the proposition (although Dante deviates from this rule in the second example), and can only be applied to one individual of the male kind. Questi, denotes a person near to the speaker ; cotesti, near to the party addressed; quegli, distant from both. Thus, there are two demonstrative pronouns, which may be employed indifferently, to denote an individual of the male kind, representing the subject of the sentence; namely, questi and costui, this man ; quegli and colui, that man ; I say, when they represent the subject; for in every other instance we may use only costui, colui, &c. III. 1. Co&iei non potea lo sdegno This woman could not curb dello animo porre in terra. her passion. B. 2. Chi sarebbe colui che nol Who could he he, who would credesse? B. not believe it? 3. Egli esaudisce colore che He hears those who pray to 'I priegano. B. him. 4. Miseri quelli che con le Wretched are they who feed pecore hanno comune in common with the flocks. cibo ! D. 5. Chi h quei di cui tu par- Who is he, of whom thou lain era? D. wert just speaking? 138 Questif costui, costei, and costoro, are also employed figuratively, to denote persons defined by what has preceded in the discourse, and who are therefore pre- sent to our mind ; quegli or colui, colei and coloro, to denote persons indefinite, and consequently distant from our mind*; the latter are, for that reason, always followed by a specifying proposition. Now, as the English, in allusion to the words quegli or colui, colei and coloroj which they have not, employ the pronouns he, she, they, which correspond with egli, ella, eglino, elleno, mentioned in the preceding chapter, we must, in translating from English, distinguish these two senses. The pronouns he, she, they, are rendered in Italian by quegli or colui, colei and coloro, when fol- lowed by who. The adjective quelli or quegli (which latter we must be careful not to confound with the pronoun singular just mentioned), may be used instead of coloro, as appears from the fourth example. Quegli is sometimes shortened into ^W6t, as in the fifth example. IV. 1 . Non mi pno confortare al- No one but you can comfort tri che tu. B. me. 2. lo non torrei mai altri che 1 would never m'arry any la sorella d' Alessandro. other but Alexander's sis- F. ter. 3. Tu non I'hai sentito dire You cannot have heard this da altri che da quel tri- from any other but that sto. F. wicked man, 4. E poco senno a dilettarsi It is no mark of good sense, di schernire altrui. B. to take delight in deceiv- ing others. * I employ these expressions, to exemplify the passage of these words from the physical to the figurative sense ; having shown that questi and coatui designate persons near to, quegli and colui^ those distant from, our view. ]39 5. Se io Vavessi, ad altrui If I had it, 1 would lend it to lo pr ester ei. B. others. 6. Hai tu mai tolte delV al- Hast thou ever taken any Xxm cose7 B. thing from o^/iers ? 7. Se I'altre volte si poco ti If it always costs you so little costa it soddisfare al- to satisfy others , . . trui ... D. The pronoun altri (which we must distinguish from the plural of the adjective altro), signifying altraper- sona, another person, or any one else, may express the subject, object, and their relations, as we gather from the three former examples. Altrui may signify Vuomo, man; un uomo, a man; gli altri uomini, others; and may supply the personal noun, us, when employed generally for men. Altrui cannot represent the sub- ject. This pronoun is frequently placed between the article and its substantive, and the preposition di is then omitted, as we see in the sixth example, the direct order of which is delle cose di altrui. The prepo- sition a may also be understood before altrui, accord- ing to the seventh example. The pronouns altri and altrui, may also imply a certain person, which the speaker intentionally omits expressing, in order that he w'ho is addressed, or a third person, may supply it; as, when Boccaccio says, Tanto sa altri quanto altri, One knows as much as other people ; Etti egli gid uscito di meute, da stamane in qud,, Vavet-e altrui ingiuriato? Has it already escaped thy memory, that thou hast abused a person this morning ? — wherein one and people stand for I and thou; and a person, for a par- ticular individual well known to the party addressed. T 2 140 V. 1 . Sappiate di certo ch' egli Know for certain that it was ^ stato desso. B. he. 2. Questa e dessa. B. It is she. 3. II giovanecolseunafoglia, The youth plucked a leaf, e con essa s'incomincid a and began to rub his teeth stropicciare i denti. B. with it. 4. Essi fanno ritratto da They show from whence they quello onde nati sono. B, are descended. 5. Gli disse che gli dovesse He requested the favour of piacere d' andare a smon- him to alight, and visit tare con esso Ghino al Ghino /itmse//*at his castle. castello. B. 6. Di' che venga a desinar Desire her to come and dine con esso noi. B. with us. Desso implies egli stesso; dessa (ella stessa); dessi (eglino stessi); desse (elleno stesse); therefore these pronouns can represent only the subject of the propo- sition. .The expressions, it is he, it is she, it is they, are translated into egli e desso, ella e dessa, or e desso, e dessa, sono dessi, sono desse. Desso implies also quella medesima persona, or cosa; either the same, the very person or thing. From the variations into essa, essi, esse, and from the fifth example, taken from Boccaccio, it appears that the word esso is an adjective like stesso; but that it is usually employed as a pronoun, and is mostly applied to inanimate things. With regard to persons, it is used instedid of eglino siiid elleno ; which pronouns are very seldom employed. The expression, con esso noi, of the sixth example, and its similar, con esso me, con esso lei, &c. are not now used ; but as they are found in the best authors, they merit explanation. As a pronoun admits of no adjective, the adjective esso, in such instances, is not applied to the pronoun, but to the word individuo. 141 understood ; and the pronoun is only a determination of this generic name. The final vowel of the adjec- tive esso, does not therefore agree, either in gender or in number, with the subsequent pronoun. VI. 1. Cio mi tormenta piu die It torments me more than questo letto. D. this bed. 2. A cio nonfu* io sol. D. I was not alone to do it. We have seen in the preceding Chapter, that the pronoun it, is rendered by egli, for the subject, and by lo and la, for the object ; and in Chapter XIV. rule se- venth, that, when it is emphatical, it may be translated by the demonstrative quello. In the latter case, be- sides the adjective esso, there is also the pronoun cio, which, as appears from these examples, may represent the subject, the object, and their relations. These words, however, are not employed indiscriminately. Cio is used to indicate the matter of a previous dis- course. (See page 106). — In the third example of the preceding rule, for instance, essa, referring to foglia, could be substituted for quella, but not by either la or do. The former pronoun cannot support a preposition, the latter cannot be applied to one thing alone. VII. 1. DaW una parte mi trae On one side I am influenced I' amove il quale io fJio by the love that I have sempre portato, d'altra always borne thee ; on the mi trae giustissimo sde- other, by a very just dis- gno ; qnegWvuole die io dain: the former pleads ti perdoni, e questi vuole that I should forg-ive thee ; die, contro a mia natura, the latter excites me to in te incrudelisca, B. be cruel to thee, contrary to my nature. 2. r son colei che ti die' tanta I am she who tormented thee guerra. P.t so much. t Petrarch, in a vision, is brought to heaven; he there meets with Laura, who expresses herself in this manner. 142 Questi, as appears from the first example, serves also to mark the latter of two individuals already mentioned, nearest in the order of words ; quegli, the former. Remark in the second example, that, although Laura is present, and near to Petrarch, she de.signates her- self by colei, the pronoun which points out a distant object, for the reason already mentioned in rule third ; namely, that the person to whom she alludes, and whom she represented in this life, is indefinite, un- known to the party addressed. The verb of the specifying proposition which always follows such expressions, should agree with the sub- ject of the preceding proposition, and not with the de- monstrative pronoun ; namely, io son colei die ti diedi; tu sei colei che mi desti; ella e colei che mi diede. EXERCISE XIII. 1. Passing by the cell, he heard the buzzing- — davanti a — — sentire — schiamazsio which these people made together. (2) (1) 2. Blessed are they who sit at the table where angels' heato * * quella mensa — — * bread is eaten I — si mangia 3. Neither they, nor any one else, ought to be surprised ne * — * doversi'^ maravigliare at it. ne 4. This fellow, whom I am looking for, though he * * — andare cercare quantunque be of low condition, shows well enough that he is — — mostrare assai bene d' essere of superior understanding. — alto senno 143 5. He who is blind with regard to discretion, * * — cieco del lume della discresione sempre is directed in his judgments by the general cry, andare — — giudicio secondo — grido whethert right or wrong. * diritto — falso 6. If I ever found a woman averse to — (2) mai(\) trovarne* alcuno sch{fo(4) di{\) such follies, it is she. questo (2) sciocchessa (3) * 7. I hold it a great folly in him who — reputare quella(3) (1) foUia(2) di * unnecessarily undertakes to try the power of others' sensa bisogno mettersi * * tentare — forze — * wit. ingegno 8. This is a poor man, deaf and dumb, who * — — — — — — mutolo * came the other day to ask charity. un di questi di ci venne per limosina 9. When these people had heard this, nothing farther come * — udire * nonpm(2^ avanti(S^ was necessary. bisognai^e (^l) 10. The pusillanimous always esteems his things — — — credere — — to be of little value, and others' of great. valer paco — * assai 11. The law says, that he who is the cause of an evil — — volere — * * cagione — il male committed, is equally guilty with him who che si fa sia in quella medesima colpa che * * commits it. fare * 12. This is a foreign gentleman, good-natured and * — — gentile uom forestiere piacevole — courteous, and much beloved in this city. t Whether, in this case, is subject to the same rule as eithery page BO. 144 13. He who acts virtuously, clearly shows * * adoperare (2) (1) apertamente — himself to be noble. * gentile 14. Then he began to look stedfastly at him, allora — (2) riguardare (S) Jiso (1} * and found that it was he. — parvegli * 15. We shall be badly off in every way, should this fellow — stiam male — — guisa se * die. muore 16. Every vice may become a great injury to him who ciascun — — tornare in gravissima noia di * * practises it, and often to others. usare — — molte volte - — * 17. Not imagining they were the same (robes), he — estimare die fossero * replied. My lord, I know not any one of them. rispondere — — — — — — — ne 18. Receive kindly the last gift of her whom, living, — benignamente -^ — dono — * « — thou lovedst so dearly. — — cotanto . 19. He was gazed upon for a considerable time before — — gucttare lungamente prima che any one could believe that he was the very person. — potesse — — 'I fosse * 20. Folly often brings a man down from a sciocchesza spesse volte trarre * di — happy state, and places him in very great misery. — — — mettere — * — 21. The judge asked him, whether what these people — — domandare — se — * said against him was true. (3) incontro « (1) * (2) fosse — 145 22. Travelling- with these people, he mildly inquired camminare — * dolcemente domandare of them, who the monks were that rode — * (2) monaco (S) fossero {I) — cavalcare before with such a retinue. avanti — tanto — famiglia 23. He had long- studied at Paris, not for the sake — lungamente — a — — — of retailing his learning", but to know the vender * scienza al minuto — — sapere — reason of thing's, and the cause of them. ragion — — — — cagion — * 24. The wise scholar, having laid his philosophy — savio — lasciati * pensier Jilosofici aside, turned his thoughts entirely to da una parte rivolgere (4) * (2) animo (3) tutto (1) — this lady. 25. Open thy mind to my words, and remember, that once, — * animo — — — — ricordarsi * — •— only once, does it happen, that fortune comes to us senza piu solere avvenire — — farsi * * incon- with a cheerful countenance, and her lap full of favours. tro — illietoQZ) viso(^i) — * grembo aperto 26. The next day, having taken his guitar, he played — altro di recare * riheha cantare several songs upon it, to the great amusement of — canzone con * con — diletto — all the company. — — hrigata 27. There are many, who, speaking like fools, say that — — — — semplicemente — — love deprives us of our understanding. — trarre * — * senno U 140 CHAP. XVIII. RESPECTING THE USE OF THE PARTICLE SL I. 1. Nulla cosa piu cava si Nothing* is more dearly pur- compra che quella dove i chased than that for which prieghi si spendono, D. prayers are paid. 2. Piacevi che il vostro corpo Does it please you, that your sia seppellito al nostra body be buiied in our con- luogo ? B. vent ? 4. Se cost e savio come si If he be as wise as it is dice ... B. said . . . There is in Italian a peculiar manner of translating those expressions, wherein the participle of a verb is preceded by the auxiliary to he, in the third person; as, in the above, is purchased^ are paid, is said: to under- stand which, it is to be observed, in the first place, that the propositions, Vuomo compra una cosa, and una cosa e comperata dalV nomo, have the same mean- ing. There is only a different form in the expression : in the former, the subject of the sentence is repre- sented by the agent; whilst in the latter, that office is performed by whatever bears the action, the agent representing the point from which that action pro- ceeds. Secondly, a verb attended with the particle si, has the same signification as the participle of the same verb preceded by the auxiliary essere: for exam- ple, in the above sentences, si compra, implies e com- perata; si spendono^ sono spesi; sia seppellito, si sep- pellisca; si dice, e detto. Nay, as Biagioli remarks, the former expression has been introduced as the more elegant, and is now used instead of the latter; which is, however, more simple, and more suited to the prin- 147 ciples of general grammar. But, as this expression has already undergone two alterations from its original and simplest form, we will show its gradual transition from one to another, supplying in the last, those words which are understood : CL'uomo non compra alcuna cosa. , . 1 L'uomo spende prieghi. ' j Piacevi che not seppelliamo il vostro corpo? C L'uomo dice come. C Nulla cosa e comperata dalV uomo. o^ J ) Prieghi sono spesi dalV uomo. M Piacein che il vostro corpo sia seppellito da noi? C Come e detto dalV uomo. C Nulla cosa si compra (dalV uomo). 3rd } Prieghi si spendono (daW uomo). ' j Piacevi che il vostro corpo si seppellisca (da noij ? (. Come si dice (dalV uomo). Thus, in the third analysis, we see— 1. That the individual by whom the action is performed, is always understood ;— 2. That if the subject is in the plural, the verb attended with si, must also be in the plural; for the same reason, that the participle of a verb con- jugated with essere, agrees with its subject; — 3. That if the subject be a pronoun, as it, in the third example, it is very seldom expressed 5—4. That the verb at- tended with si, should be placed in the same mood and tense as the auxiliary before the participle ; so that if the above sentences w ere expressed thus : " Nothing was purchased ; prayers should be paid ; your body will be buried ; it was said"— we should say in Italian, Nulla si comperava ; prieghi si spenderebbero ; il vostro corpo si seppellirxi; si diceva. Some of my pupils have observed to me, that this Chapter is not sufficiently clear. I allow that it may appear so, on account of the novelty of the subject in grammar; but the defect might also proceed from the u2 148 scholar not having well remarked the definition of the words which I employ in this work, as I have already cautioned him in page 44. If he is not familiar, for instance, with the technical words, subject, object, agent, &c. I am aware that these explanations will appear obscure to him. II. 1 . Campiamo, che noi siamo Let us fly, for we are at- assaliti, B. tacked. 2. Voi siete il piii desiderata. You are the most desired. F. 3. Aspettan me? F. Are they waiting for me ? 4. Non fia men creduto a me I will be believed no less che a voi, B. than you. 5. Se egli avviene che d'al- Should any oue ask me a cuna cosa io sia doman- question . . . dato . . . B. From these examples we learn, that the participle and the verb essere, cannot be supplied by the verb attended with the particle si, when the subject is one of the personal nouns, to, tu, &c. because this con- struction, as we have remarked in the first rule, is allowable in the third person only ; nay, even in the third person, it is only used when the subject is inani- mate, real or abstract. If the subject ^ere a person, it would create an ambiguity between this particle and the pronoun si, himself, herself^ &c. From the second and third examples we perceive that we may say, as in English, aspettan (eglino) me ? as well as sono io aspettato (da loro)? (eglino) desideran voi; or voi siete desiderato (da loro J; (eglino J ci assaliscono, or noi siamo assaliti (da loro J; but we cannot, as ap- pears from the fourth example, represent the subject by the person to whom the action is directed; as, in English, I am told, you qire promised, he is believed. 149 These expressions are equivalent to the following: they tell to me, they promise to you, they believe to him. Whenever such verbs, which have a relation of ten- dency under their dependence, are expressed in English in the former way, they must be rendered in Italian according to the latter. We can say, mi si dice, mi dicono, or mi e detto ; gli si crede, gli credono, or gli e creduto ; vi si promette, vi promettono, or vi e promesso. The verb domandare, as appears from the fifth ex- ample, is an exception to this rule ; because the person asked, may, in Italian, represent either the object or the relation of tendency. We say, for instance, either domandare alcuno d'una cosa, or domandare una cosa ad alcuno; therefore, alcuno esser domandato d'una cosa, is equivalent to, and may be employed for, domandare alcuno d'una cosa. Rubare, to rob, is subject to the same rule. III. 1. Si e pubblicata la huona The g-ood news has been rtuova. Caro. published. 2, In questa contrada non None is to be found in this se Tie truova niuna. B, country. As si pubblica signifies e pubblicata, it is published, so, by adding the particle si to the verb essere, in the present, followed by a participle, we express a past tense; and therefore si e pubblicata is equivalent to e stata pubblicata. The second example shows, that the particle si changes into se, when followed by the pronoun ne, of it; but as the English very seldom express the pronoun relating to something spoken of, they must supply it in Italian. 150 IV. 1. La natura vuole cite or- Nature will have us proceed dinatamente si proceda with order in our acquire- nella nostra conoscenza. ments. D. 2. Di e notte ci si lavora. B. Here they work both day and nig-ht. 3. Dove si va, coppia ? F. Where are you going-, both of you? 4. A grand' agio vi si poteva One mig-ht easily put his hand metier la mano e il brae- and arm up. cio. 5. Malagevolmenle si puo da It is not an easy matter for us noi conoscere quello che to know what we are to joer no* si faccia. B. do. 6. Vassi in Sanleo, discendesi One g-oes to Sanleo, descends in Noli, montasi su Bi- to Noli, mounts to the smantova in cacume. D. top of Bismantova. As we have already seen, the expressions, Vuomo compra una cosa, una cosa e comperata dalV uomo, una cosa si compra dalV uomo, are equivalent in significa- tion; the following, likewise, noi procediamo, Vuomo lavora, voi andate, are equivalent to da noi si procede, dair uomo si lavora, da voi si va. But as, in the latter instance, the person from whom the action proceeds, and the preposition da, are generally un- derstood, we may establish the following rule : When, in English, one of the words, people, one, they, we, is employed in a general sense, and represents the subject of a verb which does not admit of an object, as those above mentioned, and the like, correre, to run; potere, to be able; dormire, to sleep, &c. in Italian — 1. That word is omitted ;— 2. The verb must be preceded by the particle si;-~3. If the verb is in the plural, it must be put in the third person of the singular, thus: people run, si corre; they sleep, si dorme; one cannot, non si pub. We say also, putting 151 the verb in the plural, according to the English form, and omitting the pronoun eglino — corrono, dormono, non possono. The former expression is usually em- ployed. From the second and fourth examples, it is evident that the adverbs ci, vi, here, there, must always pre- cede the particle si. The fifth example, in which Boccaccio expresses the words da noi and per noi, is a sufficient proof that the agent, and the preposition da, or per, are always understood in similar sentences. In order that the student may not confound these verbs with those mentioned in the first and second sections, we make the following distinction: The verbs of the first section are changed from their pri- mitive construction ; instead of the thing acted upon representing the object, and being governed by the verb, '* one buys it," in the substituted form represents the subject, and governs the verb to he, and the participle, "it is bought by one." In that case, Italians make use of the particle si, if the subject of the verb to he is a thing, and preserve the English construction, as we have observed in the first part of the second sec- tion, if that subject be represented by a person. The verbs treated of at the end of the second section, are also altered from their primitive construction ; but, with regard to them, it is not the thing acted upon that is turned into the subject, it is the person to whom the action is directed — " They promise to you; you are promised." This construction is not admis- sible in Italian; and we may express it in three different ways, as appears by the second part of the second section. The verbs treated here have neither object nor relation of tendency ; the action is confined 152 within the ag^nt; they retain their natural construc- tion in English, and are altered in Italian ; instead of Vuomo dorme, we have substituted si dorme (dalV uomo). Observe, in the sixth example, that the particle si may be placed after the verb, to give the expression a greater fluency; the s must, in that case, be re- doubled, either after a monosyllable, or any form of the verb accented on the last vowel. V. 1. EgU non si vuol dire. B. It is not to be said. 2. Servar si \og\iono ipatti. We must keep our agree- B. ments. 3. Questi Lombardi cani, li These Lombards, these extor- quali a chiesa non sono tionate villains, whom the voluti ricevere, non ci si church disdains to receive vogliono piu sostenere. into her bosom, should be B. suffered no longer. These expressions are altered from their former simplicity, according to the principle established in the first rule. The object acted upon represents the subject of the proposition, and the agent by whom it is performed is understood. The following is the gradual change which they undergo; the words be- tween parentheses are understood. , , ^ ( La pruden^a) non lo vuole, i. e. il dire. ' ( (La giustisiaj vuole i patti servare, or, essere servati, C Egli, i. e. (il) dire non e voluto (dalla pi^udensa). 2nd, ^ I patti servare, or, essere servati, sono voluti (dalla C giusti^iaj, C Egli, i. e. (il) dire non si vuole (dalla prudensa). 3rd, i I patti servare, or, essere servati, si vogliono (dalla t giustizia). The progression from the second to the third change, may be seen in the third of the above examples, in 153 which both forms are used. The verb volere, in these expressions, supplies, as the more elegant, dovere, to be obliged. By the first we learn also, that the negative should always precede the particle si, unless there be one of the adverbs vi, ci, as in the third example ; in which case, that adverb is placed between the nega- tive and the particle si. We have remarked. Rule II. that, to avoid ambi- guity, the diction with the particle si should not be used, when the subject is a person; the last example, however, proves that it is occasionally done. VI. 1. All' amico dee Vuomo con- Man oug-ht privately to con- tare il suo difetto segre- fess his faults to his friends. tamente, D. 2. Sono alquanti die vogUono There are some who pretend che Vuomo gli tenga di- to be considered as elo- citori, D. quent speakers. 3. E dolce il pianto piu ch' Weeping is more agreeable altri non crede. P. than is supposed. When we utter a maxim, we use the simple and direct construction. Instead of saying (dalV uomo) si dee; (dalV uomo) vogUono esser tenuti; (da altri) non si crede; we say, as in the above examples, Vuomo dee; vogUono che Vuomo gli tenga; altri non crede. EXERCISE XIV. 1. Son, thou hast done well, and must do figliuolmio (2) (3) (1) — volere * Ql) (3) so for the future. cost (I) innanzi 2. Things which are done for the service of God, — -— * — a — servigio — — should all be done purely, and without any deono(2) (4) * (1) (3) nettamente — _ — rust of the heart. — — animo X 154 3. Very few tliing-s of value may be coveted in the * — — valor e * hramare(A) (1) (2) w^orld, that are not attended with a thousand (3) die sieno — carico * — — dang-erous circumstances. pericoloso accideiite 4. Perceiving" that he was not believed, he g-ave vedere — * — — — — a these fellows two couples of fowls. * — paio — cappone 5. The habit of virtue, moral as well as intellectual, — - - - (2) (1) - - cannot be obtained on a sudden, but must (3) * avere (2) subitamente (1) — convenire che bet acquired throug-h use. *(3) (4) (1) usan^a(2) 6. There will be a thousand ways to manag-e that it egli ci avrd — — - modo da far si — shall never be known. mai non * — 7. The king- ordered, that before the palace g-ates — — comandare — avanti che — palagio* — ■ were§ opened, his whole househould should appear * — * famiglia venire before him. davanti * 8. The first science is called metaphysics. * 9. He was sent under a strong g-uard to the penitentiary, * — con — buono — casa to underg-o the penance of the crime committed. — patir penitensa — — peccato — 10. True it is, that in this, / as well as in other thing-sj, hilvero — (2) (3) \— — — it is necessary\ to consider when, where, — y (\) da riguardare e il tempo eil luogo and to whom we are speaking". — con — * favellare t Put this verb in the present subjunctive, and that of the seventh exam- ple, marked §, in the imperfect of the same mood. X Is it in some things only, or in all, that we are to consider? &c. An article is required in the latter case ; none in the former. 155 11. They did not dare help him; on the contrary, they — ardire aiutare — an^i cried out with the others, that he should be gridare insieme — — — — * killed. 12. It is believed that the sea-coast from Reg*g"io to Gaeta, * — — — marina — — — — is the pleasantest part of Italy. sia — dilettevole* ■ — — — 13. He now made a pretence of sending" word to the — allora — — vista — mandare a dire — — inn, that he should not be expected to supper. albergo — — * attendere — cena 14. The next morning* it was known all round the — mattina seguente * — per tutta — ■ country how this thing had happened. contrada come — — essere stato 15. This door makes such a noise when it is opened, — uscio — si gran romore quando * — that I should easily be heard. — — leggiermente * sentire 16. I am sensible that great and valuable things are not — conoscere — * — (2) caro(3) (1) * — to be attained without trouble. potere acquistare (S) (1) fatica(2) 17. Unhappy wretch! what will be said by thy brothers, oh sventurato — * — — — — relations, and friends, when it shall be known? parente — — — * — 18. Whoever carries it about him, is not seen by * portare la sopra di * * -^ — -t- any body where he is not. * — 19. Every shade being withdrawn, things were evidently — — partiiasi — * manifestamente distinguished. conoscere 20. It must not be mentioned to others. * volere* — * ragionare(^) cow(l) * (2) x2 156 21. She had already been lamented at home * gid — piangere{4) (1) casa(2) sua(3) as lost and dead. per — — * — 22. You are come to a place where nothing- is feared. — — — in — parte — di niente ci * temere 23. If I know how to appear dumb, I shall certainly — far vista d' esser mutolo — per certo be received there. 24. For Luke and Andrew 1 feel such sorrow a — — — portare(S) *(^l^ compassione(2) as /one oug*ht to feel\ /for the misfortune of a * \ * dovere — /(2)\— infortunio friend.\ - >'o) 25. Two kinds of stones, of very great virtue, are to be — maniera — pietra — grande^ — * found there. — ci * 26. If, through our imperfections, we cannot fully — — — vi^io * pienamente attain the friendship of any one, we should yet acquistare — — — alcuno almeno make it a pleasure to oblig^e. diletto prendiamo del servire 27. The more one speaks of Scipio Africanus, the more — — * — — Scipione — — - — remains to be said in his praise. restare da(4) parlare(^5) (1) (2) laude(S} 28. I beg that what you tell me may be done immediately ; — * — — — — dire — * — tosto for to-morrow is the last day that I must be percid che — — — — di dovere * expected. ai 29. Do what thou art told, and do not inquire any farther. — — * * — _„ ^ — cercar * Id 30. The evening being arrived, the provost came, as (2) (3) venuta{l) — proposto — come he had been ordered. * * — ordinare 157 CHAP. XIX. OF SOME CONSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING THE VERBS ESSERE AND AVERE. 1. Maravigliosa cosa e ad What I am g"oing- to say is udire quello che to dehbo wonderful to hear. dire. B. 2. Sard, in parte, cosa piace- It will be, in some measure, vole ad ascoltare. B. agreeable to hear. 3. Non e cosa da hiasimare. It is not a thing- to he blamed. B. 4. (Tempo) da ritornare e It is time to return from Id onde ci dipartimmo. whence we started. B. 5. Era un' acqua lavorata It was a water prepared to ddi far dormire, B. induce sleep. When, in English, judgment is passed upon a thing through the medium of the verb to he, as in the above sentences, if the subject of the proposition, represent- ing such thing, be followed by an adjective and a verb in the infinitive, as in the two first examples, the pre- position to, preceding the infinitive, is translated in Italian by a; but if the subject of the proposition be, as in the third and fourth examples, followed immedi- ately, and without an adjective, either by a verb in the infinitive, or by the auxiliary to he, and a participle, both the preposition to, preceding the infinitive, and the verb to he, preceding the participle, are supplied in Italian by da, and the participle is put in the infi- nitive. In the former case, the infinitive serves to specify with regard to what the subject is qualified, and is therefore preceded by the preposition a, the 158 office of which is to put something in regard ; in the latter, the preposition da, and the infinitive, are equi- valent to an adjective, or a qualification ; and the preposition da is applied to a pronoun understood referring to the subject, as appears in the following analysis: Non e cosa da (cm si meinti il) hiasimare; e tempo da (cut si richiede il) ritornare Id onde ci dipartimmo. In the fifth example, contrary to what is mentioned above, though the noun acqua be followed by an ad- jective, yet the infinitive is preceded by the prepo- sition da. The reason is, that the adjective lavorata does not determine that noun sufficiently; and both the substantive and the adjective, in that case, only imply one thing to be determined. 11. 1. Pensossi costui avere da Kim he imagined to have poterlo servire. B. wherewith to serve him. 2. Che partito ha da essere What shall I resolve ? il mio? G. 3. lo non gli ho a dire altro? Am I to tell him any thing F. else? 4. II modo che voi avrete a The means you are to use are tenerjia questo. B. as follow. There is a remarkable difference between the expres- sions, avere da, and avere a; although Italian writers sometimes employ them indiscriminately, as appears from the second example, which should be expressed, che partito ha a essere. Avere da servire implies, to have wherewith to serve ; avere a servire signifies, to have to serve, or to be obliged to serve. But in order to give a reason for the application of those prepositions, I would observe, that, in the former instance, we apply the preposition da to a pronoun understood, referring 159 to the object of the verb to have, as is demonstrated in the following analysis of the first example : Egli si pensd costui avere (cosa) da (cui procedesse il) poterlo servire; so that the preposition da, in this case, is affixed to the thing whence proceeds the power of serving. In the latter instance, avere a is equivalent to dovere; and we apply the preposition a to the fol- lowing verb, as the duty to which what we have in- duces us. The English render the second form either by shall, or must, as in the second example, or by the expression to he to, as in the third and fourth ex- amples. The preposition da is employed in the second example instead of a, to avoid the contact of the two a's. Sometimes the English make use of the same idiom ; for instance, " What have I to do w ith you ? Che ho io afar con voi ? III. 1. Siete per condannarlo. B. You are going to condemn him. 2. Jo sono per non esser piu, I am going to die. B. 3. Gli smemorati siete voi. B. It is you that are void of un- derstanding. 4. Tu ne vestisti queste mi- It is you that have clothed us sere carni. with this mortal flesh. The two former examples are the best modes of translating those sentences in which the verb to go is used figuratively, to indicate the passage from a state of inactivity to one of activity, or from one action to another, as if we were making advances towards it. The Italian conveys this idea by the preposition per, the character of which is to trace the very point of passage either from one place, or from one action to another ; so that they express the same meaning. 169 The participle going, placed in that instance be- tween the verb to be and an infinitive, is not translated in Italian, and the preposition to, is supplied by per. If this participle, or any other employed in the sense above mentioned, is not followed by an infinitive, aSy *' I am going out ; He is setting out," the verb ought to be put in the infinitive, and be preceded by the preposition per; as, Jo sono per uscire; Egli ^ per partire. We likewise employ the verb stare, saying, lo sto per uscire; Egli sta per partire ; and also, Ora esco; Orauscird; Egli parte; Tosto partird, &c. According to the expression of the third and fourth examples, the English say, "Is it thou? Is it you? It is I; It is we;" and the Italians, Sei tu? Siete voi? Sono io; Siamo noi. From those examples we remark also, that we do not need to supply the words if is , . , that, to strengthen the expression ; it would be a fault in our language ; the emphasis alone thrown upon the personal noun, suifices to give the same force to the Italian which those words afi'ord to the English. IV. 1. Niuna persona ci e altro No one is here but us. die noi. B. 2. Vi sono ahitanse dapotere Are there any habitations to albergare ? B. take shelter in ? 3. Nel reame di Francia, fu There lived in the kingdom un gentile uomo chia- of France, a gentleman mato Isnardo conte di named Isnardo count Ros- Rossiglione. B. sillon. 4. Non c' e mestier lusinga. You need not flatter me. D. 5. Ce n^ ^ una che ^ molto There is one which is very corta. B. short. 6. Egli e qua un malvagio There is a wicked man. uomo. B. 7. Chi ^ m B. Who is there? 161 In the expressions in which the verb to he is pre- ceded or followed by the adverb here, or there, we ought to remark — 1. That their equivalents, ci and vi, must always, as in the two first examples, be placed immediately before the verb, unless it be in the impe- rative, infinitive, or the participles. — 2. That they are generally omitted when the place to which they refer is expressed, as in the third example : the kingdom of France. — 3. That the i, both of ci and vi, may be taken off", before the vowels e and i, and the negative must be placed before these adverbs, as in the fourth. — 4, That ci and vi change into ce and ve, when followed by the pronoun ne, which is to be supplied in Italian, when the expressions, there is, there are, &c. are fol- lowed either by a number, or another word expressing quantity, and referring to something already men- tioned. -^5. That qui, or qucL, here, quivi, or Id, there, ought to be used, when the emphasis falls upon the adverb, as in the sixth and seventh examples. V. 1. Gid e gran tempo, fa in It is now long, since there Roma un gentile uomo, lived at Rome a gentle- Sec. B. man, &c. 2. ^0710 parecchi giorni che I have not been there for non vi sono stato. F. several days. 3. Non sono ancora molti It is not many years since. anni passati. B. 4. Egli e oramai tre anni We have followed in this che noi siam dietro a track these three years. questa tresca. F. 5. In Roma fu una giovane, At Rome there lived, a little poco tempo fa, chiamata time ago, a girl called Agnolella. B. Agnoleila. The following is the direct construction and analysis of the above idiomatical sentences : 1st example, Gran 162 tempo e gia (passato da che), &c. ; literally, a long time has now passed since, &c. ; — 2nd, Parecchi giorni sono (passati da) che; several days are passed since, &c. ; — 3rd, Molti anni non sono ancora passati; — 4th, Egli (lo spazio di) tre anni, ^ oramai (passato da) che, &c. ; — 5th, (II tempo passato da che) una giovane fu in Roma (fino ad or a) fa poco tempo. We learn, therefore, that, in such expressions, — 1. The participle passato, and the preposition da, which designates the epoch from which the period mentioned commences, are understood ; the participle passato, however, may be expressed, as in the third example ; — 2. The verb essere ought to agree in number with the space of time indicated ; though Firenzuola seems to overlook this rule in the fourth example, in which he puts the verb in the singular, because he considers the extent of three years as one period ; — 3. The particle che, supplies the place of since, and may sometimes be un- derstood, as in the first example. Thus, whatever the form by which these idioms are expressed in English, the construction of the Italian must always be, ^ un mese, ^ un anno, ^ un secolo, che; sono due mesi, sono due anni, sono due secoli, che, &c. EXERCISE XV. 1. In the city of Capsa, in Barbary, there formerly resided — — — — Barheria * gid essere a very rich man, who had a young-, beautiful, and — * __ — Jiglioletta hello — amiable daughter. gentilesco 2. It is not yet three days since the words and the * — ancora — — * — (31 ^4) tune were composed. suono (5) * (1) fare (2) 163 3. Now do you judg-e whether this is to be — (2) vedere (I) se — — ccsa * endured. sofferii^e 4. Sir Francis is g"oing^ in a few days to Milan. me^ser — — ^ in fra * di ^ — 5. It is wonderful to consider, how difficult it is cosa(2) (3) (1) * pensare quanta sieno difficili to investigate the power of love. * investigare — forze — — 6. Alas I these fourteen years I have been ahi lasso me che * — — andare wandering- like a beggar through the world. tapinare — — — 7. Had I thought it would have been granted se io avessi credere che dovesse{3) (4) (5) concedere(^\) (to me), I should long since have requested it. (2) * lungo tempo * — domandare — 8. It is not g'reat palaces, extensive possessions, purple * — — palas^so ampio — non — or gold, that create respect for man, but the mind non — * fare onorare (2) (1) — — animo , resplendent with virtue. splendido(S) (1) (2) 9. Make a neat dish of it, the best and most delicious — — vivandetta * — * — — dilettevole to eat that thou canst. * — — — sapere 10. Madam, as there is no one else, this good woman, madonna poiche * — * — — donna the labourer 's wife, will keep you company. questo — * moglie tenere — — 11. There lived, ^not long since, at Florence, )rence,\ - )o ess ere (2) \ — *moltianni * * — /(O a handsome young lady, named Helen. — hello — nominare — 12. Things badly done, are far more easily blamed — malfatto — troppo — agevole* riprendere than mended. — * emendare y2 164 13. It was scarce four hours since Cymon had * non ancora — — compiute poi die — — parted with the Rhodians. lasciare — 14. I am about to leave this country for ever. * ritrarsi di{3) qui (4) del (I) tutto(^) 15. For these eight years I have loved thee more than my own life. — 16. It would be a long- story to relate. — — lungo * raccontare 17. When the sun is setting, we will sup in the come — — sard* andar sotto — — per — fresh air. fresco 18. It is not passion, but virtue, that has been the * — passione — — * si — — — efficient cause. movenle cagione 19. When we have it, what have we else to do, trovata che avremo la — avremo — altro * — but to put it in our pocket? se non mettere * — * scarsella 20. Looking if there was any way to come down, riguardare — *(^5^ fosse(6) (1) (2) (3)* scender(ji) and finding there was not, she renewed her — non veggendola — ricominciare * complaint. pianto 21. He must complain of himself, and not of her. — SI avere rammaricare — * l! 22. I think he is not to be blamed, who puts non mi pare che sia * riprendere * fare a jest upon a person who is seeking for it. beffa alcuna a colui * andare cercare — 165 23. I fear that I should have laboured a long* — duhiiare — — non avessi — gran time in vain, to find a theme for relation. pezza penato a trovar — — * ragionare 24. I think that the second would be pleasant to reputare — — seconda dehha — piacevole * relate. ragionare 25. They oug-ht rather to be called beasts than men. — essere piu tosto * — pecora — — 26. You know what you are to do, if you value his sapere — ** — — t;'e cara — life. 27. To-morrow, you are sensible, it will be fifteen days noi, come voi sapete, domani * — dl since we, to take some amusement for the per pigliare — diporto a preservation of our lives, came out of Florence. sostentamento — — vita tfsaVe (3) (1) (2) 28. Your wisdom it is, rather than any foresight of ours, — senno * piil — il avvedimento * that has brought us hither. * — guidare (2) — (1) CHAP. XX. OF PRESENT PARTICIPLES. I. 1. II prete, ridendo,disse ... B. The priest, laughing-, said . . . 2. Liberia va cercando, ch' e He goes seeking- for liberty, si cara, D. which is so precious. 3. La donna, udendo questo, The woman, hearing- this, alquanto sopra se stette. was in some suspense. B. 166 The present participle is employed—l. To express of two actions performed simultaneously, that which is secondary, as the act of laughing, in the first ex- ample ; — 2. To denote the continuation of an action ; and in that instance, therefore, the participle is always attended by the verb andare, as in the second exam- ple, and the action expressed by the participle, is the principal; — 3. To represent the cause which gives us an impulse to act in some manner, as in the third example. There is, so far, no difference between the English and the Italian use of the present participle. 11. 1. Tutto il rimanente di He spent the rest of that quella mattina consumo morning- in seeking after in cercargli. B. them. 2. Egli mi credette spaven- He thought to frighten me, tare, col gittare non so by throwing I know not che nel posso» B. what into the well. 3. Dite sicuramente, che, il Speak out boldly, for no one ver dicendo, non sipeccb ever sinned by telling the giammai. B. truth. When, to the principal verb of the sentence, another is added, to denote in what manner, or by what means we act, perform, or obtain any thing, as, for instance, in the first example, the verb seeking, declares in what manner the person spoken of, spent the morning; and, in the second, the verb throwing, indicates by what means a person intended to frighten another; then the verb, which in English is in the participle, must be put in the infinitive, in Italian. It is preceded by the preposition in, if we intend to denote manner, as in the first example; and by the preposition con, if we wish to indicate means, as in the second. The latter preposition supplies hy, before a participle. These prepositions are often attended with the 167 article, especially when the verb is followed by a determination, as, in the second example, the words, non so die nel pozzo, are to the verb gittare; but it is not strictly required. The third example show-s, that the Italian also sometimes employs the present participle, even in the two above-mentioned instances, but without a pre- position. III. 1. Xoi siamo staii a pertcrAo We have been in danger of d* esser cacciati della being excluded from our nostra compagnia. B. compaDv. 2. Senza dire alcuna cosa, Without uttering any thiog", aspcttava la morte. B. she waited for death. 3. Bcpo molto a.\eT\o pregato After having exhorted him che piu a queste cose iicn to do so no more, he let attendesse. il licen.zid. him go about his business. 4. To sono stato cagione di I have been the cause of your farvela i-drovare. F. finding it. 5. Egli non sera ancora ar- He was not yet sensible of veduto, che egli avesse his having wasted his spese fuor d' ordine le riches. &'we ricchezze. B. The first example shows, that besides the prepo- sitions in and hy, cited in the preceding rule, whatever be the preposition placed in Eoglish before a par- ticiple present, that participle must, in Italian, be put in the infinitive. The words senza, without, dopo, after, govern likewise the infinitive in Italian, when, in English, the verb is in the participle present, as appears from the second and third examples. The use of the present participle after a possessive adjective, as in the fourth and fifth examples, is an idiom of the English language. Italians make use, in that case, either of the infinitive preceded by the pre- position di, or the subjunctive preceded by che; so 168 that we might say, in the fourth example, Che voi Vahhiate ritrovata; and in the fifth, D'avere spese. IV. 1. Non sentendolo, ne veg*- As they neither heard nor g-endolo, ehhero per fer- saw him, they firmly be- Tifia opinione lui essere a lieved that he was re- Roma ritornato. B. turned to Rome. 2. E in cosifalti pensieri, e As he was in this perplexity dolorosa molto stando, and distress, he heard many sentl per la chiesa andar persons walking and talk- genti, e pari a r molte per- ing in the church. sone. B. Generally, when the word as, at the beginning of a sentence, signifies because, or while, it is not translated in Italian, and the following verb is used in the par- ticiple present, as we see in the above examples, by the verbs sentendo, veggendo, and stando. The English, on the contrary, put a verb governed by the object of another, in the participle present^ as, in the second example, the verbs walking and talking are governed by the words matiy persons, representing the object of the verb heard; whilst Italians express it by the form of the infinitive ^ as both the participle present and the infinitive, denote continuation of action within a time undetermined, and are therefore equivalent, in this respect, to one another. EXERCISE XVI. 1. The friar, hearing* this, was the most uneasy man in the — /rate udire'^ — — — — turbato — * — world. 2. Some doing- one thing*, some another, the hour of * * -_ _ e * Valtra — ~ — supper arrived la cena sopravvenire 169 3. Many, in endeavouring- to g-et more bread than — — il cercare * — aver — — — they wanted, met a premature death. hisogno non era loro perire acerbo 4. He took an extreme pleasure in causing- harm, avere oltre modo — — commettere* mali enmities, and scandal. e inimicizia — scandali 5. Thinking he had seen enoug-h, he resolved to parere * gli avere assai veduto proporre — return to Paris. tornare — — 6. He proposed to divert himself at his expence, — — voler prender diletto di* fatti suoi by playing- some joke upon him. — il fare * — b^fff^ gli 7. Seeing- every man running-, they were astonished. vedere* (2) (3) correre*(^l) maravigliarsi * 8. As he was walking- along-, he met with his * andare venirsi scontrato in — companions. 9. Many persons are now abroad on the mountain, who, — gente e ora per — monte li quali seeing us, might guess what we are vedere * — si potere indovinare — — andassimo doing. fare * 10. We have had a deal of trouble in making this. — — durare fatica — * — 11. By blaming the faults of others, he thought he * il * — fallo * gli parve should make the way more open for his own. dovere — piit libera via a * 12. Let us give him what he is looking for. — * — andare cercare * z 170 13. He had applied his whole mind in looking* after — porre * * sollecitudine — guardar* this man. * 14. In behaving- courteously, your nobleness has (3) usar*(^4t) cortesia{5) (I) (2) essere proved itself greater than that of any one else. mostrare * maggiore — in alcuno altro 15. My brothers, be welcome: What are you looking* — — voi — i ben venuti — andare — cercare* for at this time ? ora 16. Having- taken up a very larg-e stone that fresa — grande * pietra — lay by the well side, and screaming-, she let it appie' del po^^o era gridare* lasciare * fall into the well, cadere — — — 17. Knowing- it was his turn to speak, he began conoscere'^ che a lui toccava * dover dire cominciare in the following manner. — cotal guisa 18. Imag-ining- he had heard a noise of feet in the parere * — — — alcuno stropiccio — — per — dormitory, he put his eye to a little hole. — porre * — piccolo pertugio 19. And you. Sir, what prayer are you accustomed to say, when you are travelling- ? — dir camminare* 20. Though men, by their desires, sin in many come che — desiderando(p) pecchino(4) (1) vario(2y ways, you, gracious ladies, sin extremely in maniera(3) — — donna (2) sommamente(\) — one, namely, in desiring- to be beautiful. — cioe — il * — — hello 171 21. The young- lady weeping-, replied, that she had — — ■ piangere * rispondere — — lost his company in the wood. smarrita(6) (1) (2) (3) (4) selva(5) 22. When Theodore heard this, his joy was — * _ (3) leti^ia(4) (2) so great, that he thought he leapt from tanto(l) — §"^^(3) parve(^4) saltare (5) ^'(0 hell into paradise. (2) _ _ 23. She rose grumbling, and going to the press, — (2) hrontolare*(y) — andatasene — — soppidiano drew out the cloak, and gave it to the clerk. trarre ne — taharro — — — cherico 24. As they were walking one day in a pleasant grove * (2) andareiV) — — per — bello (2) bosco(^l} well planted with trees, they left their company, e foito * alhero — — — 25. In one place they saw rabbits issuing forth; from d' — parte — — coniglio (2) uscir (1) * — another quarter they saw hares running ; here were — parte (2) *(1) dove goats lying down; and there were cavriuolo (2) giacer (1) * ^- in alcuna deer grazing. cerbiatto andm' pascendo 26. As you confess so often, I shall have but little trouble poi (3) (1) (2) — — — fatica either in hearing or asking. * di udire * — domandare * 27. You have so much the more deserved, as you had more liberty of doing otherwise. — d'arbitrio — * — 28. Finding that it might be done without giving any vedere* — questo potere * — — * — disturbance to the priest, he accommodated himself noia — — — acconciare — there. z2 172 29. He beheld a pretty young- woman holding- a candle, vedere — bello — ten^ere * — lume and three men coming- towards her. - (4) (5) *(3) (1) (2) 30. I do not purpose contending- with you; for you — — intendere * piatire * — — che — would overcome me. vincere — CHAP. XXI. OF PAST PARTICIPLES. 1. Troppi denari avete speso You have expended too much in dolcitudine. B. money upon your pleasure. 2. Che cosa e questa che voi What is that which you have mi avete fatto mangiare'i made me eat? B. 3. lo ho teste ricevute letter e I have just received letters da Messina. B. from Messina. 4. lo aveva quella pietra I had found that stone . . . trovata ... B. 5. Ogni gente ha gid desi- Every one has already dined, nato. B. The participle past is employed, with the verbs essere and avere, to denote an action completed, in order to supply many tenses which the verb alone can- not express. From the above examples it appears, that, when attended with the verb avere, the participle sometimes agrees with the object of the proposition^ and sometimes it does not, wherever the object be placed with regard to the participle. Biagioli says, that if we intend to indicate the action of the verb rather than to qualify the object, as in the first and 173 second examples, the participle must not change its termination ; but if we intend to qualify the object of the verb avere, rather than to indicate the action, as in the third and fourth examples, the termination of the participle must agree with the object, both in gen- der and number. I certainly must assent to the fore- going remarks; but I do not find that authors have followed the rule. I would say equally, Troppi denari avete spesi; die cosa mi avete fatta; io ho ricevuto let- tere ; and even Aveva quella pietra trovato, changing the inflection of the voice upon quella pietra; yet the only case in which the participle should agree with the noun, for the sake of harmony, ought to be when the participle is placed immediately after the noun, as in this last instance. When the participle, conjugated with avere, has no object, as in the fifth example, its termination is always o. II. 1. Io son qui venuta per ser- I am come here to serve God. vire a Dio. B. 2. Ultimamente , da amor Incited at length by her pas- sospinta, cost comincib a sion, she thus declared her dire. B. mind. 3. Ogni cosa e fatto. F. Every thing is done. 4. Essi non potevan sapere They could not know who chi fossero stati coloro they were that had stolen che rapita Vavevano. B. her away. The termination of the participle, when it is attended with the verb essere, ought always to agree with the subject of the sentence. The participle sospinta, in the second example, agrees with the subject, ella, understood, because the auxiliary, which is also understood, is essendo ; so that, when it is omitted in both languages, we must 174 consider which of the auxiliaries is omitted in Italian, to know whether the participle past ought to agree with the subject or not. Fatto, in the third example, has a masculine termination, because ogni cosa indicates a whole, undeterminate ; but we say as well, Ogni cosa ^ fatta. The fourth example offers a case with the participle rapita; in which, when governed by avere, it must ne- cessarily take the termination of the feminine, to clear the dubious sense of the shortened pronoun ; and although the person be known by a preceding dis- course, the ear would not be satisfied, if that parti- ciple ended in o, III. How can this have happened ? 1. Come pud questo essere in- tervenuto ? B. 2. Vivuto son come peccatore. B. 3. Non mi sono potuto levar se non oggi. B. 4. Questi non sono voluti ri- cevere, B. 5. // Saladino conohhe costui essere saputo uscir del laccio. B. I have lived as a sinner. I could only get up to-day. These are not admitted. Saladin perceived that he escaped the net. There are many verbs which are conjugated in Eng- lish with the verb to have, and in Italian with the verb essere, as the following : cadere, to fall. partire, to depart, sedere, to sit down. entrare, enter. piacere, please, satire, ascend. montare, mount, piovere, rain. venire, come. parere, appear, rimanere, remain, vivere, live. Almost all those verbs which do not suffer an object undei* their dependence, either because their effect is 175 confined within the agent, or because they denote state of being, as the above, and those which are attended in Italian with the pronoun si, must be conjugated with essere. The third, fourth, and fifth examples, are given, to show that when the participles voluto, potuto, saputo, and dovuto, are followed by one of the above-mentioned verbs conjugated with essere, the auxiliary of those participles also ought then to be essere. Thus, although we say, Non ho pofuto fare, non hanno voluto dire, avere saputo cogliere, on account of the verbs fare, dire, and cogliere, being conjugated with avere; we must say, Non mi sono potuto levare, non sono voluti venire, essere saputo uscire, because levarsi, venire, and uscire, require the auxiliary essere. The reason is, that when those participles are followed by another verb in the infinitive, they are also employed as auxi- liaries } and therefore, in this case, they have no con- nection with essere and avere. Many Italians, overlook- ing this distinction, would employ avere in the three mentioned examples, thus — non ho potuto levarmi, non hanno voluto venire, avere saputo uscire — ^for no other reason, than because the verbs conjugated with avere, being much greater in number than those which are conjugated with essere, the ear is more accustomed to hear those participles attended with the former than with the latter ; and one may therefore easily be mis- taken: it is, besides, a peculiar mode of the Tuscans. IV. 1. Postogli la mano in sul Having laid my hand upon petto, lui non dormente his breast, I found him trovai. B. awake. 2. Filostrato levatosi, tutta Philostratus having risen, la brigatafece levare. B. caused the whole com- pany to arise. 176 The participle present of the verbs essere and avere, is generally understood before the participle past of the verb which they conjugate. In the first, avendo, and in the second, essendo, is omitted. The pronoun in such instance, if there be any, ought to be placed, as in the first example, after the participle past, and united to it in a single word. V, 1. Avendo alcun danaro di Having some money of his suo,eVamicosuodiSeTidO' own, and his friend lendr- gliene alquanti prestati, ing hirn some, he returned senetornoinFrancia.B. to France. 2. Quivi, gittate in terra There, laying their arms I'armi, nelle sue mani si down, they offered them- rimisero. B. selves to his mercy. It is to be observed, that the English make use sometimes of the participle present, even in indicating an action passed ; as, in the above examples, with the actions of lending and laying down, which not being performed simultaneously with those of returning and offering, could be expressed by having lent and having laid down. In similar instances, Italians always use the participle past, either with its auxiliary, as in the. first example, or without it, as in the second ; let the student therefore consider, in translating the participle present, whether the secondary action be performed at the same moment as the principal, or if it be already completed. In the former instance, he must employ the present, in Italian ; in the latter case, the past. 177 EXERCISE XVII. 1. Neiphile 's novel had pleased so much, that the Neijile(5)* (4) * (2) (3)* * (1) (6) (11) ladies could not keep from donna (12) pot er si (10) Tie (7) tenei^e(l3) di (S) /laug-hing" and talking- about it.\ \ — ne ragionar di * / (9) 2. Nig-ht being- come, he got out softly into (2) * "^(1) uscirsi (5) chetamente (I) (2) . the room. (3) camera (4) 3. It has pleased me very much. ella * — — molto 4. Taking- his mantle, he went away without saying riprendere * — — andarsene * — — any thing. 5. I have granted her the permission. — concedere * — licen^a 6. Being arrived at Florence, he went to a little * giungere * — andarsene (etto) inn near his lady 's house. albergo vicino a — donna * — 7. / Half the night\ being already passed, he \lametadi — — ^(3) (1) g^*«(2) andare* had not yet been able to get asleep. * — ancor — ' addormentarsi 8. This house is situated in a place not much frequented by men. 9. Having placed the tables by the side of the fountain, * metier e'^ — — d'intorno a — fonie they supped /there with very great pleasure. \ (2) \quivi — * grande diletto /(I) A a 178 10. My kindness towards you had not deserved the outrag-e — benignitd — — — — meritare * — — you have offered, and the shame which you have — — vergogna — — broug-ht upon me. fare * — , 11. No instruction could t as yet enter his mind. — dottrina potere* — in * cuore 12. The day having- arrived, he related what he (2) giorno(S) * venire (\) raccontare — had heard the preceding* night. — udire* — passato — 13. We have perceived that she adopts the same — * accorgersi* — — tenere (3) cotal(4y conduct every day. maniera(Ji) (1) c?i(2) 14. If I had shown any regard to dreams, I should * voluto andar dietro — sogno — not have come hither. — * — ci 15. Poverty opened their eyes, which wealth had (4) aprire (1) *(2) (3) — ricchesza — kept shut. tenere * chiuso 16. After these fellows had opened the lid and poiche * — * (3) (1) area (2) — propped it, they began to dispute who should puntellare* cadere in quistione — dovesse go in. entrare vi 17. The lady having- mounted up into the tower, and — donna * montare* in su — — — turned to the north, began to repeat rivolgere (3) (1) tramontana (2) — — dire the words J given her by the scholar. — — * scolare + Remark, that could stands here instead of the compound tense, had been able, which must be expressed in Italian. X The words here understood, are, which had been. See Rule II. 179 18. Seeing- that she by whom she hoped to be succoured, — — * — * — — — aiutare * had her thig-h broken, she resumed her complaint. — * coscia rotto ricominciare — pianto 19. You have done wrong* ; you have behaved very (2) (3) male (I) * (5) portarsi(G) badly. male (4) 20. The day lig-ht having- appeared, and the (2) giorno (3) chiaro(4) * venire (l) — — storm being- something- abated, the lady^ who was tempesta * alquanto acchetare* — — — — almost dead, lifted up her head. — — alsare * testa 21. The window at which the prince now stood, quello — — — (3) (4) allora{y) essere(2') looked upon some houses overthrown by the guardare sopra certo — fare * cadere — — impetuosity of the waves. impeto mare 22. Wrapping- her head in a mantle, she laid herself ) * (1) (2) she sent to her husband, to know what he fare * (2) (3) domandare (1) — would have for dinner. voleva sifacesse * desinare 42. He became particularly intimate with a man who — prendere stretta dimestichesza — — — was called Peter of Tre santi; and in token of * chiamare — * — — — — segno — kindness and friendship, according- to the custom amorevolessa — amista * — guisa of Pug-lia, never called him otherwise than his PugUese non -r- — se non comrade Peter. , compar — 43. Have a care that, whatever you see, you utter not a guardarsi* — * — * — dire non — single word. (2) (0 44. She hid him under a chicken coop. — nascondere — — — poUi * cesta 45. I am a brother to the lady within. — — * — —■ dild entro 207 CHAP. XXIII. RESPECTING THE USE OF SOME MOODS AND TENSES. OF THE INDICATIVE. 1. Vedendo la barca, si ma- r^aviglid. B. 2. Tutto altrimejiti addivenne che ella avvisato non avea. B. 3. Questo ronzino ci capitd iersera. B. 4. Tre di gli chiamai, poi ch' e' fur morti. D. 5. Mi davano si poco salaro, che io non ne poteva pure appenapa,ureical.arl 6. Io non credeva che gli agnoli facessero queste cose> B. 7- St ornato e si pulito della persona andava, che ge- neralmente era chiamato il Zima. B. Perceiving- the boat, she was astonished. It happened quite otherwise than he had imagined. This tittle horse came here last night. I called them for three days, after they were dead. They gave me such small wages, that 1 could scarcely get my shoes. I did not believe that the angels did these things. He always dressed and adorn- ed his person so much, that he was usually called the Beau. As we remarked at the commencement of this Gram- mar, there are in Italian, two forms of expressing the perfect and imperfect tenses ; the first of which is used to indicate the act of an instant, or what hap- pened, what was performed at one, or even at several determinate times; and the second, to designate what usually happened, or was usually performed, during any undeterminate period of time. In the three first examples, the verbs maraviglib, addivenne, capitd, indicate facts of an instant, without 208 any continuation ; in the fourth, although an action is indicated which was repeated, the time is determined by the period of three days; but in the three last examples, the verbs designate facts which were cus- tomary. The wages, for instance, are a reward sti- pulated for, and paid every year; the purchase of shoes is continually repeated ; and therefore, in the fifth example, the verbs dare, and potere, are in the imperfect. The speaker, in the sixth example, says credeva; because, formerly, he had constantly believed in that manner. In the seventh, the verb andare, and essere, are put in the imperfect ; as it was the custom of the person spoken of to be well dressed, and to be called Beau. The imperfect tense is sometimes indicated in English by the auxiliary verb to be; as, ** He was coming," Egli veniva; — or by the verb would; as, " He would say to every one," A ognuno diceva; Once a year, at least, they would dress all alike, Essi si vesti- vano insieme almeno una volta Vanno. OF THE IMPERATIVE. 1. Levati. B. (Thou) Rise. 2. Non f impacciare. B. Do not concern thyself. 3. Perchh egli il negasse,non If he should deny it, do not gliel credete. B. believe him. The form used in the imperative for the second per- son of the singular, cannot be employed in Italian w^hen the verb is attended with a negative. In that case we make use of the infinitive, as in the second example, the entire construction of which is tion ti (devi) impacciare ? Should, therefore, the verb of the first example be attended with a negative, the Italian 209 ought to say, Non ti levare. Likewise we say, Paria, Speak ; Leggi, Read ; Va, Go ; and Non parlare, Do not speak ; Non leggere, Do not read ; Non andare, Do not go ; but only in the singular ; for the third example shows that, in the plural, the form of the imperative is used also with the negative. OF THE CONDITIONAL. 1. lo vorrei che mi vedeste I wish yoo could see how I tra' dottori come io soglio am accostomed to appear stare. B. among the doctors. 2. Avrebbe voluto che si fosse He would like him to have partito. B. departed. 3. Chi Vavrebhe potuto co- Who could have recognized noscere ? B. him ? When the verb wish^ is followed by one of the auxi- liaries, should, might, could, &c. in Italian, the former must be put in the conditional, and followed by the conjunction che, and the latter in the subjunctive. The different construction of the two languages, in the second example, is to be remarked. Word for word, the Italian says, He would have liked; and like is rendered by volere. The literal expression of the Italian, in the third example, is, '* Who could have been able to recog- nize him?" and so, likewise, should the English be expressed, according to the proper agreement of tenses between verbs, if it were not to avoid the re- petition of so many auxiliaries. Whenever, therefore, the two auxiliaries, coidd have, are followed by a verb in the participle past, the verb have, which is in the infinitive in English, must be put in the conditional in Italian, and followed by pot ere in the participle. The principal verb, which is in the participle in English, should be in the infinitive in Italian. E e 210 OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. I. 1. lo non so perche io nol mi I do not know why I should faccia. B. not do it. 2. Io non veggio come noi vi I do not see how we can possiam pervenire. B. arrive there. 3. Come sapeste voi ch' io How did you know I was qui fossi? B. here? 4. Gli occhi vostri voglio vi I wish your own eyes could faccian fede. B. bear you testimony. 5. Io vi priego che a memo- I beg- you will recall to my ria mi riduciate chi voi memory who you are. siete. B. 6. Domandb dove fosse quel He asked where that young- giovane, B. man was. 7. Veramente io credo che voi Indeed I think you are rav- sog-niate. B. ing. 8. Io non duhito che voi non I doubt not but you think vi crediate dir vera. B. you speak the truth. The subjunctive mood, so called because it is always subjoined to, and dependent upon, the indicative, is used to denote something contingent, which may or may not happen. Then, in Italian, whenever one verb depends upon another, indicating ignorance, inability, question, desire, entreaty, doubt, necessity, fear, &c. we must put the verb depending in the subjunctive; for we consider the dependent expression as subject to an uncertainty. If, for instance, we wish or believe, we may be denied, we may mistake ; if we interrogate upon any subject, it is because we are not sure whether it is, or is not, &c. In the first example, the subjunctive, faccia, depends upon the verb sapere, attended with a negative, and therefore expressing ignorance; in the second, the 211 subjunctive, possiam, depends upon the verb vedere, attended with a negative, and therefore expressing inability; in the third example, the subjunctive, /om, depends upon the verb sapere, used interrogatively, and therefore inferring doubt, &c. II. 1. lo son contento di esser I am content always to be seinpre V ultimo che ra- the last to relate. g-ioni. B. 2. Madonna, non vi discon- Madam, do not discomfort fortate prima che biso- yourself before it is ne- g-ni. B, cessary. 3. Voi vedete quanto io sia You see how I am watched. guardato. B. 4. II piu contento uom fu che He was the happiest man fosse giammai. B. that ever existed. 5. Bella cosa h il ferire un It is a commendable thing- to segno che mai non si hit a fixed mark : but . . . muti ; ma ... B. 6. Mi consigliano che io mi They advise me to get some TpvocMvi del pane. B. bread. 7. Guardatelo, che non si fug- Watch him, lest he should fly. gisse. F. 8. A me par voi riconoscere* I think I recollect vou. B. There are instances in which a verb is put in the subjunctive, for the reason already mentioned, although it may not be apparent. We shall, however, lind the established principle by the following explanation. In the first example, ragionare is put in the sub- junctive, because it depends upon the preceding pro- position, expressed in a contingent manner. I am content to be, expresses a consent, subject to uncer- tainty with regard to the thing consented to ; so that, whenever a verb depends upon a proposition expressed in a manner supposed, negative, not absolute, or K e 2 212 whenever a verb is dependent upon another which is in the subjunctive, it must also be put in the same mood. In the second, the verb bisognare is put in the sub- junctive, by virtue of the following conjunction. A verb subject to the conjunction prima che, before, indicates something projected, and therefore only probable. A verb modified by the word quanto, as in the third example, is usually put in the subjunctive (excepting in comparisons, and when preceded by an interjec- tion); for the assertion, in such instances, is subject to alteration, with regard to the modification expressed by that very word. A verb modified by the adverb mai or giammai, is put in the subjunctive, when expressed by way of supposition, as in the fourth and fifth examples ; if they were employed entirely in a positive manner, the verbs essere and mutare should be used in the indica- tive ; for instance, fu il piu contento vomo, e piii con- tento di lid alcuno nonfu giammai; egli feri un segno che non si muta mai. Procurare is in the subjunctive, in the sixth exam- ple, as depending on the verb consigliare, of the same nature as those already mentioned -, but the verb governed by consigliare, pregare, and some others, may as well be put in the infinitive, preceded by the jjreposition a; as, mi consigliano a procurarmi del pane; vi prego a raccomandarmi a lui. The entire construction of the seventh example is, guardatelo a fin che, &c. ; from which we see, that the idea implied in the words non si fuggisse, is the end of the action expressed by the verb guardare. Now, as the end of our actions is always contingent, and may, 213 perhaps, never happen, notwithstanding all our fore- sight, it is consequently expressed by the subjunctive mood. Many similar conjunctions perform the same office. By the eighth example we learn, that a verb governed by one of the following, credere, parere, pensare, giu- dicare, stimare, and others of the same kind, is put in the infinitive, when the two verbs have the same sub- ject, and may be preceded by the preposition di; as, lo non so d'avervi mai piii visto, I do not recollect to have ever seen you ; lo ho paura di non girare, I am afraid, lest I should go mad. III. 1. lo non so chi egli si fu. B. i do not know who it was. 2. lo 7ion so chi voi w^iete, che I know not who you are, that me cost conoscete, B. are thus acquainted with me. When, of two circumstances, one is known, a verb which depends upon another, expressing ignorance, is put in the indicative. The person who said, lo non so chi egli si fu, had been asked whether he had never cheated any one ? He answered. Yes; but I do not knoiv, &c. Thus one circumstance was known to him in that case, namely, / know I cheated some per- son. From this circumstance, therefore, the verb essere, in the first example, is employed in the indicative. In the second example, should the verb essetx be used in the subjunctive, the speaker would express that he has not the least idea of the person spoken to ; and although it be so, yet the putting that verb in the indicative, serves as a modification of that circum- stance. 214 IV. 1. lo non voglio che vol di me duhitiate. B. 2. lo non vorrei che voi cre- deste che io fossi stata una milensa. B. 3. II mio maggiore non ha mai sofferto ch' io le ah- hia mostrate. B. 4. Tempo e omai che voi pro- viate che carico sia Pa- ver donne a reggere. B. 5. / due fratelli duhitavan forte non gVingannasse. B. 6. Temo che non sia gia si smarrito, che io mi sia tardi al soccorso levata. D. 7. Tu hai spent il lume, per- che io non ti truovi. B. 8. Se to non avessi temuto che dispiaciuto vi fosse, per certo io Vavreifatto. B. I do not wish yoa to fear on my account. I would not have you believe that I have been a sim- pleton. My superior would never suffer me to make them public. It is now time for you to prove what a task it is to govern women, The two brothers were much afraid lest he should im^ pose upon them. I fear he is already so far gone astray, that I came too late to bis succour. You have put out the candle, that I should not find you. Had I not feared that it would displease you, I would have done it. In order to translate English expressions like those in the three first examples, in which the objects of the verbs ivishy have, and suffer^ govern the infinitive of those which depend upon them — 1. The former verb must be followed by the conjunction che; — 2. The word which represents the object of the first verb in English, be- comes the subject of the second in Italian; — 3. The latter verb must therefore be put in the subjunctive mood. If the sentence be constructed according to the second example, the verb have is omitted in the trans- lation. The fourth example, although not expressed in English quite in the same way as the above men- tioned, is subject, in Italian, to the same construction. 215 111 the fifth and sixth examples, the negative is not, as it would appear, superfluous. As the verbs dubitare and temere, express the fluctuation of our mind be- tween two contrary ideas, the negative implies an idea contrary to that which is expressed by the following verb, as it were, in the first example : duhitavan forte, non (credendo die dicesse il vero, ma die J gV irigan- nasse; in the second, temo die non ( si possa piii rav- viare, ma die) sia gid, si smarrito, &c. The negative, therefore, is necessary in Italian, after the verbs du- hitare, temere, aver paura. Che non answer to lest; and die may be understood agreeably to the fifth example. In the seventh example, to make tenses agree with one another, the first auxiliary, have, being in the present, the auxiliary of the ^eih find should also be in the present; namely. That I may not find; or we should say, You put out the candle , that I should not, &c. In the eighth example, likewise, the verbs had feared, representing a compound imperfect, the word displease should also be put in that tense ', i. e. that it would have displeased. Now, as this non-accordance of tenses is in English allowable in such a case, we must make them agree in Italian. OF THE INFINITIVE. 1. Essi non si vergognano They are not ashamed to che altri sappia loro es- have it known they are ser gottosi. B. g'outy. 2. Credonsi che altri non co- They suppose us to be ig-no- nosca, le vigilie dover rant, that watching- causes renders gli uomini pal- people to be pale. lidi. B. The Latin manner, like that of the first and second 216 examples, loro esser gottosi, and le vigilie dover ren- dered of employing the object, and making it govern the infinitive, instead of the subject governing the indicative, is often to be found in our best writers, and maybe used by those who have acquired sufficient taste in the Italian language. The usual way is, die essi son gottosi; che le vigilie debbono rendere. EXERCISE XIX. 1. Do you think he can refrain? credere che — si * tenere 2. The child, who was clever, acted entirely — fanciullo — * intendente fare* ottimamente after the prudent nurse 's advice. secondo — savio balia * ammaestramenti 3. I firmly believe that what he has said, has happened — (2) (1) — — — — — * intervenire to him. 4. I cultivated a fine large garden, went sometimes — lavorare — giardino bello e grande * — for the wood, drew water, and did such like — ■ — legne attignere * — — ' * cotale altro little services. (etto) servigiof 5. There is no man who is a true and right estimator — non — — * — — — giusto misuratore of himself; so much does self-love deceive us. — * * propria car it a ingannare ne f We have remarked in page 13, that nouns ending in cio and gio, are pluralized by merely suppressing the o. Such are, for instance, impaccio, trouble ; laccio, net ; agio^ ease ; higio, grey ; wherein the syllables cio and gio are pronounced as in the English words chop and jog; the i, therefore, not being heard at all. But in the following, servigio, service ; officio, office ; heneficio, benefit ; Frigioy a Phrysian, the i in the syllables cio and gio, although not bearing the accent, is distinctly heard ; so that the plural of those nouns must have either two i 's, or one j. From custom only, can we learn the nouns wherein the i is distinguished. 217 6. It was customary in that court, that neither * questa (4) usansa (5) (I) (2) (3) — ne wine, bread, nor any thing- else for eating- or — n^ — — altro — * — — drinking-, was ever placed upon the tables, here * giammai(2) porre^Q) in su — — till the abbot was seated at his table. se prima — — non veniva a sedere - — la — 7. I thoug-ht you were dumb. — credere * die — * mutolo 8. Neither (thou) pretend to be surprised, . nor waste non far vista — maravigliarsi * — perder * speeches in denying- it. parola — negare lo 9. He beg-an to consider w^hat course he oug-ht to cominciare * pensare — modo 0*0 pursue. tenere 10. About the twentieth day after my departure from forse — — giorno — - — partita — you, our ship, rent by a violent tempest, — — nave sdruscito per — Jiei^o tempesta struck ag-ainst a rock. - percuotere* ad — scoglio 11. Woman, it is now time to prove donna (6) (2) (1) (3) (4) dimostrare (5) how much thou art beloved bv me. - * (3) (I) (2) 12. This must be done so privately, that your — convien che * — — segretamente — — enemy hear nothing- of it. avversario non sapere * il^ 13. I do not know what harm there would be ill — — sapere — mal si i^ a doing- it. — lo 14. Ah! how wrong- I was, to have no pity on him. deh * mal fare a — * — di — Ff 218 15. 1 thought that the impetuous wind of envy — estimare — — — — — — could strike only hig-h towers, or the dovere * percuotere se non le — — — — highest tops of the trees. levato * cima — — alhero 16. I do not deem it necessary to tell you — — credere ehe bisognare * che to raccontare * — the story of my misfortune. — — sciagura 17. Among the other most rare jewels which he had in intra — — (2) caro (3) (1) — * — his treasure, there was a very beautiful and precious — -__ belio * (2) (3) (4) ringt. (1) 18. She resolved. with greatness of spirit, seco(5^ proporre* (6) (1) attes^a(2) (3) ammo (4) to trample upon the miseries of her fortune. — calcare — miseria — 19. 1 wish he had been thrown from the bridge into the — * * — gittare — — — — Arno. 20. Did not our messenger tell us that you trembled ^nostro(A) messo(^) (2) (1) — — * like a leaf, and knew not where you were ? come — verga — sapere * — — — * 21. I wish you to see how wisely you suffer — volere * * — discretamente — lasciare * yourself to be transported with gusts of passionj. * trasportare a impeto — ira t Remark, that the second proposition only is expressed with absolute affirmation. X We have observed, page 27, that the noun requires an article when it is determinative of another ; it is therefore for the student to consider, whe- ther the word spirit^ in the eighteenth example, is determinative of greats nessj or if passion, in the twenty-first, is determinative o( gusts; or whether it be possible to resolve with other greatness than that of the mind; or to be transported with other gusis than those of passion. 219 22. Often times she would inquire of him if there was any spesso — domandare'^ il — (3) (1) thing- which he fancied i (2) — — desiderare* 23. No one knew where he had been, except those — persona sapef^e * — — * — se non — who had brought him his clothes. — * portare ■ — * panni 24. You could not have discovered your mind to — pote7^e* — — — (2) animo (1) — any one in the world, who would be more useful persona di — — — *(4) (1) (2) to you than me. (3) * - 25. I advise you again to stay at home,, or at (2) (4) (3) da capo {\) she starsi"^ — — — — least to abstain from going- into the grove. — che guardarsi* d' — — — bosco. 26. Then, thinking- that every one was asleep, parendogli — — * addorm^nlato he arose softly, and went away. levarsi* pianamente — — via 27. Fearing lest sleep should surprise him there, he temere * — soprapprendere * (3) (2^ quivi (^l) arose. levarsi * 28. Though thy froward temper would never suffer ancora che — ritrosia non ahhia mai — me to have one happy day with thee, yet * * potuto avere — buon di — — pur 1 should be sorry if any harm was to befall thee — dolente quando mal avvenire * — 29. Then he began to ramble in his talk, like allora — * — entrare in farnetichi a guisa d' a man that was dreamingt. — uom — sognare* t In Italian, tlje expression, that was dreamhig, must be referred to tbe supposed man, and not to the real person represented by the pronoun he. Ff2 220 30. I am ashamed to speak the truth, lest — vergognarsi — dirvene — vero temendo * should sin by vain glory. peccare in — — CHAP. XXIV. CONCERNING THE SYNTAX OF THE VERBS ANDARE, VENIRE, DARE, FARE, and STARE. l.Andiamo a dargli hriga. B. Let us g-o and vex him. 2. lomedesimovelsonvenuto I am come myself to tell it a signijicare. B. you. 3. Tosto ella verrd, a te. B. She w^ill come to you directly. 4. lo ne verrd con voi. B. I vs^ill go along w^ith you. 5. Andianne ; e per istamat- Let us go ; do not fear to lose Una non aver paura di me this morning. perdermi, F. By the first example we learn, that when the term towards which motion tends, is represented by the person spoken of, we use the verb andare; but if that term be represented by the party addressed, as in the second and third examples, the verb venire ought to be employed, whatever be the subject of the proposi- tion, whether the speaker, or the person spoken of. The verb venire, ought also to be used, when the mo- tion, both of the speaker, and the party addressed, is directed equally to the same term, provided that the one person only be the subject of the sentence, as in the fourth example ; for, the fifth shows that andare is to be used, if the subject be represented by both parties. If the fourth example were, therefore, ex- 221 pressed thus, '^ You shall go along with me/' the translation would be, Voi ne verrete con me. II. 1 . lo voglio andare a dirgli I will go and tell him to go che se ne vada. B. away. 2. Va, vedi che cosa e questa. Go and see what it is. F. 3. In cotal guisa infino alia So they went, pelting him porta San Gallo il ven- all the way, even to the nero lapidando. B. gate of St. Gallo. 4. Andava per li campi cerate She was going through the er6e cogliendo. B. fields, gathering certain herbs. 5. Stare leggendo. Crusca. To be reading. 6. Venivamo ad invitarvi, B. We were going to invite you. 7. Chi e costui che viene alia Who is that man who is volta nostra? F. coming this way ? W^hen a verb, expressing motion, in English, is, by the conjunction and, joined to another verb in the same mood and tense, as in the first example, the latter verb must be put in the infinitive in Italian, pre- ceded by the preposition a, in order to indicate to what purpose we move ; but if the second verb be in the present participle, as in the third and fourth, the diction of both languages is the same. The second example shows that, with regard to the former expression, if we command, and are in a hurry, we also put the two verbs in the same tense, but rather without a conjunctionf . The verb stare occasionally supplies to be, placed before a verb in the present participle, to denote the continuation of an action performed standing, as in the fifth example ; but the expressions, I am reading, + By dropping the conjunction, says Blair, in his Lectures on Rhetoric we mark a closer connexion, a quicker succession of objects, than when it is inserted between tkem. 222 He is talking, Thou art dreaming, &c. are usually ren- dered by the simple form of the verb, thus : lo legyo, Egli parla, Tu sogni. Thus the verb essere cannot be employed as an auxi- liary of the verbs andare and venire, according to the English idiom, to express actual motion. They in- dicate this idea by themselves, as apjjears from the sixth and seventh examples, by the present and im- perfect tenses of the indicative. III. 1. Non mi fare ora andare Do not oblige me to go home insino a easa. B. now. 2. Egli mi conviene andar I must go on Saturday to sabato a Firen^e, a far Florence, to get my wheel racco7iciare il filatoio mended. mio. B. 3. Fecegli trarre il capofuo- He ordered him to put his ri. B. head out. 4. ¥siYottelofare. F. I will get it done for thee. 5. Vorrei che mel faceste ras-- I wish you would have it settare. arranged for me. 6. Gli dissi che come Jigliuo- I desired him to own me as la mi ricevesse, B. his daughter. In all the above, and similar English idioms, the verbs to get, to desire, to have, to cause, to order, to oblige, are translated into Italian by the verb fare; and if the following verb be in the participle, as in the fourth and fifth examples, the verbs mended, done, and arranged, it ought then to be put in the infinitive in Italian. We have also to observe, that the verbs depending upon fare, should follow it immediately; and, as appears from the last example, that the verb dire sometimes supplies to desire; in which case, the verb depending upon dire must be put in the subjunctive. 228 IV. 1. Ilcastaldoglidie' daman' The steward willing-ly gave giar volentieri. B. him something to eat. 2. Egli vi da a mangiare He gives you these nut-galls quests galle. B. to eat. 3. Faceva dar here alia bri- He provided the company gata. B. with drink. If the object of the verb to give, followed by an infinitive, be something, any thing, or matter, these words are omitted in Italian, and the preposition da supplies the place of to; if the object be a specified thing, as in the second example, galle, the preposition to, is supplied by a. The idea conveyed by the expressions, dare da mangiare, dare da here, is, dare (cosa) da (cui si tolga il) mangiare, dare (cosa) da (cui si tolga il) here; the preposition da, therefore, is intended to denote the thing from which we take food or drink. In the expressions, dare a mangiare, dare a here, the prepo- sition a is employed, to design to what purpose the mind of him who gives something to another, tends. This definition is given to demonstrate that it is on account of the two different ideas which the Italians express (viz. the proceeding from, and the tending to), that they use two prepositions, marking two direc- tions quite contrary to one another; whilst the English express both with the sign of tendency. V. 1. A voi sta omai il prender It is for you now to make a partito. B. resolution. 2. A lui toccava il dover dire. It was his turn to relate. B. S. S' aspettava a me. F. It concerned me. 4. A me omai appartiene di It is now my turn to relate. rao^ionare. B. 224 The verbs stare, to stand, and toccare, to touch, are employed in the two former examples in a metapho- rical sense. The expressions, It is for you, It is your turn, according to the Italian idea, show something, as it were, standing with tendency towards a person, something touching him ; we render, therefore, those expressions by stare a, and ioccare a. The verb aspettare, of the third example, is also figuratively used in the sense of, to belong, to con- cern. We say, Questa cosa s' aspetta \_e aspettata} a lui, pointing out, by the preposition a, the person to whom we assign either a duty or a business, rather than, Questa cosa s' aspetta da lui, as the nature of the verb aspettare seems to require, because there would be ambiguity in the latter expression, which might signify. It is his task, as well as, He expects it, I say that aspettare is used in the sense of to concern; for when we expect something to be performed by a per- son, we assign it him as a duty, and it therefore con- cerns him. The verb appartenere is used, like the three above- mentioned, to express, to concern, to belong, to be one's turn, business, or duty. VI. 1. Egli nonfa caldo veruno. It is not warm at all. B. 2. Egli il domandb come star He inquired of him how he gli pareva dello stomaco. found his stomach. B. We say, in familiar discourse. Fa caldo, Fafreddo, &c. It is warm. It is cold, &c.; lo sto bene, lo sto male, &c. I am well, I am ill; but, in the former case, we also use essere, if we express the word weather ; viz. The weather is cold, is warm; II tempo efreddo, e caldo. 225 EXERCISE XX. 1. He ordered one of his servants to g-ive him comandare* — — — famigliare che * — something* to eat. * * 2. The weather being- warm, many parties of ladies (2) (3) (1) — — h7ngata — donna and g-entlemen went to divert themselves on the — * cavaliere — * diportare — a — sea - shore. — * liti 3. She went seeking* what she would not have liked to (2) *(1) — — — — volere find. 4. He sent to apprize the lady, that, on the following day — * dire * — donna — — seguente — she must expect him to dine. attendere — — desinare 5. Come and cover me up well ; for I feel — * — — — che — sentirsi extremely ill. un gran male 6. I should be well enough, were I out of ame parrebbe * — se (2) (1) fuori — his clutches. — mano 7. I think we should go and look for it a me parrebbe che — — * cercare without delay. senza star piu 8. Since you are so kind as to visit this little house poiM siete degnato — — — (etta) — of ours, to which we were going to invite you, we « * will show you a pretty thing. volere — cosetta G g 226 9. Go alon^ with me as far as the court of justice; for * — — infino a palagio che I wish to show you the oddest fig-ure that you — volere — — — * nuovo squasimodeo — — ever saw. (2) (1) 10. For this reason she has not been able to come to you. — questo — * — — 0* — — 11. He had a most beautiful and rich bed put up in a — * — ieZZot — — — fare grand hall, and had two pillows put upon — sala — * (4) guanciale(5) por(2^ suso(S) it, suitable to such a bed. vi{}) quali a si fatto letto si richiedeano 12. He was afraid, lest he should mistake the road J, and temere * * venire smarrito — via — so come to a place where he should not so quinci pote7'e * * — parte — (3) (1) easily find any thing- to eat. tosto(2) — * * — 13. He went and hid himself in a place where he — — * nascondere — parte che — might see what passed. potere* — — si facesse 14. I inform you, on his part, that he will do — fare assapere — per — — — — — as much as is expected from him. — — aspettarsi* * — 15. He had desired all the furniture to be broug-ht into a — * arnesi venire — — room, and /all the horses\ to be led /into a sola — \— — — /(2) \ court-yard which was under it.\ corte — — di sotto a *'^(1) t We omitted mentioning, with respect to superlatives, that, when the word most is not preceded by the article they it is rendered by adding the termination issimn to the adjective. X This word is the subject in Italian, and governs the verbs venire smar- rito: but the following verb cume, is governed, as in English, by the pro- noun. See the last paragraph of Rule Second, on the Subjunctive, in the preceding Chapter. 227 16. (Thou) g*o, and return it to him directly. — * rendere — * tosto 17. It is for you to find a way for the preservation of your * * — il — scampo — — life and mine. 18. He had provided a magnificent entertainment. — * magnificamente apprestar da mangiare 19. Your husband will come the following- day to beg — — * — seguente giorno — dimandar your pardon ; and from that time forth, he will vi merce — — questa ora innansi — leave you no more. (3) (2) (1) mai piu 20. I will go and get the table set out. •— — * * — — mettere 21.1 would not have this trouble at present, had I not — — _ (3) cum(4) al(l) (2) se meddled in those affairs which did not concern m'intrametteva — — faccenda — — * me. 22. I resolved to go and see the magnificence of diliberare — voter e — * — — — — this abbot. 23. Now it is your turn to command. omai * * — 24. I will get every thing done for her which she desires. — * tutto quel — le — — volere 25. Were you not told in what manner you should have * * * this supper dressed ? — — fare 26. This novel afforded some matter for the ladies to — — dare un poco * a (3) (4) * ( I ) murmur at, and for the young men to laugh at. (2) - (3) (4) (1) (2) Gg2 228 27. Do not trouble thyself on my account, for I am very — triholar * — di * che — * well. 28. We are merchants from Cyprus, and are going upon — — mercatante Cipriano — * per our affairs to Paris. — bisogna — — 29. Having saluted him, he asked (him) whither he far motto * — il — — was going. 30. He desired him to go to her on his part, and signify to Q « * * * her, that he would certainly /go and visit her\ — — sensafallo\* * — /(2) /that day\ U I) (I) CHAP. XXV. RESPECTING WORDS CALLED PREPOSITIONS. There are certain words called prepositions, as dinanzi, before ; dietro, behind ; vicino, near ; lontano, far, &c. which are employed to represent different places with regard to an object; and are therefore usually followed by one of the prepositions already treated of, a, di, da, &c. indicating the relation be- tween the object and the place ; as may be seen from the following examples. I. 1. E non mi si partia di- And she would not depart nansi al volto. D. from before me. 2. Egli era poco fa qui di- He was here just now before nansi da noi, B. us. 3. Domandavano a ciascuno They entreated every one che dinanzi loro si pa- placed before them to rava, che loro luogo fa- give way. cesse, B. 229 Between the place represented by the word dinanzi, and the object to which it refers, there is an interval : there are consequently two points, namely, the point from which distance commences, and the point to which such distance tends. Now, we may consider, at our pleasure, the object, either as the former or the latter term, according to the idea which we intend to express; and it is for this reason that, in the first exam- ple, the word dinanzi is followed by the preposition a, and in the second by da. The former is more em- ployed than the latter, especially in familiar discourse. As appears from the third example, the preposition may be omitted after the word dinanzi. 11. 1. Assai vicino stava alia He was very near to the little torricella. B, tower. 2. E una villa assai vicina di It is a villag-e very near this qui. B. place. 3. Non guari Ionian di qui e Not far from hence lives a un santo uomo. B. holy man. 4. Si rimase hen venti miglia He stopped about twenty lontano ad essa. B. miles from the city. 5. EraVuno daW altrolon- They lived about ten miles tano hen died miglia. B. apart. The word vicino, expresses tendency of one place to another ; and it is therefore followed by the prepo- sition a, as we see in the first example ; the word lon- tano represents the idea of one object removing, as it were, from another; and it is therefore followed by the preposition da, as in the fifth example. By the second and third we learn, that these two words may also be followed by the preposition di. The reason is, that it is sufficient to qualify the place with which we establish a relation of distance, to show 230 that it represents the point at which this distance either commences or terminates. The words al luogo, are understood after vicina, and dal luogo, after Ionian. The distance is always relative ; namely, an object may be considered as being near, with reference to one place, and distant, as regards another. Hence it is, that, as appears from the fourth example, the word lontano, may also be followed by the preposition a. In that case, we point to the place from which the object is distant; and the words lontano a, imply /«r, with regard to ; as we see, from the second example, the words vicino and lontano, change their termination according to the word that they modify. The above explanations suffice to show why these words are followed sometimes by one, and sometimes by another preposition. The prepositions placed, in the following table, between parentheses, are those which may be used with the word preceding them. That which comes first, is the more usual. The 0, signifies that the preposition may be omitted. III. 1. L'un gridd da lungi. D. One cried out at a distance. 2. Di lungi v' eravamo an- We were still at some dis- cora un poco. D, tance. 3. La risposta far em not a We will make answer to Chi- Chironcostddipresso. D. ron there, near you. Agreeably to the first example, we say. Da vicino, Da presso, Da lungi, Da lontano. As appears from the second and third, the preposition di is also affixed to those words ; da is, however, preferable in prose. Accanto (a, 0), - beside, by the side of. Addosso (a), - on one's back. Appetto (a), - against. 231 Appu (di), at the foot. Appresso (a, di, 0), near. Attorno (a), around, about. Avanti (a, di, 0, da), before. Circa (0, di, a). about, round. Contra (di, 0, a), - \ Contro (a, di, 0), - J > ag-ainst. Dallato (a), by the side. Dattorno (a, di), around, about. Davanti (a, di), before. Denlro (a, 0, di, da), in, into, within. Dietro (a, da). behind. Dinanzi (a, 0, di, da) , before. Dirimpetto (a, di, 0), opposite. Fino (a, in, da). till. Fuori (di, da), out, without. A f route (di, a). opposite. Incontra (0, a), -] Incontro (a, 0), - \ \ against. Indosso, (a). on one's back. Infino, or insino (a, in, \ 0,di,da), -\ [ till, until. Innansi (a, OJ, before. Intorno (a, 0, di, da), around, about. Lontano (da, di, a), far. Lungi (da, di). far. Lungo fO, a, di), - along-, by. Oltre(a,di,0), beyond. Presso (a, di, 0, da). near, by. Rispetto fa, di). with regard. Sino fin, 0, di, da). till, until. Sopra (di, a,0). on, upon. Sotto (di, a, 0), under. Su (di,per,0). on, upon. Verso (0, di, a). towards. Vicino (a, di), near. g32 CHAP. XXVI. OF ADVERBS. Adverbs are so styled, because they are always added to verbs, either to modify them, as Lavora molto, He works very much ; Scrive poco, He writes little ; Serve fedelmentey He serves faithfully ; Canta dolcemente, He sings sweetly; or to indicate some relative circumstance ; as Verrd Id, I will go there ; Dico di no, I say no; Nolfaro mai, Never will I do it; and, as that circumstance may refer to place, nega- tion, time, &c. as we see from the above words, Id,, no, mai, hence arise the different classes under which they are arranged. I. 1. Col consentimento de^li With the consent of the altri, lietamente la gra- others, she willingly grant- zia lifece. B. ed him the favour. 2. Cosi il magnanimo re Thus behaved the generous operb, se medesimo for- king, strongly subduing temente vincendo. B. his own desires. g. Umilmente perdono vi do- I humbly beg your forgive- mando del f alio mio. B. ness for my fault. 4. Per quella assai legger-. By the help of it, he easily mente se ne sail. B. climbed over. The adverbs ending in mente, which modify the verb with regard to manner or quality, are formed by unit- ing the adjective to the word mente\', which word t ** The Italians have taken the word mente from the Celtic ment, which signifies manner; and have joined the adjective to this word, to form the expression Con forte mente. In a strong manner ; Con hrusca mente, In a harsh manner ; which they have reduced to the greatest simplicity by the ellipsis of the preposition, and by uniting the adjective to the word." — Biagioli. 233 being feminine, the adjective takes also the termina- tion of that gender, as in the first example. The termination of the adjective in e, being suitable to the masculine as well as to the feminine, it does not change when joined to the word mente, as appears in the second example. If the adjective end either in le or re, its last vowel must be cut off, as we see in the third and fourth examples. IL 1. lo non posso piu ritor- I can return hither no more. narci. B. 2. Venite qua. B. Come hither. 3. Chi vi porto costd ? B. Who brought you thither ? 4. Niuna persona vi pub No one may enter there. entrare. B. 5. Questa gente tutta rimira All these people look there. Id. D. 6. Quivi trovd un giovane He found there a young pea- lavoratore. B. sant. As we have already said in another Chapter, the adverbs, here or hither, and there or thither, are trans- lated by ci and vi, when, as in the first and fourth examples, no force depends upon the adverb ; and are translated by qui or qu^, and quivi or Ici, when the adverb, representing, as in the second, third, and sixth examples, a principal character in the sentence, must be uttered with emphasis. The adverb costt, or costd, is peculiar to Italian, and serves, as in the third example, to represent the place where the party addressed is standing. We use it also in the epistolary style, to indicate the town or the country where our correspondent is living. Many Italians make an erroneous application of these ad- vcTbs, employing costl and quivi for qui; costd for qud, Hh 2U III. 1. Per avventura mai ricor- Perhaps you have never heard dar non mi udiste. B. of me. 2.Perch^no? B. Why not? 3. Quando gli avrete detto i When you have told him desiderj vostri, egli vi w^hat you desire, he will lascerd. B. leave you. 4. Ora innansi, e ora addie- He was continually looking-, tro, e dallato si riguar- now before, then behind, dava. B. and on both sides. 4. Quando le mandava un One day he would send her maszuol d'agli freschi, a small bunch of leeks, e quando un canestruc- another time a small bas- cio di bacelli. B. ket of peas. The word mai, as the first example shows, ought to be attended with a negative, when it answers to the English word never; wherever mai be placed, either before or after the verb. The second example shows, that when the negative not implies a whole sentence, it must be represented in Italian by no. In that case, not implies. Should I not do it ? The verb depending on the words quando and come, when, after, mentre, whilst, must be put in the future, if, as appears from the third example, an event to come is referred to. The word ora, used as an adverb, implies, in questa ora; the adverb quando signifies, in quel tempo. They are sometimes used to indicate different periods of time, in which different actions are passing, as we see from the fourth and fifth examples ; and in such in- stances, instead of saying, in questa ora, in quella ora, in quella altra ora, in questo tempo, in quel tempo, in quello altro tempo, we repeat the words ora and quando. 235 IV. 1. Purche non mi convenga So sempre stare inprigione, io son contenta. B. long as 1 am not to be a prisoner for ever, I am more jealous content. He would be than ever. It will show you how sacred is the force of love. 2. Sarebbe piu geloso die mat. B. 3. Per quella potrete com- prendere quanto sien sante leforze d'amore. B. It is necessary to distinguish between ever, when signifying at all times, and ever, when implying at any time. In the former instance it is rendered by sempre^ according to the first example ; in the latter, agreeably to the second example, it is translated by mai. The word how, when affixed to an adjective, as we see from the third example, is supplied by quanto. WORDS USED AS ADVERBS Adagio, - slowly. Adesso, - now. Affatto, - quite, at all. Allora, - then. Almeno, almanco, - at least. Alquanto - some, a little. Altrove - elsewhere. Anche, ancora, - yet, also. Appena - scarcely. Appunto, - just, precisely. Assai, - much, enough. Bene, - well. a, . - here, hither. Cold, - there, thither Come, - how, as, when Cost, - as, so, thus. Costa, costi, - there, thither. H h2 236 Diraani, domani, - to-morrow. Donde, or d'onde - hence, whence. Dopo, - after. Dove, - where, whither. Finora, - as yet, till now. Forse, - perhaps. Gia, - already, formerly. Giu, - below. Indi, - hence, from thence. Insieme, - tog-ether. Intanto, - in the mean time. Invano, - in vain. Ivi, li, Id, - there, thither. Laddove - whilst. Mai, - ever. Meglio, - better. Meno, - less. Mentre, - while. Molto, - much. No, non. - no, not. Oggi, - to-day. Onde, - hence, whence. Ora, - now. Ove, - where, whither. Prima, - first. Peggio, - worse. Pill, - more. Poi, poscia. - afterwards. Poco, - little, few. Qua, qu\, - here, hither. Quando, - when. Quanto, . how much. Quasi, . almost. Quindi, - hence, from thence. Sempre, - always, ever. Si, - - - yes, so. 237 Suvente, - often. Subito, - soon. Tanto, - so much. Tardi, - late. Tosto, - soon, immediately, Troppoy - too, too much. Vi, - there, thither. Volentieri, - willingly. EXERCISE XXI. UPON THE TWO PRECEDING CHAPTERS. 1. When Bruno saw them at a distance, he said to Philippo, come — — — * lontanof — — — Behold our friends. ecco (2) (1) 2. He dreamed he saw his wife going- through a gli parve in sogno * * (2) (1) * — — very pleasant grove, not very far from his house. bosco assai bello non guari * a - — — 3. Having met with an usurer, he carried him scontrarsi* in — barattiere menare — near to the gallery, and there he. showed him the * di — loggia — in quella — — — knight. 4. Since we have been here, I have desired to lead poi che — fummo * — — — — menare you to a spot very near this. — in — parte assai * di — luogo 5. I wish to have in the month of January, which is now — volere — di — — — — — * coming, a garden, near this town, full of green venire (5) (6) (1) di{2) (3) (4) — herbs, flowers, and leafy trees. — — — fronzuto albero t The words, vicino, lonianoy dinanzi, diefro, &c. and the following, a, di, day &c. are equally called prepositions y from the Latin prepositionesy which signifies positions before; because both are placed before an object ; but yet their force and office are very diflPerent. The former are somewhat signifi- cant of themselves ; the latter, only by relation ; — the former indicate and represent a place ; the latter serve only to point out how one object stands with regard to another. 2'3S 6. I found an excellent physician, who has cured me — — — valente medico — — guarire — entirely. ottimo* 7. In a very short time, he built one of the piccolo spazio di tempo far fare — — — most beautiful and rich palaces that had ever been — bello — * — palagio — — * — seen. 8. Being" already advanced in years, it happened that his — * d'annipieno avvenire — — renov^^n reached the ears of a young* g-entleman fama pervenire a — orecchio — named Mithridanes, of a country not far from chiamare Mitridanes paese non guari * a his. 9. You may see, about half a mile from hence, a — — — forse — — — vicin di qui — grove: there you may easily meet with him. boschetto * leggier cosavifia il trovare — 10. Then you did ill ; first to listen, and afterwards adunque(2) (3) (1) * ad ascoltare — * to covenant. — pattovire 11. Do not stain with so foul a blot, what you non vogliate guastare — sifatto macchia — — have gloriously acquired. — glorioso * — 12. After they had stayed some time with her, they poi che * stare * — — returned home. tornarsene * — 13. I will send him with you ; and he shall bring you to a — — — — — — — condu7're — in — place where you will meet with very parte * — albergare assai convenient accommodations. convenevole * 239 14. How far are we from our country? * di lungi (3) (^l) (2) * — contrade 15. When thou bast repeated certain words, two of the come * dire — — (4) (6) most beautiful young- ladies that thou ever sawest, (7) (8) (5) (9) (10) (12)* (11)* will come to thee. (1) (2) (3) 16. I saw you seat yourself there where you are. — porre — * * — — 17. You shall endeavour that he may come hither fare — (2) venirsene (4) * (3) to-morrow. *(i) 18. What is he doing- there (near you)? Why is he — * — — * perchc starsi — riot in his own place? (2) luogo(l) 19. There he bore his distress patiently. * comportare (A) (2) povertd (3) * (1) 20. Certainly my crime will be known ; but as for bene (^5) (1) peccato (2) * (3) sapere {4) — thine, be assured, unless thou tell it thyself, (3) (I) certoche(2) se — nondirai il* it never shall (be known). * (2) sapere * (1) 21. Having called Jeannot secretly fare (I) venir (4) GiannoUo(6) * (3) before him, he examined him particularly with dinarasi (5) * (2) — — pai^tito * reg-ard to his past life. di — ~ — 22. Weak as she was, she began to call first one, and cost debole — — — — — * — — then another, of her attendants. * — — — famiglia 23. He resolved to depart from thence without deliberare{Q) (7) partirsi (8) * (5) (I) touching any thing. (2) (3) (4) 240 24. She arose, and entered there, whence the gfoat had — levarsi — (2) * (1) * — cavriuola * come, and beheld two young kids. uscire — vedere vi — cavriuolo 25. Going- nearer to the girl, he began softly to comfort farsi^ — * — - giovane — piano "^ — — her, desiring her not to weep. — e pregare — * — piangere 26. These fellows have forced me in here to deceive * — fare — entrare — — — me ; for when I have given them every thing, — percib die come — * — — — — and am endeavouring to get out of the tomb, they — penare * ad uscir — — area — will run away. andarsi pe' fatti suoi 27. When you hear the little bells ring, come here. * udire"^ (2) * (3) (0 — * 28. If it please you to proceed (thither), I doubt not but — — — — venire * — — — * you will be much gratified at having been there. * contentissimo * — — * CHAP. XXVII. OF CONJUNCTIONS. I. 1. ^e io nonvado,io sard tutta If I do not go, 1 shall be ex sera aspettato. B. pected all the evening. 2. Se tu ti parti, io sensa al If thou departest, I shall in- cunfallo m' uccidero. B. fallibly kill myself. 3. Voglion vedere se V animo They are willing to try if thy tuo si muta da quello che soul will change from era, B. what it was. 4. Se egli vi dorrd troppo, vi If it give you too much pain,. lascero incontayicnte. B. I will immediately let you loose. I 241 A verb in the indicative mood, preceded by the con- junction if, is sometimes put in the present tense in Italian, and sometimes in the future. We use the pre- sent, either to express an action which, if performed, should happen in the present period of time, as in the first example; or to indicate, as in the second, an inci- dent which, through our wishes or fears, we represent to our imagination as imminent. In the third ex- ample, a trial of the character of a person already under examination, is spoken of; and therefore the verb miitare, is employed in the present. But when we speak either of an action to be performed at a future time, or of an event to come, as in the fourth example, without any counteracting circumstance, the verb ought then to be put in the future. II. 1. Se to potessi parlare al re, io gli darei un consiglio. B. 2. Se io faceva il dehito mio, guesto non mi interve- niva. F. 3. Se egli non si fosse bene attenuto, egli sarebhe in- fin nelfondo caduto. B. 4. Se tu ti aprivi meco, io ti erafedele allora. F. 5. Io volentieri, quando vi piacesse, mi starei, B. 6. II giovane disse che, dove esser potesse, egli non voleva esser veduto ne conosciuto. B. 7. Io mi sono r attemper ala, ne ho volutofare nt dire cosa alcuna. B. Could I speak to the king-, I would give him advice. If I had performed my duty, this would not have hap- pened. Had he not held fast, he would have fallen to the bottom. If you were then candid with me, I was faithful to you. I should willingly, if you please, remain as I am. The young man replied, that, if it were possible, he wished neither to be seen nor known. I kept my temper; nor would 1 do or say any thing. In English, the expressions, Could I speak, Should it I i 242 please God, Had he come, &c. are equivalent to the following : If I could speak, If it should please God, If he had come. In Italian, the former are used only in exclamations; in every other case, the latter are employed. If the verbs depending upon the conjunction se, ex- press a past time, we may either put them both in the imperfect of the indicative, as in the second example, or make use of the above-mentioned form, by employ- ing the subjunctive for the former verb, and the condi- tional for the latter, as in the third example. When the verbs depending on the conjunction se, denote actions which really happened, as in the fourth example, they must always be put in the imperfect of the indicative. This is invariably the case when after the conjunction if, the words, as it was indeed, may be supplied; for instance, if, as it was indeed, you were, &c. Observe, that the conjunction se, implies nel caso in che; the word quando, implies nel tempo in che; the adverb dove, where, nel luogo in che. By virtue of the analogy existing between a case, and the time and place in which it happens, these three forms may be substituted for one another ; and therefore the words quando and dove, may supply the conjunction se, as appears from the fifth and sixth examples ; with this difference, that the verbs depending on quando and dove, used in this sense, ought always to be put in the conjunctive. Hence arises the double denomina- tion of adverb and conjunction, sometimes applied to one word. As we have already observed in page 79, if any word implying a negative, be placed after the verb, the same verb must be preceded in Italian by the 243 particle tion, as in the case of the conjunction ne, which implies e non, as we perceive by the sixth example. With regard to this word, it is worthy of remark, that when the conjunctions or, and, are preceded by a ne- gative, as in the seventh example, they must be trans- lated in Italian by ne; because, in that instance, the two sentences being connected by virtue of the implied conjunction e (the office of which is to consolidate sentences into one continuous whole), they do not form an affirmative, as might erroneously be stated. In the last example we may with equal propriety say, E non Jio vobitofare ne dire. III. 1. Non c'era altra via che There was no other way but questa. D. this. 2. lo non fo altro die Jilare I do nothing but spin, night notte e di. B. and day. 3. Non fa alcuno che non There was no one but com- commendasse la sua no- mended her novel, vella. B. Whatever be the translation given by dictionaries, of the word hut, it has no other meaning than that of the conjunction ma. To support my assertion, T shall here analyze the above expressions — '* There was no other way but (there was only one, which is) this," Non cera ultra via (ma ce nera una sola) che (e) questa. " I do nothing else, night and day, but (I do this, that is) to spin,'' lo non fo altro notte e di (ma fo questo) che (e) filare. " There was nobody (who did not commend her novel), but every one commended her novel," Non fu alcuno che non commendasse la sua novella (ma ognuno la commendo). From this analysis we perceive that, in translating such sentences into Italian, in the first instance we understand the conjunction ma, and supply it with the conjunctive adjective che, under- ii2 244 stood in the English, as in the first and second exam- ples ; in the second case, we omit the whole affirma- tive proposition expressed in English, and, vice versa, we apply the negative expression, which the English understand, as in the third example. The simple rule is obtained as follows : When but is in opposition to one word only, as in the two former examples, way and nothing, that conjunction is translated by che; when it is in opposition to a whole sentence, as in the third, there ivas none who did not commend, it is trans- lated by che non, and the following verb is put in the conjunctive. Tn the former case, the conjunctive che must be preceded by altro. We say also, " Non c'era se non questa via; non faceva se non filare." IV. 1. Quando la non mi par esse Though I should not find her bella, me ne contenterei. beautiful, I would be con- F. tented. 2. PercM egli pure il volesse, Though he would, he could egli nol potrehbe ridire. not tell it. B. 3. Accio che intendiate come In order that you may know questo avvenuto mi sia, how it happened, I will brievemente vel faro make it plain to you in a chiaro. B. few words. The verb governed by the conjunctions, quando anche, quando ancora, quando bene, as well as quando and perche, used in the same sense, must always be put in the subjunctive. Almost every conjunction being formed by the ad- dition of the particle che, to one or two other words, as, affinche [a fine che], in order that; acciocche [a cid che], that ; benche [bene che], though ; poiche [poi che], since; purche [pure che], provided that; we will there- fore show, by the analysis of the following examples^ 245 taken from Boccaccio, that the word che is nothing more than the conjunctive adjective che, which. 1 . Sentendo gid che i solar raggi si riscaldavano, vei^so la loro stansa volsero i passi; When they felt that the heat grew intense, they retreated to their former sta- tion. — Analysis: Sentendo gid (questo) che (e) i solar raggi, &c. 2. Piu che altro uomo si potea contentare ; He could be more satisfied (with fortune) than any other man. — Analysis: Si potea contentare piu (in comparazione di quello) che (ogni) altro uomo (si pntesse contentare). 3,. Press per partito, che che avvenir ne dovesse, di rapir Cassandra; He resolved, happen what would, to bear away Cassandra. — Analysis : (Per) che (unque) \_quale unque, qualunque^ (cosa) che avvenir ne dovesse, &c. 4. Se io potessi parlare al re, e' mi da it cuore che io gli darei un consiglio, per Io quale egli vincerehbe la guerra sua ; Could 1 speak to the king-, I dare say that I could g-ive him such counsel as would assure him of victory. — _ Analysis : II cuore mi del (laforza di dirgli questo) che (e) io gli darei un consiglio, &c. $. Quando la giovane it vide, presso fu che di letizia non morl ; As soon as the young* lady saw him, she was almost overcome with joy. — Analysis: Presso fu (al punto in) che (per eccesso) di letizia (morisse, ma) non mori, 6. Poiche cost e, che Pietro tu non sai, tu dimorerai qui meco; As it happens that you know not where Peter is, you shall abide with me. — Analysis: Poiche cosi e, (intendo di dire questo) che (^) tu non sai (dove sia) Pietro, &c. 7. Non suole essere usansa che, andando verso la state, le nottisi vadan rinfrescando ; The nights are not used to grow cooler, the more the summer advances. — Analysis: Non suole essere (qucsla) usansa che (e) le notti, &c. 246 1. Quantunque cessata sia la Though my suffering's have pena, non per cid e la ceased, 1 have not lost memoria fuggita de' be- remembrance of the kind- neficj ricevuti. B. nesses 1 have received. 2. Convenne che tuttoilgiorno All that day he v^as kept so, cost fosse tenuto, accib that every one might see che da tutti potesse esser and visit him. veduto e visitato. B. 3. Poichb voi di questo mi Since you make me easy in fate sicuro, e to il vi this, 1 will speak out. dird. B. 4. Non dite leggier cosa, che Do not call it a small matter ; la Domenica t troppo da Sunday is a day much to onorare, B. be reverenced. According to the first and second examples, a verb depending upon those conjunctions which imply doubt, as, quantunque, benche, comeche, ancora che, although; — those signifying purpose, as, accio che, affinche, si che, in order that; purche, provided that; — or uncer- tainty, as, prima che, before ; infino a che, till, &c. must be put in the conjunctive mood, for the reasons adduced in Chapter XXIII. Conjunctions denoting certainty, as, poiche, since ; percio che, for, lite those of the third and fourth examples, do not require the subjunctive. Benche and sebbene, although, govern sometimes the indicative. In the fourth example, the words per cid are understood before cfie, where it is to be remarked, that the conjunction for, corresponding with the Italian per cid che, is often omitted. It must then be supplied in Italian. 247 VI. 1. Vi prego che voi f acetate I be^ you would take care ch' egli a me vegna. B. that it may be broug-ht to me. 2. Tornando addietro coman- Turning- back, he ordered the do che la camera fosse room to be shut ag-ain. serrata. B. Sometimes the conjunctive adjective that, is under- stood in English, as in the first example, after the verb beg; in which case it must be supplied in Italian after those verbs which, as stated in Chapter XXIII. require the subjunctive mood. When, in English, such a verb is followed by another in the infinitive, as, in the second example, the verb ordered is fol- lowed by the infinitive to be, if the conjunction che is supplied in the Exercises under the preposition to, the verb depending upon it ought to be put in the sub- junctive. On the contrary, when a is under that, followed by a verb in the subjunctive, that verb must be in the infinitive in Italian, for the reason given in the last section of the same Chapter XXIII. VII. l.Chialloravedutigliavesse, Whoever had seen them at malagevolmente avrehhe that time, could scarcely potuto conoscere chi piu know whether there was si fosse morto, a V arci- more life in one than in vescovo egli. B. the other. 2. II comincid a domandare He asked him whether he se egli mai avesse pec- had ever sinned, cato, B. It is sufficient to remark, in the first example, that the Italians repeat the conjunction o, when they put two objects or persons in opposition in that manner. From the second, we perceive that the conjunction whether is rendered by se. 24S CHAP. XXVIII. OF INTERJECTIONS. 1. Oimb, malvagio uomo ! tu O, thou wicked man! thou m' hai diserto! B. hast undone me ! 2. Deh! pud egli essere! B. Oh ! is it possible ! 3. Deh! fallo, se ti cat di If thou hast any reg-ard for me! B. me, pray, do ! The personal noun, referring to the person whom we sometimes address in exclamations, although ex- pressed in English, as in the first example, is never translated in Italian. The word deh is sometimes used as a sign of wonder, as in the second example, and is occasionally em- ployed to excite pity, or, as an entreaty, to obtain favor, as in the third example. In the latter case, it is almost equivalent to the English word pray. 11. 1. Cost non fossi io mai in Would to God I had never questa terra venuto! B. come into this country! 2. Oimhl misera me! a cui Alas I miserable! whom have ho io portato amore! B. I loved ! 3. Felice te! che si parli a How happy art thou, who tua postal D. canst speak so freely ! The comparative particle cost, when used in excla- mation, presents one of the most difficult idioms of our language, and which the student will be able to comprehend only by analysis. The particle cost, and its dependent proposition, constitute, in such instances, the second part of a comparison, which we express in 249 support of a preceding assertion; and the first part of the comparison is omitted. Tn the first example, the assertion of the speaker is, that it was the first time he came into the country, where he met with an un- pleasant accident ; and therefore the entire construc- tion is, (Come e vero die io non ci fid piu che questa volta) cost (veramente, vorrei eke J non fossi io mai in questa terra venuto! Thus, in the following example from Boccaccio — Vedi hel ciottolo; cost giugnesse egli nelle rent a Calandrino: You see the fine pebble 3 I would it could reach the back of Calandrino — the first part of the comparison is. Come ^ vero che egli ^ hello. The entire construction of the expressions of the scond and third examples are, (Io chiamo) me misera; (Io chiamo) te felice; in which we see that the per- sonal nouns, me, te, represent the object of the verb understood, The other interjections, given in the following table, are not subject to any difference of syntax from the English. Ah I - ahl Eia! - well! Ahi! - ah! Hui! - ah! oh! Ahime! - alas 1 Oh! _ oh! Ahi, lasso! - alas 1 Oh! oh! - - oh! oh! Deh ! - hat pray! Oibd! - fie! Dohl - oh! Oime! - alas! El - ah! Pu! - fie! Eh! - ah! Uh! - ah! Ehi! - ah! Kk 250 WORDS USED AS INTERJECTIONS. bravo ! Bravo t bravi! l Brava! brave! S Buonol - - right! Guai ! - - woe to ! Guar da! - take care! Ola ! - - oh, there ! Orsu ! Sta! Su! Via! Viva ! Zitto! well! hush! come on I well, g-o, gol huzza ! silence ! EXERCISE XXII. UPON THE TWO PRECEDING CHAPTERS. 1. If I knew how to behave as well as you have sapere* operare{Z) (1) (2) — — — done, 1 should accept, without too much deliberation, sapere — prendere — — — what you offer me. — a — — 2. Thoug-h you see me here a scholar of no account, I quantunque — * — — — — assai umile — am not descended from the dreg-s of the people. nascere — — feccia — — popolasso 3. If I reach Rome, I shall recover her who is pervenire * a — — riavere * — — mine by rig^ht. (2) meritamente (V) 4. Ah! go, go; oh! do men such things? deh andare — — cosifatto 5. Alas ! in how little time have I lost a sister ? * — come piccol — — — — 6. If you approve of my advice, I will keep the crown — — * — consiglio — servarsi — — till to-morrow morning; but if you should per infino — — ove — resolve otherwise, I have already before my eyes deliberare* — — — — pronto whom I must crown with it. * — debba — ne 251 7. If the laws which regard the g-ood of the community quando — — — (4) (1) (2) comune{Z) did not teach us this, nature plainly shows — ammaestrare* — a — — aperto* — it. il 8. What would you have said, had you seen me at Bologna ? 9. Ah! traitors! you are dead men ! it shall never be * — — — — ella non andare so ; what violence is this ? — — forsa — — 10. Alas! what is the cause of your grief? Pray, tell deh — — — cagione — — dolore * dire me, my life. — Zo(2) anima(\) 11. Had I this money, I would instantly lend it * denari — incontanente (4) (3) (2) to you. (0 12. If you find it as I tell you, I beg you will not — cost *0 — — volere — torture me at the instance of these wicked men. straziare — — — malvasio — 13. Get up, sluggard ; for if thou wishedst to sleep, levare — dormiglione che — — volere * dormire thou shouldst have gone home, and not come here. — doversene * andare a casa tua — — — — 14. Alas ! quoth the lady, then you have been in want * disse — donna dunque — — patire disagio of money ? — denari 15. Do you stay here with him: I wish to go and — vi rimanete — — — e — volere — * see what the doctor will say, and bring him sapere — — medico — — * menare(4) (5) here, if there be occasion, a (6) (1) *(3) bisogno(2) Kk2 252 16. Pray, my friend, go there, and let me know * (2) compagno(^l) — vi — sapere — dire how the fact stands. — C^) (3) (1) 17. Ah! thou wicked man! then thou hast thought * * malvagio — dunque (3) (1) (2) credere that I would do such a thing to my lord ? — — volere — questo — fallo — signore 18. I have here two hundred pounds, with which I — — — — — lira di — — intended to buy an estate : if they are all necessary, volere — — podere — tuttif bisognare * take them. tutti togliere(2) (1) 19. If you take pity on me, you will afford me ove — volere* aver e — di — — dare — very great comfort. * consolasione 20. Thououghtest not to have begun, if thou wouldest not — dovere — cominciare * — volere * — finish. 21. Oh! prodigious generosity of Nathan! how wonderful * liberalitd — Natan — (3) thou art ! (2) (I) 22. Ah ! miserable man ! where, and on what object, dost" * misero * — in — thou fix thy heart, thy affection, and thy hope ? — porre * animo — amore — — — 23. If you inquire any more about it, we will give you domandare* — ne — fare — such an answer as you deserve. quell — — * vi si conviene 24. Since you find yourself well, it is time for you to poiche — sentire — — — — che quit the infirmary. uscire di • — t In this case, the masculine termination i, agrees with the word denarif ^inderstoodp 253 25. Thoug-h she was a poor woman, yet she was ancora che *(3) (1) femmina(2) pure — wise and prudent. ^avio — avveduto 26. Would they be already willing- to come ! for indeed (2) (\) — disposto — — * veramente we mig-ht say that fortune is with us. — potere — — * favor eggiante (2) (1) 27. Why dost thou not answer, thou villain? Why dost che — — * reo uomo — thou not say something-? Art thou struck dumb — — — — — diventare mutolo with hearing- me ? udire — 28. If he does not desist^ I will acquaint my — rimanersene* — * dire — husband and my brothers. - -(2) (1) 29. There is not a neighbour but wonders and makes — — * maravigliarsi — farsi a jest of me, for all the labour I undergo. heffe — — di tanto fatica * — durare 30. He then, laug-hing- at me, said, " Go, thou fool ! — allora farsi heffe * — — — * sciocco do not be afraid ; here they do not charg-e any thing- — duhitare * — * — tener — conto for it;'" which gave me some comfort. * — — rassicurare (3) (2) alquanto (1) :31. If you call to mind your past life, and my resolution, — — ricordarsi * di — — — — — , dure^sa I doubt not but you will wonder at my presumption, — — — • * — maravigliarsi * — — 254 CHAP. XXIX. RESPECTING THOSE IDIOMS and IRREGULA.RIT1ES WHICH ARE MOST FREQUENT IN ITALIAN. 1. Togliete qual piu vi place. B. 2. Poi die ilforestiere ha be- vuto quello che glipiace, la sposa bee il rimanente. B. 3. GV increbbe di cib chefatto avea, B. 4. Mi displace d' avervelo a dire. F. Take which you like the best. After the stranger has drunk what he pleases, the bride drinks the rest. He was grieved for what he had done. I am sorry that I must ac- quaint you with it. From the lirst example it is to be remarked, that the verb to like, when applied to things, is generally rendered by piacere; and from the second, that the thing pleasing, which is the object in English, becomes the subject in Italian; a3 also that the person who is pleased is the subject in English, but represents the relation of tendency in Italian. From the same differ- ence of construction, the two subjects, I and he, of the third and fourth examples^ are changed into rela- tions of tendency in Italian. The following verbs and expressions are subject to the same rule : Riuscire, ) . , Blsos:nare, 1 to be neceS" rr • /. XX ? to succeed. T-. J' Vemrfatto, ) oi^^v^cc.*. jEsserJorza Aggradare, 1 to please. Convenire Esser a grado, > to like. Gravare, Essei^ caro, J to be glad of. Esser a noia, 1 to tire. Esser grave, Venire a noia, 3 to weary. r to think, in the Parere, ■? signification t of to judge. ?, 1 to be n ta, > sary. , jiohQ obli obliged. to be concern- ed at. to be displease ed with. 255 II. 1. Piove tuttavia. B. It rains still. 2. Era il di davanti nevicato A great snow had fallen the forte. B. day before. There are some verbs denoting state, which may represent a proposition, without the assistance of any other word; the subject being confined to, and implied in the verb itself. Such are the two verbs in the above examples, piovere and nevicare, with some others: as, tonare, to thunder ; lampeggiare, to lighten -, accadere, avvenire, to happen, &c. In these instances, the sub- ject is confined within the verb, because the expres- sions, piove, nevica, avviene, and accade, are equivalent to pioggia cade, neve cade, una cosa viene a, una cosa cade a; and, therefore, when the pronoun it, which is generally understood, is expressed in Italian, it refers to the subject implied in the verb. The only differ- ence to be remarked in these verbs is — 1. That their auxiliary in Italian must always be essere, as appears from the second example, although many Italians erro- neously make use of avere; — 2. That we cannot make a person represent the subject of accadere and awe- nire, as in English; for instance, "If I happen to meet him, you have no occasion to tell it;" in which case we employ the other form, '*If it happen;" Se egli avviene; It does not happen; or. There is no occasion for you, &c. Non accade che vol lo diciate. III. 1. Tu hai V arsura (sete) Thou art thirsty, and hast the e 'I capo che ti duole. D. head-ache. 2. L'una parte e Vallra Both parties will wish to have avranno fame di te» D. thee. 3. Di che avete paura? F. What are you afraid of? There are in these examples, two idioms to be noticed. The first, that, to express either the state 256 or want of the body, the English employ the verb to he, with an adjective ; Italians, the verb avere, with a substantive; thus— aver sete, to be thirsty; aver fame, to be hungry ; aver freddo, to be cold ; aver caldo, to be warm; aver paura, to be afraid, &c.; excepting to be angry, which is rendered literally by esser adirato. — The second, that, when some part of the body labours under pain, we use the verb dolere, causing that part to represent the subject, and the sufferer the relation of tendency ; namely. Mi duole la testa, I have the head-ache; Mi dolgono i denti, I have the tooth-ache; Mi dolgono le ossa, My bones ache. IV. 1. Daman sinistra n' app art From the left hand a troop una gente d' anime, che of spirits appeared, that movienoipie' vernoi. J). moved their feet towards us. ^ 2. Ancora era quel popol di Still were those people far, lontano, quando si strin- v/hen they started back sertuttia' durimassi.D. all together by the hard rocl^(1) — * — — — — — husband." 23. The head /of a comforters never aches. (4) capo (5) \* — — ^(1) non (2) (3) 24. If I can succeed so far as to be able to deter him from fare (2) *(i) * * * togliere — — this foolishness, it will be well; if I cannot, I — hestialitd stare (2) (1) * — shall give you leave to do as you do — licensa — — quello che — shall think most proper. giudicare che essere henfatto 25. If you were a scholar, you should repeat some — — — — letterato * convenire dire certo prayers which I would give you in writing ; but as orazione — — '- — scritto — perchb you are not, you must say three hundred pater nosters — — — * converra — — — — — with three hundred ave marias. M m 266 CHAP. XXX. UPON THE IMPERFECT AND PERFECT TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD. According to what I have remarked in the daily course of giving lessons, the English (as they express the perfect and imperfect tenses with the same form of the verb) find so much difficulty in the application of those two tenses in Italian, that to return to this subject, although it has been treated of in two other Chapters, will be of no little utility to the scholar. The variety of circumstances w^hich may represent the action as continued or finished, repeated or not repeated, and the time determined or not determined, constitute the principal difficulty. I shall, therefore, at every example produced, give the reason for the verb being in the perfect or imperfect. This will prepare the student for the promiscuous Exercises which are to be found at the end of this Grammar. I.Una poverafemminetta per By chance a poor woman was Ventura suoi stovigli con scouring her dishes with la rena e con I'acqua salt water and sand. salsa lavava. B. 2. Sempre che presso gli ve- "Whenever it came near him, niva, quanto potea, con he would endeavour to mano la lontanava. B, put it by with his hand. These are the only instances wherein the imperfect is distinguished in English from the perfect, by a dif- ferent form of the verb. The first consists in applying the auxiliary to he, to a verb in the present participle, as in the first example ; the second, by employing the 267 auxiliary vjould, and the infinitive, as in the second example, wherein that auxiliary is not meant to ex- press either the conditional or the subjunctive mood^ but the imperfect of the indicative. Let, however, the student distinguish this imperfect from those two moods, which are likewise indicated by would. In the present case, the auxiliary and the infinitive may be supplied by the form of the preterite, as above ; endeavoured, may supply would endeavour ; in the other case they cannot. II. Vedendoci calar, ciascun ri- Seeing* us descend, all stop- stette. D. ped. The verb ristette is here in the perfect, because it expresses the act of an instant, and whicli cannot be continued. That verb could be put in the imper- fect, only in case of the action being repeated an undetermined number of times; for instance, When- ever they saw us descend, they stopped, Ogni qual volta ci vedevano, ristavano. III. Quando il figliuolo piangea. When her child cried, she vi facea/ar le grida. D. used to cause a great noise to be made. The author relates that Ehea, wife of Saturn, used to have a great noise made when Jupiter, her infant son, cried, in order that Saturn might not hear it. Then the verbs piangere and fare are in the imper- fect 5 because the two actions which they express were repeated : they might be in the perfect, if the time were determined, as in the following example : Tre giorni il pianse, e tre giorni in vano il chiamb; She lamented and called him during three days. M m 2 268 IV. 1. Ma quell' altro magnani' But the other mag-nanimous mo, a cui posta restato spirit, for whose sake I m'era, non muto aspetto. had stopped, did not chang^e countenance. 2. Aveva i circostanti vicini He had assembled his neigh- raccoUi nella propria hours in his own house. casa. B. Remark, that whenever the preterite (which term comprehends both the perfect and imperfect) is com- pounded, namely, when the participle past is attended with the auxiliary had, as in the above examples, had stopped, had assembled, the auxiliary is always put in the imperfect, unless it be preceded either by the adverbs after or when ; as, for instance, Quando, or Poi che ebbe detto cib, &c. When, or after he had said that, &c. The negative expression of the verb mutare, being determined, and represented as finished, it is therefore in the perfect; I mean, that the action ex- pressed by the verb mutare, is determined by the words understood. Per tutto il tempo che io mera ristato. Had the author written, Non mutava, he would then have meant, that his trial upon the person spoken of, was still working in his mind at the moment referred to. By the perfect, he only acquaints the reader that the spirit had not changed countenance ; by the im- perfect, he would also convey a lively idea of his standing before the spirit, and admiring His intrepidity. V. Cost Vanimo mio, che ancor Thus my soul, which still fuggi\a,si\o\seindietro. flew, turned. D. Dante relates, that he had succeeded in getting out of the dangerous forest; but the danger had worked so 269 much upon his imagination, that although his body had stopped, his soul was still flying. The verb fug- gire is therefore in the imperfect, to denote the actual state of the soul ; the modification of the adverb still, proves the continuation of that action ; on the contrary, the action indicated by the verb volgere^ is instantaneous, and is, for that reason, expressed in the perfect. VI. Questisciaurati, che mai non These wretches, who never fur vivi, erano ignudi. were alive, were naked. Dante here means, that those wretches were never alive, viz. such as were useless while in the world. The verb essere is in the perfect, in the first instance, because of the adverb mai, which determines the length of time. Fur is an abbreviation oifurono. In the second instance, essere is in the imperfect, to indi- cate that to be naked, was customary and continual with that people. VII. 1. Euripilo ebbe nome. D. He was called Euripilo. 2. Uomini fummo, ed or sem We were men ; now we are fatti sterpi. D. changed into bushes. 3. Dille chi tu fosti. D. Tell her who thou wast. When speaking of the dead, and of their qualities, we make use of the perfect; the time being deter- mined by the implied words, the ivhole life, and the state of being passed and finished. Dante (Inferno, Canto X.), saying to a spirit, ro7\se cui Guido vostro ebbe a disdegno. Whom perhaps your son Guido had in contempt; on account only of the perfect, ebbe, the spirit thinks his son is dead, and replies. Come dicesti, egli ebbe; non viv' egli ancora? What didst thou say. 270 he had ; does he not live still ? We might use the imperfect in the above sentences, if we spoke of per- sons alive, who had changed either name or state, as in Gelli's Dialogues between Ulysses and the Greeks changed into animals : Colui era medico, He was a physician ; Sarei io mat ritornato uomo come gid, era ? Am I transformed again into man as I was? But when we mention the manners and customs of the dead (not qualities, as mentioned above), we must employ the imperfect ; as, for instance, QuelV altra faceva, My other wife used to do ; QuelV altra diceva, She used to say ; Ella si contentava d'ogni cosa, She was always satisfied with every thing. VIII. Tenevamo il colmo, qucindo We were at the upper part ristemmo,. when we stopped. As the station that the individuals now speaking, had attained, was continuous, and the time during which they kept it not being determined, the verb tenere, ought therefore to be in the imperfect; whereas, the act of stopping being instantaneous, the verb ristare is employed in the perfect. IX. 1. Piu volte gid per dir le Several times already I open- lahhra apersi. P. ed my mouth to speak. 2. Dl e notte andava ricer- I went searching day and cando. P. night. 3. Cost lungo Vamate rive Thus I went along the be- andai. P. loved banks. Although the action expressed by the verb aprire, in the first example, is repeated, the time being deter- mined by the words, piu volte, the verb is on that account put in the perfect. Very often the literal expression of the English may 271 denote an action, either as proceeding at the time referred to, or represented as finished, as in the two last examples. Then the application of the tense, in Italian, depends upon circumstances, and upon what we intend to express. In the second example, Petrarch represents himself as in motion, and going to search 3 on account of which intention, he uses the imperfect. In the third exam- ple, he relates what he had performed and finished; to determine which, he employs the perfect. EXERCISE XXIV. 1. We found King Charles so grateful to us, that he has — * — — — — verso di — — — made up to us, in part, the losses we had sustained ristorare — — danno * — * ricevere on his account. 2. After he had opened the little door, and the smoke poi che — * — — (uolo) uscio — (4) (5) was a little dispersed, looking w^ithin, he saw him * (2) (3) sfogare (1) — _ * * who had sneezed, and still did so ; the sulphur — *(2) (1) — ancora starnutire'^ (3) (4) provoking- him to it. st7'ingere(5) (6) (I) (2) 3. He had not been long- waiting-, before Ruberto came, and — * — — guari — che — * — pulled the thread as usual. tirare * — spago — essere * usato 4. Hannibal was more acceptable to King- Antiochus, than Annibale * — accetto — (2) Antwco(^l) — he had been to his Carthaginians. *(5) (4) (I) (2) Cartaginese(S) 272 Already had the sun with its lig-ht brought the new — * _ _ (2) (3) (4) recare(l) day, and the birds upon the blooming branches — — — — su per — verde ramo (attested it\ /with their merry dare * tesLimoniansa ne/(2) \cantando piacevoli song's,'^ when the ladies and the three gentlemen, versi^Q) — — — — — — giovane arising, went into the garden. levarsi * entrarsene (4) (1) (2) (3) 6. The monk, who had made pretence of going to the — — — * — semhiante — — — — wood, having concealed himself in the dormitory, saw — * occultare — — * the abbot enter his chamber alone. — - - (2) (3) (1) 7. Saladin perceived that he had been able to escape — conoscere costui * sapere uscir * the net which he had spread for him, and — laccio — * tendere davanti * — therefore told him what he had designed to — aprire * — — * avere in animo — do, had he not thus answered with discretion. — *(4) (3) (1) (5) discretamente (2) 8. The abbot, after he had waited some time, — — poi die *(2) stare (3) alquanto(l) ordered one of his servants to see comandare * — — — famigliare die riguardare* whether the fellow was gone. — costui — partire 9. One day, being very near the chamber where he — giorno assai vicini * — — * — lay, they began to have some talk together giacere* (5)'*' (6) ragionare(J)seco{l)medesimi{2) about it. *(3)(4) 273 10. When he had taken some refreshment, he begged come — * mangiare (2) alquanto ( 1 ) pregare that she would be so kind as to relate to him what — ^ piacere — narrare — — — was the reason for such a solitary life. * — cagione * tanto — — 11. Some always called him a poet, some a philosopher, alcuni (2) *(1) — — — alcuni — — and many a theologian, during his life. — — — — mentre die vivere * 12. He became very familiar with Virgil, Horace, Ovid, and *(2) »(])__ _ _ _ Statius. Sta^io 13. Rinaldo 's servant, like a coward, seeing his master — — /ante come — cattivo — — signore attacked, did not offer him any assistance ; but, assalire adoperare(p)per(Z)(ji){y) cosa (2) — turning his horse, never stopped till he volgere * * — non ritenersi * di correre si came to castle Guglielmo, where, without giving esser^e * a castel — e in quello — — himself any farther trouble, he took up his lodging. — altro impaccio alter gave* 14. From thence the two knights went to England, where - (2) (3) (4) (1) • • - they prevailed so far with the king, that he restored adoperare(^b)^ {\) (2) (3) (4) rendere* her to his favour, and received her and his son-in-law * — gra:sia — * (8) (4) (5) (6) (7) with all possible demonstrations of joy. (1) grandissima (2) festa (3) 15. There, finding himself in safety, he opened his quivi parere * esser sicuro sciogliere * — little sack ; and now examining more narrowly into it sacchetto — cercare* conpiudiligenzaognicasa than he had done before, he found so many valuable — **(3) (2) prima {\) * — esifatto jewels, that, rating them at a reasonable price, he pietra — vendere — convenevol pregio — was twice richer than when he had left home. * il doppio * — — * partirsi — N n 274 16. When I was grown up^ my mother, who was a v'ldh — — * crescere — — — * — — lady, married me to one of the Gergenti 's, a — dar per moglie — — — — — worthy gentleman, who, out of regard to my gentile uomo e da bene — per amor di — mother and me, came and lived at Palermo. — — — venirsene * * stare * — 17. Every morning, about the time that he supposed they — — insuVora — — avvisare^ * — would come that way, he would order a bucket full dovere passare * — secchia — of fresh water to be brought (to him), and a decanter — (^) (0 * portare * orcioletto of wine, with a couple of glasses. — — — due bicchieri 18. There was this custom, that, in divers parts of the town, — * — usansa — — — luogo — — the gentlemen in the neighbourhood would meet — gentiluomo * — contrade ragunarsi * together, and form a society, consisting of a — — fare * — brigata — — certain number of persons, taking care to admit only — — — — guardare — mettervi such as were able to bear the expence of it. tali * potere * * sopportar — spese 19. Because I made him a copy of this work, and of some percid che — * — — — — — — chapters of the Caprezio in Italian, which he had — — — — — volgare — — * been long searching, he let me partake of his andare lungo * — — fare * — partecipe relics. 20. Art thou not the worthy man who took that gown — — — quel valente — — togliere * * vesta from the lady, and gave it to thy wife ? a — signora — * — — — — 275 21. They fell sick daily, by thousands. in/ermare*(5) joer(3) g'iorno(4) *(1) * (2) 22. Eg-ano, perceiving them to be awake, and hearing- them — sentire — desto — udire — talk together about him, endeavoured several ragionare(4) (1) * (2) (3) tentare* — times to draw his hand away to escape ; but — — tirare * (3) (4) a(l) se(2) — andamene — they held him so fast, that he could not. — tenere — — forte — — si — — partire 23. Running to the coop, and turning it up, he saw * — — cesta —levare*(2)*(l) * the youth, who, besides the pain he had suffered, — giovinetto — oltre a — dolore * * — was frightened to death, lest he should do him tutto di paura tremare * — * — — some mischief. — male 24. There, gathering some straw which was lying — raunare * alquanto * pagliericcio — (3)*«?'(2) about, /he sat down \ thereon, all pensive vicin(l) \ porsi * a stare' (5) *(1) O tristo(2) and sad, complaining to Saint Julian, telling (3) dolente (4) dolersi — — Giuliano — him, that this was not according to the confidence he — * — * di — fede * — had in him. Nn2 27(5 CHAP. XXXL ORTHOGRAPHY. OF ACCENT , Pietade, Pietate, " > pietd. pity. Gioventude, Gioventute, ' > gioventu, - youth. Piede, - pib, - - foot. Cantoe, - canto, he sung". Perdeo, - perde. he lost. Ferio, - - feri, he wounded, The Italians have one accent ( ' ), which they place upon the last vowel of the words from which one or more letters have been cut off, as appears from the above. OF THE APOSTROPHE. X La anima, I. - V anima, - the soul. La eresia. - V eresia. the heresy. Lo onore. - V onore. the honour. La insegna, C V insegna, \ la 'nsegna. > the ensig-n. Che io, - ch' io. that I. Ti invito. - f invito, I invite thee. Quello onore, - quell' onore, that honour. Tra il po^so e 1 la ripa, tra H po^zo, between the well and the shore. The apostrophe supplies the place of the vowel cut off from a word followed by one commencing with a vowel. 277 The fourth example is given to show the student that, with regard to the words beginning with the syl- lable in, the ancients used sometimes to cut off the initial letter of the latter word, instead of the last of the former. The elision of the i from the word il, employed either as an article or as a pronoun, preceded by a word which ends in £t vowel, is still used. II. Perd to, Savio amico, Levo alto il pie, PerM iot - perch' io La verita e, - - Andd a corte, II mio amore, Miei amid, Gli onori, Gil anni, Gli infermi, gV infermi therefore L wise friend. he lifted his foot. therefore I. the truth is. he went to the court. my love. my friends. the honours. the years. the patients. The above examples show, that an accented vowel does not admit of elision, except in the conjunctions to which the particle che is annexed; as poiche, acciocch^, percM, &c.; — 2. That likewise words ending in two vowels, cannot be shortened;— 3. That the i of the word gli, can be cut off only before a word beginning with i. III. Felice alma, Lacci antichi happy soul, ancient snares. The final e, in those words which end in ce and ge, can be cut off only before a following e; and the i of those words ending in ci and gi, suffers elision only before a word beginning with i. 278 Egli ha henefatto, Vedi hello ciottolo, Mi sogliono fare motto, Facevano vista di marav igliaresi, OF RETRENCHMENT. I. egli ha henfatto. vedi hel ciottolo. mi soglion motto. facevan vista di maraviscliarsi. He has done well. See the fine pebble. They usually speak to me. They pretended to be astonished. We call retrenchment, the suppression of one or more vowels or syllables in a word followed by an- other beginning with a consonant. The vowels e and o admit of retrenchment when pre- ceded by I, m, n, r, except in some adjectives ending in ro; as chiaro, light; nero, black. IT. Fanciullo piccolino, fanciul piccolino, little boy. Biondo capello, biondo capel. fair hair. Capelli, capei, hair. From the words ending in Uo, the last syllable, and in the plural, the two U's may be cut oiF. Buona compagnia Ora voglio, Allora gridb, III. or voglio, allor gridd, good company, now I wish, then he screamed. The words ending in a, except ora, when employed as an adverb, and such as are compounded with it, as allora, then; ancora, still, &c. do not admit of re- trenchment. Uno anno, un anno, a year. Una santo. un santo. a saint. Uno sciocco, — a fool. 279 Una donna, — a woman. Una anima, un' anima, a soul. Grande vaso, gran vaso, large vase. Grande onore, grand' onore, great honour. Grande scoglio, — - large rock. Grande pietra, gran pietra, large stone. Grandi pietre, gran pietre, large stones. Santo Paolo, San Paolo, Saint Paul. Santo Antonio, Sanf Antonio^ Saint Anthony. Santo Stefano, — Saint Stephen. Santa Anna, Sanf Anna, Saint Ann. Santa Maria, — Saint Mary. Quello specchio, ihsit glass. Quegli specchi, those glasses. Quell' uomo, that man. Quegli uomini, those men. Quell' ingrato, that ingrate. Quegli ingrati, those ingrates. Quel corpo, that body. Quel, or que' carpi, those bodies. Quell' arme, that weapon. Quelle,ov quelUarmi, those weapons. Such is the use of the elisions and retrenchments to which these adjectives are subject. The words, alcuno, niuno, nessuno, veruno, &c. are subject to the same variations as the word uno, 1. Togli, - - to'. - take. Meglio, I Mez^o, ) - me'. _ ( better. ' ( middle. Vedi, ' ve\ - see. Set, - se'. - thou art, Egli, \ Eglino, 5 Poco, - e', ei, - po', 5 he. ' i they. - little. These, and several others, are the principal words which have been most altered by retrenchment. 280 ^^ ,'^■1^' 2. # 1. lo ho avuto il maggior I had the greatest pleasure diletto che mat uomo that man ever had. avesse. B. 2. Chi mat ti vuol, mat ti He who wishes ill to you, sogna. B. thinks of it in his dreams. 3. Non sopercht tu mi abbi I do not know why you use afar questo, B. me in such a manner. 4. Ben ti dico. B. I assure you, 5. lo sapeva bene che tu do- I really thought what you vevi dir cost. B. would say^ 6. L'amor mio, B. 7. II mio amove* B. My love. There are no positive rules by which we learn the instances wherein retrenchment is proper or necessary, to give the requisite harmony to a sentence. A good taste, acquired by the perusal of the best authors, will alone enable the student to make a judicious use of the elision. It is indeed obvious, that all the above sen- tences written without retrenchment, would displease an ear well organized, as may be seen from the se- cond, if thus written : Chi male ti vnole, male ti sogna. As appears from the last example, words are usually written without retrenchment at the end of a sentence. IV. OF THE INCREASE OF WORDS. 1. Con stampa, con istampa, with a stamp. In Spagna, in Ispagna, into Spain. Per sdegno, per isdegno, for disdain. Our pronunciation, generally, does not allow of one word ending with a consonant, meeting with one be- ginning with s, followed by another consonant. In 281 such cases we add an i to the second word, saying. Con istampa, hi Ispagna, &c. instead of Con stampa. In Spagna. 2. A Andreuccio, ad Andreuccio, to Andrew. E egli, ed egli, and he. The letter d is occasionally added to the preposition a, and the conjunction e, when it may be favourable to harmony, especially if followed by a similar letter. 1. Per non spendere. B. In order not to spend. 2. L'arte del ben scrivere. The art of writing- well. These examples, which are contrary to the principle above-mentioned, show that grammar is, in such in- stances, subjected to the sense, and alFord another principle, that the meeting of three consonants is not to be avoided, either when, by adding the vowel i, we soften an expression which, by virtue of the sense, would require to be pronounced harshly, as in the first example ; or when, by that addition, we should de- stroy the harmony, as in the second. OF IRREGULAR VERBS. FIRST CONJUGATION. Many persons, both Italians and foreigners, affirm, that the greatest difficulty of the Italian language, consists in the irregularity of its verbs ; because, in most Grammars, they find one half of the book filled with conjugations of verbs, and the other half, with o o 282 words haviog no connet;tion, or with dull dialogues* The true difficulties are not, however, pointed out. When the student has perused all the rules which are diffused through the following six pages, he will be convinced that the irregularities are considerably reduced; and simply by the mechanism of writing the irregular verbs, and supplying such forms as may be collected by aid of the said rules, he will no sooner have arrived at the end, than he will find himself in full possession of this arduous science. These irregularities appear numberless in other Gram- mars, because they are not properly presented to the eye of the student, but are all conjugated one after another, without any attempt at simplification. The first conjugation has only four irregular verbs : andare, to go ; dare, to give , fare, to do ; stare, to stay. Andare, to go. Andando, going. Andato, gone. Yo, or vado, I go; vai, va, andiamo, andate, vanno, Andava, I went, &c. Andai, I went, &c.t Andro, I will go, &c. Andrei, I would go, &c. Va% go; vada, f All those verbs, the action of which is confined within the agent, and also those denoting state of being, are conjugated in Italian with the auxi- liary essere. Such verbs may be distinguished from others, by their not admitting of the object ; so that when a verb suffers neither the word some- thing, nor a person, after it, as, for instance, the verb andare, — (we can- not say, "Togo something. To go a person,") — then the auxiliary must be essere; i.e. lo sono andato, I am gone; Sono vissiito, 1 have lived. In that case, the termination of the participle past agrees, in gender and num- ber, with the subject; namely, lo sono andato, or andata; Not siamo an- dati, or andate. Although the verbs parere, to appear ; valere, to be worth ; piacere, to please ; do not refuse the two words above-mentioned, they are not used with these verbs in the quality of an object. Those words, after parere and valere, represent a second subject ; after piacere, the rela- tion of tendency. The student, in writing the following verbs, must alwaya supply the first person of both genders and numbers of a compound tense. 283 andiamo, andate, vadano. Che vada, that I may go, &c.t Che andassi, that I should go, &c. Dare, to give. Dando, giving. Dato, given. Bo, I give; dai, da, diamo, date, danno. Dava, I gave, &c. Diedi, or detti, I gave -, desti, diede, or dette, demmo, deste, diedero, or detUro. Daro, I will give, &c. Darei, I would give, &c. Da, give 3 dia, diamo, date, diano, Che dia, that I give, &c. Che dessi, that 1 should give, &c. Fare, to do. Facendo, doing. Fatto, done. Fo, I do ; fai, fa, facciamo, fate, fanno. Faceva, I did, &c. Feci, I did ; facesti, fece, facemmo, faceste, fecero, JFaro, I will do, &c. Fam, I would do, &c. Fa', do; faccia, facciamo, fate, facciano. Che faccia, that I do, &c. Che facciate, that you do, &c. Che facessi, that I should do, &c. Stare, to stay. Stando, staying. Stato, stayed. Sto, I stay ; stai, sta, stiamo, state, stanno. Stava, I stayed, &c. Stetti, I stayed; stesti, stette, stemmo, steste, stetteroa Starb, I will stay, &c. Starei, I would stay, &c. Sta\ stay; stia, stiamo, state, stiano. Che stia, that I stay, &c. Che stessi, that I should stay, &c. SECOND CONJUGATION. The verbs of the second conjugation which are quite regular, being few in number, we shall exhibit those first to the student; they are the following : t The plural of the present conjunctive is always like the imperative, excepting that the second person of the former ends in iate. O O 284 REGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. Battere, to beat. Procedere, to proceed. Capere, be contained. Picevere, receive. Concedere, to grant. Resistere, resist. Credere, believe. Rifletiere, consider. Godere, enjoy. Ripetere, repeat. Empieref, fill. Scernere, discern. Fendere, cleave. Spandere, spread. Fremere, rag-e. Splendere, shine. Geinere, groan. Spremere, squeeze out Mietere, reap. Stridere, scream. Mescere, mix. Succumbere, sink under. Pascere, graze. Suggere, suck. Pendere, hang. Temere, fear. Perdere, lose. Tondere, shear. Prescindere, abstract. Vender e J sell. The verbs asm^ere, to assist; consisfere, to consist; esistere, to exist; resistere, to resist, have the past participle irregular — assistito, consistito, esistito, re- sistito. Of the irregular verbs of the second conjugation, some are irregular only in the imperfect tense of the indicative, and in the past participle ; and some have other irregularities. The following table contains those of the former description, t According to the method of conjugating any verb by one of the regular verbs, given in page 10, the second person of the present indicative, in this instance, should be empii; yet empi is the proper form, because the syllable pie of the infinitive is indivisible. In the following, for instance, alkviare^ premiare, risparmiare, the syllables via and mia might be divided into vi-a, mi-a; so that the second person above mentioned, is written with two i 's — allevii, premii, risparTnii — but in appareccJdare and ahbagliarCy the syllables chia and glia being indivisible, the second person must be written with one i only — apparccchif ahhagli. 285 VERBS IRREGULAR, In the Perfect of the Indicative, and in the Past Participle. Infinitive. Perfect. Past Participle. Tor cere, to twist. Tor si, torto*. Acce ndere, light. Acce si, accesof. Ucci dere, kill. Ucci si. uccisoX- L eggere, read. L essi. letto. Distr uggere, destroy. Distr ussi. distrutto. Fri ggere, fry. Fri ssi, fritto. Spi ngere, push. Spi nsi, spinto^. Accor gere, perceive. Accoi ' si. accorto\\. Co gliere, pluck. Co Isi, colto. Spe gnere, extinguish. Spe nsi, spento. Distin guere, distinguish. Distin 1 si. distinto. Esp ellere, expel. Esp ulsi, espulso. Pr emere, press. Pr essi. presso. Espr mere, express. Espr essi, espresso. Pres umere, presume. Pres unsi, presunto. R ompere, break. R uppi, rotto. Cono «cere. know. Cono bbi, conosciuto^. M ef^ere. put. M isi. messo**. Scr t^ere, write. Scr issi. scrittoff. Asso Ivere, absolve. Asso J . i assolto, or ^*'^^ \assolutoXX' EXCEPTIONS * Cuocere, tc ) boil. cossi, cotto. 'f* Fondcre, melt. fusi. fuso. JVascondere, hide. nascosi. nascoso, or nascosto. I Cedere, give up. cessi. ceduto. § Stringerey close. strinsi. stretto. \\ Dirigere, direct. diressi. diretto. Esigere, require. csigei. esattoi Negligere, neglect. neglessi ', negletto. Mergercy plunge. mersiy merso. ^ Nascere, bear. nacqui, nato. ** Flettere, bend. Jlessi, Jlesso. ft Fiwert, live. vissi, vivuio, or vissuto. it Solvere, untie. solvei, soluto. 286 Infinitive, Cor rere, to ran. Discu tere, discuss Perc uotere, strike. Perfect. Past Participl< Cor si, corso. Discu ssi, discusso. Perc ossi, percosso. Comm ossi, commosso. Comm uovere''^', move. Thus, when a verb, ending in ere, is not to be found amongst those few regular which are given in the first table, nor in the following one, of those which have several irregularities, it may be inferred, that it is one of the verbs which are irregular only in the two above- mentioned tenses ; and we may, from its termination, form the perfect and the participle, by the above table. Having found the first person of the perfect, we form the third of the singular, by changing the final i into e, and the third of the plural, by adding ro to the third of the singular. The second person of the singular, the first and second of the plural, are always regular, and must therefore be taken from the infinitive, by changing the last syllable, re, into sti, mmo, ste; thus : Coglie re. Irregular. Cols i. Regular. Coglie sti. Irregular. Cols e. Regular. Coglie mmo. Regular. Coglie ste. Irregular. Colse ro. When a verb is contracted, as conducere, into con- durre, we employ the former to construct the three regular persons. Such are, porre, to put ; here, to drink; dire, to say; corre, to pluck; sciorre, to untie; trarre, to draw ; syncopes of ponere, bevere, dicere, cogliere, sciogliere, traere. * As we have already said, in a verb containing the syllable uo, when the accent passes to a following vowel, the u must be taken off; thus : muqvere, to move ; muovo, I move ; muovi, thou movest j movianxo, we move ; movete, you move, &c. 287 VERBS HAVING SEVERAL IRREGULARITIES*. Condurre, syncope of Conducere, to Conduct. Conducendo, conducting-. Condotto, conducted. ConducOj I conduct. Conduceva, I conducted, Condussi, I conducted. Condui^rb, I will conduct. Condurrei, I would conduct. Conduct, conduct ; conduca, let him conduct. Che condu- cessi, that I should conduct. Bevere, or Bere, to Drink. This verb is regular, but we may say, bevo, or beo, beveva, or beeva; and so on, through the other tenses. The perfect has three forms: bevvi, bevei, or bevetti; of which, the former is the most used. Cadere, to Fall. Caddi, I fell. Caderd, or cadrd, I will fall. Caderei, or cadrei, I would fall. Chiedere, to Ask. Chiesto, asked. Chiedo, or chieggo, I ask. Chiesi, I asked, Chieda, or ckiegga, let him ask. * In case of the perfect being irregular, if the first person is given, the others may be formed in the manner already pointed out. . The third person of the singular of the present indicative, is always ob- tained from the second, by changing the final i into e. The first persons plural of the present imperative and conjunctive, are always like the first of the indicative. These are the three moods most subject to irregularities. The second plural of the present indicative and imperative, is invariably regular. The second plural of the present conjunctive, is formed by chang- ing the termination iamo of the first into iate. The third person plural of the present indicative, is formed by adding the syllable no to the first of the singular. The third person plural of the imperative and present con- junctive, is obtained by adding the syllable no to the third of the singular. The three persons singular of the present conjunctive, invariably re- semble the third of the imperative. The second has two forms : che rida, or ridi, that you may laugh. I consider it necessary to give merely the irregular tenses, and of those I omit the persons, which may be formed from the above explanation. Some of my pupils have observed to me, that these rules are, in fact, too much simplified; yet, from experience, I am persuaded that such is not the case ; since a child of eleven years of age (as I have mentioned in the Pre- face) , has succeeded in writing all the following verbs, by the sole aid of these very rules. 288 Dire, syncope of Dicer e, to Say. Dicendo, sa^-iog. Dtt\>j. said. D^'co, I say : did. ^.t di' , dice, diciamo. dite. — . Liceva. 1 said. Jjissi. I sai'ii. Lir'o. I will saj'. Direi. I would say. Di' say; dicrj,. Sec. C/ie dicessi, that I should say. Dolersi. to Complain*. J/i dolgOf or doglio. I cimplai.. : /?" dadi. -si ducU, ci dogliamo, vi delete, &-{ doI^::\c. jIi dcUi. I c:: :i::..id. 3/t dorrb, I will complain. .Vi i :;. Duoliti. Gl duoUi. complain: dolkj.-c, ui 'A'^^hu-^c, c^c. Dovere, to be Obliged. Dehho. or deg^io. I must: ofe?", or delhi. dee. or debhe, dohbiamo, — , Sec. Divro. I shall be c • i t ^ Dovrei, I should be obliged. Che dtbba, that I be o,ji.^c^^, Sec; do^- hiamo, — , &c. Nuocere. to In jure. AociKfo, injured. 3'i. : - : :ccic; I i: ' : r >' v ^?, nocciamo, nocete. &c. J ::^.i, I injures. _,..:.:, :r.j_:e; nuoccia, or noccia. Sec. Parere. to Appear. Paruto. or ■■po.rsc. ;?.■;■^r?:cl pv^'o. la^^'-ear: ;;c:/-/'. — . jjaiamo, — . — . Po/^vi^ i a.:.:rarrd, Po.:T'j, 1 wid apprar. Parrel, I would appear. Par?', ap.ear: /^aii'a, paiamo, Piacere. to Please.. Piaciuto, pleased. Piaccio. piaci, Sec. : pio.cciamo, Sec. Piacqui, 1 pleased. Piaci, pl-^a^e : piaccia. Sec. The verb giacere, to He, is co-^i;; a:-d in the same mani^er. Porre, syDco^.e of Ponere. to Pat^. Ponendo, puttiDg. Po.kIo, put. Pongo, 1 put : ;^07a", — , poniamo, kc. Pan era. 1 put. Pes?'. I put. Porrd, 1 will * The auxiliary of a verb ar:-i : i — 'rL : - - : : : :_ - ;t be essere. \ Upon tliese verbs are col -^.. . :_;:; .1 : . - ;_- suae termina- tion; for instance, indurre and produrre, upon comdmre; accadere, nptm cadere; disdire, interdire, upon dire; apparere, vs^n parere ; frapporre, ap- porre, imporrc, n^n porre. 289 put. Porrei, I -would put Poni, ipui; ponga, kc. Ponessi, I should put. Potere, to be Able. Posso, I can ; puoi, pud, possiamo, potete, &c.* Potro, I will be able. Potrei, I would be able. Che possa, that I may, &c. Rimanere, to Remain. Rimaso, or rimasto, remained. Rimango, I i*emain ; ri- mani, &c. Rimasi, I remained. Rimarro, I will remain. Rimarreiy I Would remain. Rimani, remain ; rimanga, &c. Sapere^ to Know. So, I know; sa«, sa, sappiamo, — , sanno. Seppi, I knew. Saprd, I will know. Saprei, I would know. Sappi, know ; sappia, let him know ; sappiate, know, &c. Scegliere, to Choose. Scelto, chosen. Scelgo, or sceglio, I choose ; scegli, &c. Scelsi,! chose. Scegli, choose ; scelga, or sceglia, &c. Seder Gy to Sit. Siedo, or seggo, I sit; steo?«, — , sediamo, or seggiamo, sedete, &c. Siedi, sit ; sieda, or segga, &c. Possedere, to possess, has likewise these little irregularities. Svellere, to Pluck Out. Svelto, plucked. Svelgo, or svello, I pluck; svelli, &c. Svelsi, I plucked. Svelli, pluck ; svella, or svelga, &c. Tacere, to be Silent. Taciuto, been silent. Taccio, I am silent ; ?«ci, &c. Tacciamo, we are silent, &c. Tacqui, I was silent ; wi «o» faciw^o, I have been silent. 7\zci, be silent ; taccia, &c. Tenere, to Hold. Tengo, I hold; fzem, — , teniamo, — , &c. Tenni, I held. Terrb, I will hold. Terrei, I would hold. Tieni, hold ; tenga, &c. * As this verb is always followed by another in the infinitive, so, if the latter admit of the object, the auxiliary of potere is averc; if not, it ought to be essere. Pp 390 Togliere, or Torre, to Take. Tolto, taken. Toglio, or tolgo, I take ; togli, — , &c. Tolsij I took. Toglierd, or torro, I will take. Toglierei, or torrei, I would take. Togli y take; toiga, or toglia, &c. Trarre, or Traere^ to Draw. 7V*«enc?o, drawing. TVa^^o, drawn. T^'ag^go, I draw ; ^cannot find any terminationX — — — — \ non terminarsi in parte / (2) therein. (1)* 2. The young" man is son to Landolpho, brother to — — — figliuclo * Landolfo — * Gianni of Procida, by whose means you are lord of — — — — * opera — — signor — this island. 3. I am forced to do two things very contrary to my * convenire * — — — molto — -— — temper ; first to commend myself, and then to costumi Vunajia * — — — Valtra * blame other people. 4. He could g-ive you no truer nor better advice. potere — — * — — — consiglio 5. Not being- able to shake off my love, nor to — — non che cacciare (3) (4) ma(l) lessen it, and seeing- it is too g-rievous to be diminuire(l) — essendomi — grave * borne, I have resolved to die. comportare — — eleggere — volar morire 6. The g-ood woman, finding- that he was still — — femmina sentire — — — ancor fasting, set her coarse bread, with some digiuno apparecchiare — duro (2) pan ( I ) — alcun fish and water, before him. 7. He inquired how she found herself, and if — domandare * — * (2) parere(3^ star (l^ — — she thought she was strong enough to ride. credersi * * — * cavalcare 298 8. There is no one but must allow that he did sarcL * * dire — — avere a very noble action ; but to say that nothing- greater magmficamente opei^ato — * — — piu non may be done, the contrary, perhaps, will not be * * - - (3) (1) (2) difficult to be shown, — * mostrare 9. Such as they find to be firm and constant in all respects^ ** — — ^00 — — — a — caso them do they make worthy of the greatest rewards. * — — — — alto * merito 10. I will not have you wonder at my advice and my disposition. 11. Who but myself, could so soon have caused such — altri che * * — — * cosifatto a lady to fall in love ? t donna innamorare 12. Understanding- by her, that nobody knew where she was sentire — — — — — — — * but the persons who had broug-ht the clothes to her, * coloro — — portare — panni — — and the labourer that was there, she was a little — — — — — presents — — comforted. riconfortarsi 13. You must know, that it is very difficult for me — — — — _ molto malagevole * — to raise a thousand pounds, because I cannot g-et * trovare — — — — — — avere what I am promised. * * 14. Having- stepped to the door, he said. Here I am accostarsi — — uscio — * Madam ; for Heaven 's sake, open, for I am ready Madonna (2) Dio (3) (1) che — mi to die with cold. muoio * — t I think it necessary again to caution the student, that I put a trace under this particle, whether it is to be translated or not. 299 15. Then she told her that her name was Carapresa, and allora — — — — avere nome — — that she was servant to some Christian fishermen. — — servire certo (2) (1) 16. The principal of the house was a youth, who spent — maggior — — — — — giovane — — his whole time in fowling- and hunting*. — — — — uccellare — cacciare 17. Being desirous of retrieving- what he had lost, he — — riscuotere — — — went to his friend, and finding- him fast asleep, andarsene — — — — vedere — dormir forte he took / all the money \ out of his purse, trarre \quanti denari avea/ (3) (1) * (2) and returned to play. — tornarsene — giocare 18. He took Alexander by the feet, and drew him out, — prendere — — — tirare — — and hoisting him upon his shoulders, he went on — levare * — in su — — andarsene towards Francis' house. 19. Thou saidst that thou wert the person that last nig-ht — — — — — colui — * — had slain the man, and now here comes another, — uccidere — — — or (2) (3) questi(l) who says it was not thou, but he, that has done it. e — *00 — — — — — uccidere — 20. I hold it advisable for us to return — giudicare che convenevole cosa sia * tornarsi Id whence we departed. — partirsi 21. Perceiving- now the night coming upon him, and not vedere — — sopravvenire — — knowing what to do, he tied his horse to an oak tree, — — farsi — — — querela and got up into it. — montare (2) su (\) vi Q q 2 300 22. He had her brought before him, and said, " By the * — venir dinansi * — — — Pope 's leave, I may quit you, and take — — concession — — lasciare — — pigliare another wife/' — donna 23. I know well that nothing* could have happened — — — — cosa non potere — aiwenire which might have given ray lady so much — (2) dispiacere (3) madonna{4) (1) uneasiness. 24. W^hoever departs from this, I hold worthy not — partirsi (S) (1) (2) — estimare — — only of great reproof, but severe chastisement. — — grave riprensione — aspro castigamento 25. I intend to teach you how to behave as a wife, and — voter e * — — * d' esser — - — — others, how to choose and keep one. — * — saper torre — tenere la EXERCISE II. \ . You return home with your hands in your pockets, when — — — — • — — spenzolato — you ought to be at work. — — — — lavorare 2. The holy man was delighted with these *(5) (6) (7) piacere(3) molto (4) (1) expressions, and esteemed them proofs of a well parola (2) — par ere * argomento * disposed mind. 3. You, simple woman! you will have him for your husband, * sciocco — — * — — — — who is not worth one farthing in the world ? — avere — cosa — 301 4. Accept this young- lady, whom thou thinkest my spouse, prendere costei — — credere — — and her brother, as thy children and mine. * - (3) (I) (2) 5. She now inquired who was the g-ood woman who — appi^esso domandare — * — — femmina — spoke Italian so well. (3) (2) (1) 6. Let us go down stairs to the door ; you shall stand — giu insino — — uscio — starsi still; and whilst I speak to him, you shall hear what cheto — — — * — — — iidire — he says. * 7. I am an inferior servant of Nathan, who have — — — piccolo sey^vitor — — — * grown old in his service, and yet We never promoted me invecchiarsi con lui * — trarre — to any thing- more than what you see me. — altro — -— — — 8. It happened one day, as he was passing- from one avvenire che — — * (2) passare{\) — — farm to another, that he entered a possessione — — — — pleasant g-rove. boschetto 9. At a proper time, the thing- shall be made public, a luogo e tempo (3) fatto(4) *(1) manifestare (2) which, if they approve of, it will be well ; if * — * piacere* stare — — otherwise, it will be done. non — pur — 10. The night was so gloomy and dark, that he could not — — — — buio — *oscuro — — — — know where he went. discernere — andarsi * 302 11. Had I been willing to vary from the truth of the fact, * — volere scostarsi — — — — I could have disguised and related it under different — * * comporre — raccontare — — altro names. 12. This may be done only by a person who has — non — * — se non -— — — di great presence of mind ; for it must be done sicuro animo percid che convenire * — in the night, in a solitary place, and without di _-. _ _ (2) luogo{\) — — company. 13. It was, and is your desire, that I take a — v' e piaciuto — piacere — — togliere — wife; I have disposed myself to it, rather to please — — * — — * pill — compiacere you, than out of any liking I had to — — * desiderio * — *(3) di(l) matrimony. moglie (2) 14. You are much to blame for it ; for nothing — — — * — percid che niuna cosa should be kept so clean as the sacred temple, convenire * ~ netto — — santo — wherein we offer sacrifice to God. — * rendere — — — 15. Certainly, my friend, I perceive that I know how — (2) (1) — avvedersi — — — * to do what I will, better than any other man. 16. Reason requires, that he who stands in need of — volere — * — aver bisogno — another's guidance and protection, be obedient, subject, * governo — aiuto — — — and respectful to his ruler. — reverente con — governatore 303 17. If their ways appear in such a light to me, that I — — maniera * tale — — — — may be able to comprehend by them, that your reli«rion - (3) (I) *(2) fede is better than mine, as you have endeavoured to * — — — — — — ingegnarsi — persuade me, I will then do what 1 have promised. dimostrare — — — — — 18. She fell down the ladder, and broke her thigh. — — in terra {Z)* (X) (2) — — * — 19. They are willing to have a more certain trial of — — — — — esperiensa — thy virtue, than it w^as possible for thee to show — — — quella che * potere da — — within the limits of thy father 's house. dentro a — termine — — — 20. They had got their arms above deck, and — — trarre — — — coperta — prepared for defence. apparecchiarsi di difendersi 21. They had scarce rode more than two miles, when non * guari cavalcare — — — — che they came in sight of a little castle. — vedersi vicini — — * — 22. Without changing countenance or resolution in any — mutare viso — proponimento -^ — respect, she said : My lord, I shall entirely acquiesce. atto — — (2) (1) — essere del tutto contento 23. Before I commend you to God 's providence, prima che — accomandare — — — 1 beg you, by the love and friendship existing — — — — quello — — * — che essere between us, to be mindful of me always. — — che ricordarsi (4) (2) (3) (1) 24. I know you are a chilly fellow; but the weather — — — — — assiderato — — freddo is not very cold, although there be a little snow. — — — grande perch^ * — — 304 25. Each of us has had his day, and his share of honour, — — — giornata — — parte — — which at present rests in me. — or a dimorare (3) (1) (2) 26. Without saying- to any one what he was come about, . — — — perM *(3) ire(\) vi (2) he beg-an to examine narrowly into the manners (2) (3) riguardare{4) cauto*(l) * — — of the pope, the cardinals, and other prelates. 27. He was afraid that he mig-ht not be received, because he — temere * — — — — was too young and handsome. — — — — appariscente 28. These fellows, finding him to be a merchant, and * vedere — — — — supposing, therefore, that he must have money about stimare per cid * dovere portar — him, resolved among themselves, as soon as an — ~ * come prima — opportunity offered, to rob him. tempo vedersi* — — — EXERCISE III. 1. Agilulf, king of the Lombards, fixed the seat of — — ^ Longobardo fermare — soglio — his kingdom, as his predecessors had done, at Pavia, — regno si come — — — — * — a city in Lombardy. 2. Having returned those things to the woman that had — io rendere * — femmina — — brought them, that she should carry them back to him, recare — — rip or tare — — — and having given her an angry farewell, I feared — — — — brutto commiato temere afterwards, lest she might keep them herself, poi che — * tenere — per — and tell him I had received them. 305 3. You know that i have no women in my house^ who are able to set out the rooms^ and do many other sapere acconciare — camera ne — — — thing's which are required. — — * richiedere 4. The sig-ht of this g-arden, its form and contrivance, the — veder — — — bello ordine — trees, and the fountain, with the streams proceeding" pianta — — — — — ruscelletto — from it, pleased /the gentlemen and ladies \ — * — \ — giovane — donna ) (2) very much. (1) 5. Doest thou not see I am thy Richard, come here to pay whatever ransom this g-entleman might demand, in cid che (2) (3) volere(\) — whose house we are now, to have thee back with (2) (1) — riavere — (2) me? (1) 6. Nothing has made me keep my love a secret nulla cosa — — — tenere — — nascoso so much, as what I have observed in many people, * V essermi avvedere{A) (\) (2) persona(3) that when they grow into years, they forget — poi che — essere attempato dimenticarsi that they ever were young. d' essere stati — 7. I beg that you will send a person to Sicily, — — — — mandare* alcuno — * — to learn the state of the country. il quale informarsi * di — — paese 8. My servant has in him such nine qualities, that if — fante * tali (3) (1) (2) — — any one of them be either in Solomon, Aristotle, qualunque — — — — Salomone * Aristotele or Seneca, it would have the power to confound all — — — forza — guastare ogni their philosophy, all their virtue, and all their sanctity. — senno — — — — — — R r 30G 9. It chanced that a young* woman in the neight)Qurhoo(f^ avvenire — — femminetta * — contrada with whom he was much enamoured, came into the * — — — forte — entrare — — kitchen, and seeing* the crane, earnestly begged that — — — — gru caro* * — — he would give her a leg. * — coscia 10. Though I was in the midst of a great fire, I was all _ _o 0— — — — over in a tremble for fear; which one /that tremare(S} * (1) paura(2) * (2) \ — stood by my side,\ beholding, said, " What hast essere a * lato/(S) vedere (1) * — — thou done more than the others, that thou quakest — — — — ^ — — — — tremare in the fire?" stando — 11. I would say nothing to you last night, because you — volere — cosa niuna — — — sera percid die — seemed to be tired; but tell me, which of your mi par ere stanco — — — * — — servants do you believe to be the most faithful, and famigliare — avere per — — leale — * which he who loves you most? * - *(3) (2) (1) 12. Madam, it would seem no strange thing to any — — dovere esser * maraviglia — — considerate person that I am in love, especially with savio — — amare * — * you, because you deserve it. • — pero che — valere il 13. After these affectionate greetings were repeated poi che le liete accogliensa — iterare over and over, to the great joy of the tre e quattro volte * — letizia — — beholders, they related /to each other\ their circostante nai^rare (^5) \ * ' (1) (3) several misfortunes. ogni (2) accidente (4) 807 14. He beg'an in a friendly manner to entreat him to (3) amichevolmente{\) (4) pregare{6) (2) che renounce the errors of Judaism, and embrace the lasciare — — — fede giudaica — ritornare * — truth of Christianity. — cristiana 15. Presently ordering seats to be brought out of his di present e (2) * (1) panca * venir difuor da * bake-house, he begged them to sit down. forno G pregare — che sedere ^6. She took no more notice of him than she fare (S) (1) altramenti(2) motto * — — would have done of any stranger that should come into (2) (1) * unforestiere — * — her house. (2) (1) 17. After I had been there for some time, poi che (5) dimorare(fi) (4) (\) alquantoi^) (3) and learnt a little of their language, t * apparare(6) alquanto (V) (2) (3) (4) they inquired of me who I was, and from whence I came ; and I answered, that I was daug'hter to a gentleman of Cyprus. — — Cipri f At the time of Boccaccio, the conjunction e was written as in Latin, e/, whether followed by a vowel or not. Some editors did not take the liberty of changing it afterwards; because, in the expression, for instance, Et acconciossi et andossene^ they could not know (had Boccaccio employed the modern orthography) whether e or ed would have been preferred by him. Now, as the sound of the vowels c, a, is more agreeable to the ear when they come in immediate contact with one another, than when they are separated by a lied — t monsignore * — * rispondere the king-, who has cured me with her medicines. 4. I beg of every one, if the entertainment is not — pregare * tutti che — — convito fosse — so splendid as its fame requires, not tanto ' — — (2)* grida(3) convenire (^l) cheX — to ascribe the fault / to my will, but imputare (2) ogni (3) difetto (4) \ — — volere — inability. \ facultatej (1) to my inability. \ t Although modem Italians call a young lady signorina, the word is not authorized by good writers, and is used in familiar discourse only. Boc- caccio, who professes to have written in volgare Fiorentino, has never used this word ; he employs giovane, madamigella^ damigella. We may therefore imitate him, and be more correct even in conversation, by making use of the same words which he, whom we consider as our ruler in language, has authorized. The word ^wycwc cannot be applied to the person addressed, unless attended by another adjective. X Although this particle is already expressed at the commencement of the sentence, Dante has repeated it, because the verb imputare , which it go- verns, is separated by too many words to be influenced thereby. 328 5. There is not / a more noble or courteous manner of (3) (2) \— — lecito * — modo •— respecting- oneselfA than the paying- respect to fare onore (2) * (1) /(I) — onorare * one's friend. * 6. It is not without reason that I say, this love makes its * * — — cagione * * — — (4) (5) operation in the mind. (6) (1)(2) (3) 7. Several times they advised and entreated him to — — consigliare — * pregare • — che leave Ravenna, and g-o and live some where partirsi * — — — * dimorare * — luogo else ; for, by that means, he might lessen both his — perchb cost facendo scemare * — love and expenditure. 8. He called her by name, and inquired where her — — — ' — — — * domandare — (2) father was. She modestly replied, My lord, he (3) (I) — vergognoso * risporidere * * — is in the house. 9. You, with your friends armed, and myself, with — , — — compagno — — * — some of mine in whom I can confide, will alquanto * * — — — fidare in the evening- enter their houses. in sul far della sera — — — 10. Putting his hand into his pocket, he found he had mettere * — — — — tasca trovarsi no money ; upon which he made a great uproar. * — di — — — il (2) romor (1) 11. If, by chance, thou happen to go to a place where Ventura t incontrare * — Id — there are persons who appear to doubt thy * * — — ti par ere * — in — argument, do not lose courage. ragione — smarrirsi'* t See page 255, Rule II. 12. He declared he had been robbed, and threatened to dire — — — . — — minacciare — have them all sent prisoners to Siena. * _- _ ^. (2) presi (] ) — — 13. If it is discovered, you will be easily forg-iven; ' — questo * scoprire * — leggiere'^ — but I, miserable man! shall be forced to bear the — * misero convenire * portar — ■ punishment of both my crime and yours. pena — * — peccato(3) (1) (2) 14. It is the more pleasing- to me to have found a sister * caro * — — (2) (3) here, as I the less expected it. (I) * (2) (3) sperare(4) questo (I) 15. Seeing- her so amiable and pretty, and hearing- her — 4 — — grazioso — avvenente — udire — speak so softly, unwilling-ly he (3) (I) dolce^{1) now (3) volendo{^) fell in love with her. accendersi (^b) (1) (2) 16. It is my opinion, that such women as are nel mio giudicio cape — * — * partirsi(2) (not mild, compassionate, and docile, daW essere piacevole benevolo — pieghevole as Nature, custom, and the laws require,\ are — — - usanxa — — — volere /(I) esser deserving- of severe reproach. degno — rigido riprensione 17. These people know each other, they love each other, * — * costoro — * and are both my husband 's friends. — (2) ciascuno(\) — — — — 18. Ordering- very rich presents to be broug-ht, lie g-ave * — — dono * venire * — part to her, and part to him, and desired — — — — — — — — dar licensa (2 J them to do what was most agreeable to themselves. (1) _ *(2) (I) agrado(4) (3) u u 330 19. Do not turn thy arms ag-ainst a woman. volere — esercitare — forsa contro a — femmina 20. Before many days are past, I will convince avanti che troppo — trapassare — fare per opera vedere you that, as 1 know how to conquer others, so I — — — "^ * vincere — am able to withstand myself. sapere — soprastare (3) a(l) (2) 21. Were it not that it appears more reputable that * — — mi (3) (4) (1) onesto(2) — you should come to me at my house, than I g-o to _ t — ^ in (2) (1) — you at another person's, I should have come to you. 22. I entreat that you would tell me how you can bear — pregare — — insegnare* — — — sofferire the insults which I hear are committed towards — ingiuria — — intendere — • fare a you, that I may patiently bear my own. — accio che — comportare — 23. He sent me a purse and g-irdle, as if I had — — — — cintola quasi come — not any purses and girdles; at which I was — delle — — — — — avere very much offended. forte per male 24. If we love/in the other world as we do in this,\ — *(2) (3)V di la — di qud)(l) I shall love thee to eternity. — — — in perpetuo f See page 215, Rule IV., last paragraph. J See page 139, Rule IV. 331 EXERCISE X. 1. It is not sufficient to look only at that which is non bastare — guardar pur — — — before our eyes, viz. the present; and therefore dinansi * — — cioe — — — 'per 6 foresig-ht is g-iven us, that we may look forward providenza (S) (I) (2) — che riguarda oltre as to what may happen. — — — avvenire 2. Oh, ineffable wisdo;n, that hast thus ordained, how — — sapien^a — cosi ordinasti — poor is our mind to comprehend thee ! (2) (1) (2) (1) 3. These opinions are demonstrated as false, by that — — — riprovare * — — — glorious philosopher to whom, especially. Nature — _> _ _ piu{1) (1) discovered her secrets. aprire — — 4. Having- put the ring into his month, he contrived to let — metier e — — — * — — fece si che lascio it fall into the cup, without anyone's perceiving* — — coppa — (2) avvedersi (^i) it, and leaving but little wine therein, he covered ne — * — — vi ricoperchiare it up, and sent it to the lady. _0 -— — __ 5. Mark (thou) the impudence! Hear what he says! He vedere svergognato udire — e' — — speaks neither better nor worse than if it was one — — piu — meno come — (5) (1) or two years ago. (3) (4) (-2) (6) 6. I had much rather that he should suffer, than — ho — piu caro — '— ricevere * villania — that 1 myself should bear any blame on his account. — aver'c » * — * u u 2 332 7. I am disposed to tell it to you, provided only you — — presto — — — sol che — * promise never to speak a word to him, or — che — farete alcuno — * — — * any other person, about it. * ne 8. Do not take care of this. No ; I know what I — calersi * — — — — — am about; do you well, for I shall do well enough. farsi — jpwr (2) (1) — — 9. Nature has formed us with delicate and soft — — fatte — (3) (4) morbido (5) constitutions; our minds timorous and fearful; ne' (1) corjoz(2) in — animo timido* — pauroso and has afforded us little bodily streng-th, voices — — dare — le corporaliforze leggieri * — pleasing-, and the motion of our limbs gently pliant. piacevole — — movimenti — soave 10. The young bride shewed, apparently, that, with her — — sposa parere — — — garments, she had changed both her mind and vestimento — — mutare insieme — animo — behaviour. costumi 11. Since you have resolved to be poiche questo * essere * all' animo — voler essere man and wife together, let it be done. marito — — — * * 12. If they should pluck out my eyes, pull out my teeth, or — - — cavare * — trarre * — — lop off my hands, how could I bear that ? mozzare — — — potere — star cheto 13. As you see, the sun is high, and the heat excessive, — — — — — — — caldo e grande and nothing is heard but the grasshoppers among the * altro * udire * — cicala su per — olives ; so that it would be madness for us to go at — percM — sciocchessa * present to any place. — * — luogo 333 i4. They would have you do as they say ; namely, — vogliono * — * quello che — cioe fill their purses with money, entrust them with * rieinpire * — — denari fidare — your secrets, be chaste and patient, and forg-ive injuries. 15. She was sitting upon the green grass, and held with — — sopra — — erbette tenere — her right hand the loose reins of a horse, and with -— destro — — lento redina — — — — — her left, a shield and a lance. 16. I will ask you in marriage of your mother ; — fare addomandare — * moglie * — — and when she knows my condition, I think, I am — — — * (2) esser(l) — credersi (3) even certain, that it will appear to her a thousand anzi{y) (2) — par ere — years to attain the end. — venire * — — 17. Now his rage abated, and his passion di present e * furore (2) cadere(\) — — ira turned into shame. convertirsi — vergogna 18. At the time when the French were driven out of Sicily, in — — * — — — cacciare — — there was at Palermo a Florentine apothecary, called * — — — — Fiorentino speziale — Bernardo. 19. Do you think, if I had that love for him — credere che — — volere — bene * w^hich you apprehend, that 1 would let him stay — — temere — sofferire che * * there to be frozen? — — agghiacciare 334 20. Peter came up to him, and asked him whether — farsi incontro * — domandare — — he felt nothing ; saying, You look half dead. — senlirsi — — — parere — — 21. Having no time for a long deliberation, throwing — * — * troppo lungo — lasciarsi * it down, he ran away as fast as his legs could — cadere andare — * — — ne potere carry him. portare — 22. Gentlemen, this is what I value beyond t — — quella cosa che — aver piu caro che every thing else ; see if you think I am — — guardare — * parere — aver in the right. ragione 23. Sir, the person whom you have condemned to death — colui — — — — — — as a slave, is a freeman, and my son ; — — — — — lihero uomo — — Jigliuolo therefore please to defer the execution, till e perd — — tanto indugiare — — — it be known whether you have done contrary to law. * — — — — — contro — — 24. What thou art disposed to pursue, thou oughtest to fly from, if thou hadst any regard to what true friendship il — — riguardare — — — amistd requires. richiedere f Signore is well employed, when applied to the person addressed. 335 EXERCISE XI. 1. That man is more praiseworthy, who, /being- ill- ^'(4) (5) (1) (2) laudabile (S) — V — naturedA / directs and governs himselA — / (2) \dirissare * — reggere — (0 ag-ainst the power of nature, than he who, being* — — impeto — — — — — good-natured, maintains himself in good conduct. — — sostenere — — — reggimento 2. Certain vices are conquered and avoided by good — — * vincere — /^g'g'*^^ — — habits, and man thereby becomes virtuous, consuetudine — (2) * (3) farsi (1) — 3. The more the thing sought for, approaches to the — — — — desiderato appropinquarsi — — wisher, the stronger grows the desire. desiderante * maggiore{A) essere (S) (1) (2) 4. I say that the sun, in going round the world, does not see — — — — girare — — — — any thing nobler than this woman. — — cost gentile * — 5. The priest said, *' Is no other person here besides — — — — egli — piii — ci che us two V Yes, replied the monk, by thousands ; but * we can no more see or hear them, than they can — — nb — * — — se non come — see or hear us. — 6. Do not think that my observation proceeds from — credersi — queste parole venire — cowardice, nor that I made it to deter vilta d'animo — — — aver detto voler ritrarre thee from thy resolution. — — — proponimenlo 336 7. Upon hearing- that, he beg-an to reflect how great and — — ■ — ■ — — pensare quali — many were the errors to which the minds of men were subject. pote7'e cadere 8. There are some who, speaking /rather angrily — di quegli — (2) \ — dispettoso * than wisely,") have said that I had better — savio*^(^l) — — — — fare piu discretamente think how I could get my bread. * — dond' — dovere aver * — 9. Paul, who was not far, seeing him part from his friend, came up to him, and asked him whether — far si incontro * — domandare — — he was well. * 10. Seeing himself robbed by this man, and then kept in — — rub are — — — or a tenersi — talk in that manner, he turned his horse^ and parole — cotal — voltare — — — rode towards Torrennieri. prendere il cammino — — 11. No one else /could have discerned the high virtue of — — \ t conoscere — — — — this lady, concealed under a mean habit and country * nascondere — i poveri panni — villesco (2) disguise, \ but himself. ahito(l))(S) (1) *(2) 12. Without telling who she was, or from whence — manifestar — — si * * — — she came, she begged of her to have pity — — — — che — misericordia on her youth. * — giovanezza t See page 209, 3rd Example, on the Conditional. 837 13. Let the wedding* be ordered at my husband 's expence — — spese no^^e * afterwards I will undertake to make peace between e poi — far fare — — you arid your relations. 14. He frequently intended to leave her — molte volte mettersi in cuore — lasciar stare — entirely, or else to hate her, if he could, as del tutto — pure — avere in odio — — — — — she hated him. — avere — 15. He became the most accomplished young g-entleman — riuscire — — costumato — in the isle of Candia. 16. Go (thou) and bid him keep well w^arm, and andarsene — — — che tenersi — — — I will come instantly, and tell him what he is — — incontanente — — — — — * to do. 17. Which do you think the g-reater, his wnsdom, or the * * parere •— — senno t — love which he has for me? — — — portare * — - 18. He made her sit down by him, and said. It is now — — sedere allato * — — (2) ormai(S) time for you to reap the fruit of your long- patience. (1) che * sentire* — — — — — — 19. I am very g-lad you are returned with an intention * piaccre forte — — tornare — — intendimento of staying', because I hope to have still a g-reat deal — — pero che — — -^ — ancora assai of pleasure with you. — buon tempo — — t See page 247, Rule VII, 1st Example. X X 338 20. I beg- you will open the door, that I may stand — — m' — 00 — — potere — there under cover, for it snows still ; and then I * al coperto - — — tuttavia — — will wait as long- as you please. attendere * * * essere a grado 21. My lord, I do not complain of not having" received any * * — — turharsi — — — — — g-ift from you, because I did not desire it, to become dono — — perch^ — — — esser richjer; but only as you have borne — ~ del (2) {I) * render e (4) testimony in no respect to my virtue. testimonian^a(5) (I) (2) cosa(3) — — — 22. I have told thee (it) a hundred times, that thou shouldest never travel ; for that failing of thine, t non andare attorno che — vizio * of walking- in thy sleep, and telling the stories thou — il levarsi — — — — favola — dreamest, will be /of ill consequenceX to thee — dare \ la mala ventura /(2) — — (some time or other.X una volta /(I) 23. The maid reported the answer to the lady, who was — /ante fare — — — — — — * waiting to see if they would be such fools as aspettare — — — — — si pazso * to do it. * 24. He who felt an appetite, inasmuch as he had — — aver talento J di mangiare — come colui che (2) walked, seeing the abbot did not yet come, took camminare(\) — — — — — trarre ( one of the three loaves'\ /out of his bosom,^ U - /(2) U ){y) and began to eat. \ See page 215, Rule IV. last paragraph. X Talento is here used for inclination, metapl]^orically, for this reason, that he who has the talent to do any thing, is generally inclined to it by nature. 339 EXERCISE XII. 1. Man is worthy of praise or blame, only for those things — — lode e vituperio solo * — — which it is in his power to do or not to do ; but for — sono podestd e — * those wherein he has no power^ he deserves neither blame nor praise. 2. Every thing- mostly tends to perfection ; and ciascuno — massimo* desiderare la sua — — by it, it is that every wish is gratified, and m — * * (3) c?estc?eno (4) (1)* 5'Me«are(2) — for it^ ever}^ thing desired. 3. This is the desire which always makes every — — quel — — — — (2) pleasure appear to us defective ; for there is no dilettasion(2) (1) manco — * (3) (1) pleasure so great in this life as /to be capable of (2) _____ — * V potere* quenchino- this thirst\ /of our souls. \ torre ^ la — J(2)\a (2) (1)*/(1) 4. The moon /which was then in the midst of (2) (3) \ essendo — — — — heavenA had now lost her briahtness, and /every — /(4) (1) — (2) ra^ggi{l) e gid\ — part of our hemisphere become illuminatedx /by — — — mondo era chiaro /(2) \ — the approach of day — nuova luce vesinente, )(i) 5. After he had eaten, and warmed himself, he related poi che — — * riscaldare — contare his whole misfortune, and how he had arrived there. — — disavveniura — — *(2) (3) quivi(l) X x2 340 6. You shall know, to your cost, how grievous it is to provare con —• danno * grave * — me to have / taken a wife at your request,\ — * — \prendere — — — — prieghi^ (2) /contrary to my inclination.") \ contra — voglia ^(1) 7. Dost thou suppose, my friend, if a strang-er — credere — — che (2) forestiere (3) / were to meet with us,") who had never seen \venendo all' incontro di — /(I) — — — — thee before, that he would imagine thee to be the best — p — credere che — * — — painter in the world, as thou really art? dipintor — — — — — — S. Yes, I believe he mig-ht think so, if, looking- at — — credere — credere il allora che — thee, he could ever conclude that thou hadst learned — — credere — — sapere thy A, B, a * a, hi, ci 9. You must have much finer cords made for your — — * (2) sottile * (3) (1) * a — archers s' bows than are commonly used. — — — che quelle che * comunalmente — 10. I must acquaint you that there are /companies of — volere ricordare — — andare \ brigata people, both friends and enemies,\ /passing this * * — _- _ ;(2) V joer — way,v who do us great injury sometimes. ^ )(1) (2) danni(Z) (1) 11. What is the meaning of this? Who is it that — ■ voler dire — — — * — sneezes in this manner ? starnutire (2) cost ( 1 ) 12. The queen, feeling the heat of the day to be sufficiently — — sentire — — — — — — gia overcome by the breezes of the night, ordered vincere freschezza — — — comandare che every one to go and repose. — andarsi * — 341 13 Nothing- is agreeable to me, but in as much as I 7iiuno cosa — caro se non — — — see it is pleasing- to yourself. — — piacere — — 14. To-morrow morning I will send you some of the — — — — — * — quello distilled water, and you shall begin to drink it by stillato (2) (1) — — — — — ne a large glass full at a time. — buon bicchier grande per — volta 15. Hearing his voice, and looking in his face, he + * — — * (4) (1) (2) viso (3) found it was the same person that had so riconoscere lui J colui — — — kindly received, familiarly accompanied, and faithfully benigno^ — — — — — advised him. consigliare — L6. At this very instant, as nothing now remained to be * ■* — restare * * served up but the dessert, the tv/o girls came dare — — frutte (2) (3) giovinetta (4) (1) with two silver dishes in their hands, full of all manner — — — — — * mano — vario of fruit, which they set before the king. frutti e quegli posare davanti * — — 17. The scholar, who knew that threats serve — -- — — (3) essere * (2) . only" \ as weapons to the person \niuna altra cosa) (V) * — di — threatened, kept all his resentment within his — serrare — — sdegno dentro a — breast, petto t See page 176, Rule V. J See page 215, on the Infinitive Mood. 342 18. Do, stay (thou) a little, I expect here a man who deh aspettarsi — — egli deve venir — — — has got my waistcoat in pawn for eig'ht and thirty — togliere — farsetto — pegno — — — — pence ; and I am sure he will restore it for five and soldo cet'to * — rendere — — thirty, to be paid down. — pagandol teste 19. If you had children of your own, whereby you might — — 00 * — potere know how strong is the affection we bear them, — c/i * forza * — amove * portai^e — I am sure you would excuse me. r- certa — avere per iscusato — 20. This young lady is not, as many may think, either — — — — forse stimare of Cremona or Pavia, but of Faenza; although * — * — ansi e Faentina come che neither myself, nor she, nor yet the person who bequeathed her to me, knew ever whose daughter she lasciare — — — * — * (2) was. e8sersi(^l) 21. Their habits and temper were so conformable, that a — costumi — — con/orme — — brotherly affection, and very strict friendship, fratellama — * grande (2) (1) * sprung up between them. nascere — — EXERCISE XIII. 1. Before we proceed further, we must here prima che (2) * (3) piu oltre (1) * convenire — explain what is called Philosophy. mostrare che ^ questo che * — — 343 2. Almost at the same time with Niima Pompilius, second (4) (1) (2) (3) die — Pompilio — king- of the Romans, there lived in Italy a most noble *(2) philosopher, called Pythag-oras. ( 1 ) che * — Pitagora t 3. Before him, /the followers of science\ were dinansi da costui \ — seguitatore — — -^C^) (1) not called Philosophers, but Sages. (4) (2) — — sapiente 4. This Pythagoras, having- been asked whether he — — domandare — considered himself a Sage, said, that he was not a Sage, riputare — — — — - J* — but a lover of science. amatore — sapiensa 5. Hence it came, that afterwards every student in quinci nascere (2) poiQ) ciascuno studioso — science was called a lover of science ; viz. a sapiensa * — — — — sapienza — — philosopher. 6. We may therefore remark, that it is not a title (3)* (4) per che (X) notare(2) — — — — vocabolo of arrogance, but of humility. 7. At last, Ruberto having run a great way, and the ultimamente (2) (1) — — — pezzo — — other still pursuing him, he drew his sword, as — tuttavia seguitare — tirarfuori — — * he was armed likewise, and faced about; and now (2) *(1) — altresi — rivolgersi — they began, the one to assault and the other to — — — — offendere — — — — defend himself. t This philosopher lived some time in Crotona, in the kingdom of Naples, anciently called Magna Graecia, as appears from the Bibliothcca Classica of J. Lemprieire. X See page 215, on the Infinitive. 344 8. I would advise no one to run the risk of following' — consigliare * — che arrischiarsi — andar dietro the paths of her of whom I intend to speak, -— jpedata — * ~ >_ o (3) (1) dire (2) because, neither is Fortune always disposed, nor are percio che — (2) (3) (1) — — — all men always blind in the same manner. — — ahhagliato egualmente 9. He had several iine and rich robes made, shaped after a — * ■— (2) (3) (4) (1) — al dosso * — g-irl that seemed to be of the same size giovane — par ere (^4) (1) (2) persona (Z) as the young- lady whom he intended to espouse. che — giovinetta — aver proposto — — 10. I do not think there is any things so dangerous and — — credere — — — — — grave — difficult, that a person who is thoroughly in love duhbioso — - *(4) amare {6) ferventemente (5) dares not to attempt. ardire(S) (2) a far{\) 11. This horse came to us last night, I do not know — — capitare — sera — — — whence, and we took him in, that he should not — — — mettersi — in casa — — be devoured by the wolves. 12. Though the expectation seemed tedious to him, he benche — indugio parere * grave — — waited to see if she would awake/of her own accord. \ — che svegliarsi(2)\ * * ^(0 13. Making extraordinary preparations, as if he were far '^ fare un grand e apparecchiamento * going either to France or Spain, he mounted his horse, and, attended by many of his friends, — — accompagnare — — — — went to a place about three miles off, andarsene — — luogo forse — — lontano which is called Chiassi. 345 14. The honest men, hearing- that she was of Florence, beg'an — valente — udire costei * — — — to wonder, and desired he would be so kind — maravigliarsi — * pregare * piacere as to teli them in what manner she had come — — — — — modo — * pervenire into his hands, and how he knew that she was a Florentine, 15. I never learnt so much all the time i was at — non apparare — mentre — dimorare — Paris, as you have taug-ht me in one day. — — -:- far conoscere — -— — — 16. As I imagined you had forgotten what I had * * parere * * uscir di mente — — * endeavoured to intimate to you, namely, that this ingegnarsi — dimostrare — — — — — is no wine for servants, so I was willing to remind * * ___ * famiglia volere — licordare you of it. — il 17. The pains which I have before taken, and — fatica — — — alt7'a volta imprendere — am now to underg-o, aim at no other — ancora * pigliare f^iguardare (5) (1) (2) (3) end but to drive away melancholy, and to afford (4) * — torre — — porgere (4) matter for mirth and laug-hter. allegres^a (3) (2) riso {I) 18, Though I boast it, amiable ladies, as my (3) (4) avere(5) veszoso (I) (2) * — privilege, to relate what pleases me most, yet I — — parlare * — (3) (2) (1) — intend not to-day to depart from the subject — — — — — separarsi — quello materia which you have all spoken so well — — — — (3) assai(l} acconciamente (2) upon. * Yy 346 19. God, more careful of my doing* my duty, than Iddio — sollecito {4) a (I) (2) dover(s) — I was myself, opened the eyes of my understanding, *0 — — — — — * intelletto which a mean envy had closed, — — misero — — serrare 20. He knew how to do it with more exactness and * or dine — eleg-ance of expression, than any other person. ornato parlare — — — uomo 21 . The young lady was universally admired, and every one — fanciulla — guardata da ogni uomo — — said that the Count had made a good change ; but — — — — -— — — — cambio — Griselda, in particular, highly commended her and her — in tra gli altri molto lodare — — — little brother. » 22. What troubled her most, was the consideration of — offender e(S) (2) (1) — — conoscimento — her low condition, which left her no hope« of — infimo — — — — * speranza — success. lieto fine EXERCISE XIV. 1. It is in the chamber of his thoughts, that man should * — — . *(2) deeiX) reprimand himself, and lament his defects, and not in riprendere — — piangere — — — -—0 public. pales e 2. One may reasonably believe, that, as every workman *(2) (3) (1) — — si come — maestro prefers his most perfect work to the rest, so amare — ottimo(2^ opera (\) piu * — altre — God loves the human race more than all the — __ (2) (4) persona (S) (1) — — — others. 347 3. The soul shows itself in the eyes so clearly, (3) (4) dimostrare i\) (2) — — — — manifesto that its actual passion may be known by him who — (4) joresenie (5) (6) (3) *(2) (1) chi^ considers it well. mirare(3) (2) (1) 4. What is laug-hter, but a corruscation of the pleasure — — ridere * — — dilettazione of the soul? viz. a light which appears outwardly as — — — lume apparente difuori — it is within. stare — 5. Often times, thinking to give praise, we molto — credersi (2) lode {3) alcuno{\) blame, either from the faults of the giver, or dar biasimo — * difetto — - — — — * of him who receives it. — — — - udire ^. Now you see what sort of a man he is , what would you say, if 1 were in the street, as he is, and he (were) within doors, as I am ? in casa — ■ — > — 7. The better to gain her favour, he jom(3) *(1) potere(2) avere — dimestiche^sa was every now and then making presents to her ; one day * ad ora ad ova presentare — e quando he would send her a bunch of new leeks, of X — — — ma^^uol — fresco (2) (I) — which he had the finest in the country, out of a * * m f The preposition da is understood hefove. chi, as in the preceding Exer- cise there is a pi'eposition understood before the first che of the second example, and another before the che that follows persona^ in the ninth example, which I desire the student to supply, agreeably to the analysis laid down in pages 244 and 245 ; as it will enable him to comprehend the full construction of many passages in poetry, not felt by Italians themselves. X See page 266, Rule I. Y y2 348 g'arden of bis, that he tilled with his own hands ; orto * — • — lavorare a — — e another time, a little basket of pease; and * — (uccioj canestro — baccelli — sometimes a bonch of onions or scallions. talora — — — — — scalogno 8. Putting- out the light which was in the chamber, spegnere* — — — ardere(4} (1) (2) (3) she went and hid herself in a corner of the — — * nascondere — — — angolo — • — house. ■ 9. The scholar, about the beginning of the night, had — — in sul far — — — * hid himself, along with his servant^ among the nascondere — — — fante tra — willows near to the little tower, and had seen all salcio presso di — * — ■ — (4) (1) these things. (2) (3) 10. Leaving the house all full of blood, noise, and * — — — — — — romore — confusion, they joined parties, and went directly on pianto stringersi insieme — pei'venire (^5^ to their ship /with their booty, without any (2) *(3) nave {4) \ — — rapina — — hindrance. \ impedimento)(\) 11. You are mistaken, if you think I had no other way -^ ingannarsi credere * * ' — — to attain my revenge ; I had a thousand a desiderata vendetta — * — — — others, and had laid a thousand snares, by — — — tendere — — lacciuolo * pretending to love you. mostrare — — ^- 12. When she thought it a proper time, she discovered — *(2) joarere(3) (1) • — aprire her intention to him without reserve. — — — — compiutamente 349 13. The next morning she went, by way of a — seguente — — andarsene — — — — walk, in company with another lady, to his little 'dipo7to — — — — donna — — — cottage, and caused him to be called. casetta — * — * chiamare 14. Certainly I would quarrel both with Nature and certo — maledire parimente {^) (1) — Fortune, did I not know Nature to be very wise, — * — — — discreto and Fortune to have a thousand eyes, although fools — — — — — — come che sciocco describe her as blind. figurare — cieco 15. Go away, go, blockheads that you are ; you do not know what you say, — — dirsi 16. Though he had no learning, yet he was so prompt and — * — sciensa — — — — — voluble of tongue, that such as knew him not, ottimo parlatore — chi avesse conosciuto — — would not only have considered him as some great — solamente — stimare — * un — orator, but have compared him even to Tully or rettorico — — dire lui esscre Tullio o forse Quintilian. Quintiliano 17. Though it was in August, sitting down by ancora che * d' Agosto porsi * a sedere appresso a the fire-side, he began to tell her that he was a — — ——_—__ gentleman, and worth an inc^'edible sum of — — * avere — gran quantita — money, besides what he owed to others, which danari senza — — avere a dare — — was rather more. — ansi pin che meno 350 18. Go into the g-arden, and /thou wilt find two capons, some new-laid eg-g-s, and a bottle of g-ood wineA — fresco (2) (1) fiasco — — — )(2) / under the peach-tree :\ drink of the wine, \appie' di — pesco ){\) porre hocca a — fiasco and go away, and hurt not me, nor my Gianni. — andarsi — — far male * — — (2) (1) 19. She, in truth, was an agreeable, handsome country-woman, — nel vero =- piacevole e fresco foresossa and could play upon the harpsichord, and sing, and — sapere sonare — cembalo — — — lead up a dance, better than any other in the country ; menare — — — — • — — *— — for which reason he fell so much in love — — cose — invaghirsi — forte with her, that he was almost out of his wits. ne — — menarne smanie 20. In a few days, Nicostratus having given a great ivi a -— — Nicostrato — — — — entertainment, as he used frequently to do, just desinare — spesse volte — — ed essendo as the tables were taken away, she came into the gid (2) (3) levare(\) ^^ venirsene — — hall, richly dressed, and there, in the presence of — — vestito — — — — — Nicostratus and the whole company, killed the hawk. ■ — — — — hrigata uccidere — falcone EXERCISE XV. I. He /should not be called a true philosopherA who (2) V debbe — * — — /(I) — is a friend to science from interested motives, as — * sapiensa ^ utilitd — sono lawyers, physicians, and almost all religious men, legista medico —- — — — who do not study for the sake of knowledge, but to — (1) (4) (2) sapere (3) acquire riches and honours* — moneta — 351 2. As among- the varieties of friendship, that which si come — — spezie — — — — is cemented by interest, can hardly be called — per utilita (4) meno(\) (3) dire(5} friendship; so such men /are deserving- the name of ^2) — — cotali \ partecipare * — — — philosophersx less than any others. * )(2) (1) — — — gente 3. As the efficient cause of true friendship is virtue, — (6) cagione (5) (1) (2) (3) (4) — so is truth the efficient cause of philosophy. — (3) (6) (6) (4) (1) (2) 4. Thus may one understand what is this lady of mine, and why called Philosophy ; who is a true philosopher, * ___ and who is so only from accident. -_ * — 5. First, 1 have a mind to go to Rome, and see in prima (S) (1) volere (2) — — (2) there, him whom you call God 's vicar on earth, (1) — — — dire ess er — * — and consider his ways and manners, and those of — — — modo — costume — similmente — his brother cardinals. 6. The next morning- the g-entlemen, with three of their — seguente — — giovane ' — — * servants, set out from the city, and came to the famigliare uscire * — — — pervenire — — place appointed by them. luogo ordinare (3) (I) (2) 7. I am come to spend a little time with you, for — — — — stare — pe^zo — — percid che I met with your father, who was going- to town. — trovar — ~ — — — — — 8. Between March and July following, it is supposed infra il — — {2) prossimo {\) *(2) credere{3) that /upward of a hundred thousand souls \ \ oltre * — — — creatura iimana) {}) perished in the city of Florence. essere stale di vita tolte — — — 352 9. I am your friend, who am come^ /according to the (2) (3) V secondo bring- you tiding-s of dire — novella — promise I madeA to bring- you tiding-s of the - -* - Ao- other world. 10. She sent him word, saying, That, as she had — — — — — SI come — — occasion for two hundred florins of gold, she wished bisogno * ' — — — — — — volere that he would supply her with that sum. — — prestare * li 11. I have found means that we shall have bread for more — — — modo — — — del — — — than a month ; for I have sold the tub to this man, * — — eke — — — — doglio — — whom I have brought with me. • — — - — menare — — 12. Not being' able to find what I went looking for, • — — — — — — cercare because from thence they go by water, I returned percib che da indi inld * — — tornarsene to the Holy Land. * Terra Santa 13. Some time aftervi^ards he told his wife, in general poco — appresso — — — con (2) terms, that his subjects could not bear with the parola (1) — — — — — patire * ' — daughter that was born of her. fanciulla (3) (I) (2) 14. Now he inquired of them whether there /was appresso domandare (2) V_ - _ ;(1) _ any villag-e or castle\ / in those partsN where — — - — )a^ V— - — )(i he could go. 15. That is not a thing to be regarded. * — — * curarsene 353 l6. The novel was really a g-ood one; but he, repeating — — — nel vero — hellissimo replicare the same word three, four, and six times, and now uno — — — — — — — — — beginning over again, and then mistaking one name tornare indietro — talvolta porre — — for another, mangled it to the last degree. — — guastare — fieramente 17. I do not remember ever to have received any harm mi — ricorda (3) (1) (2) — — danno on your account, but rather so much good, that, if I was worth any thing at any time, it was due to your voter e (2) (3) mai (1) — avvenire per — - merit, and the love 1 have borne to you, valore — ■ — — * — — — — — 18. That evening it happened that certain labourers of his, — — avvenire — (2) (4) (3) being come with some things from the country, and (1) — — certo — — — villa — having put their asses, without giving them — mettere — — — — — any water, into a stable, one of them, being very here — — — — — a^ino * thirsty, slipped his halter, and went smelling * trarre il capo di — capesiro — — fiutare every where to find some water. — cosa seforse trovasse * — 19. Ah, cruel man! does my crime appear so heinous — — — (3) fallo(2) parere(\) — grande to you, that neither my youth, my tears, nor my — — — — — giovanezza * — — — (2) humble entreaties, can move you? (1) priego — — — 20. Though other people commend him very come che ogni altro uomo lodarsi(ji) di(2) (3) much, I have little reason to do so (I). (1) — * potersi poco lodare — z z 354 ^1. She begg-ed of her to receive all the blows — pregare * — che — (2) guello(S) bussa{4} patiently which he should g-ive her, without making- (1) — — — — — farsi any discovery, and she would make her such conoscere percid che — * rendere — si fatto a recompense, that she should have no cause to repent. merito — — — — cagione — dolersi 22. I am convinced he has either lost his senses, — credere fermamente * — non essere in buon senno or else mistaken me ; for, as soon as he saw — che cogliere in iscamhio — percid che come me in the street, at a distance from your house, he strada poco distante — — — cosi drew his sword, and said, Villain, thou art a metier mano a * ' — — — traditor — dead man ! — EXERCISE XVI. 1. That is /worthy of great reproof, \ quella(3) cosa(4) (2) V — — moUo riprensione/(l) which, being" intended to remove some defect, does of — ordinare — torre — — * itself induce it ; as one who, being sent to — (2) quello (I) — colui — fosse — — quell a fray, should, before he departed, par tire — ^uffa e prima che partiref quella* commence another. 2. Would that it had pleased the Ruler of the *(2) (1) * — Dispensatore— — Universe, that there had never been /any cause for — _ (3) (2) (4) Ua — * my apology ;\ so neither would others have — scusa /(I) che — — (3) wronged me, nor I myself have suffered fallare(4) contra (I) (2) (2) (1) punishment unjustly^ pena — f Partire has here still the signification of to quell. 355 3. Such persons are quickly anxious, and easily satisfied ; — cotali (2) iosto(].) vago — tosto * sazio frequently joyful, and often sorrowful ; of short sono lieto — — * tristo — brieve pleasures and vexations, readily friends and suddenly dilettazione — tristizia tosto — — tosto enemies; doing* every thing like children, without — fanno(3) (I) (2) come pargolo — the use of reason. 4. I am a man /very little acquainted\ with such — — \ materiale e rozzo / (4) (1) (2) things, because I live in the old - fashioned (3) SI come colui che viversi * — antico way, and spend twelve pence for a * — lasciat^ coi^rere due soldi — ventiquattro shilling. denari 6. The rings were found so like to one another, that — — * — — simile (2) (1) — — the true one could not be distinguished. qual fosse — — sapere — * conoscere 6. Though this way be a little more unfrequented than ancorache — — — — salvatico the other, it is yet nearer to your house, and more *0 • — (2) (I) — (3) secure for you. (4) (1) (2) 7. The lady, who w'ell understood the question, now — donna — ottimamente — — dimanda thinking that she had a fit opportunity of letting parere * * * — tempo opportuno a potere him know her sentiment, boldly answered : — dimostrare — intenzione haldanzoso * — My lord, women, however they may differ in monsignore femmina quantunque variare — dress and titles, are the same here as elsewhere. vestimenti — • onore — fatto — zz2 356 8. My son, these crimes are natural, and very trivial, and * * — peccato — — — * assai leggiere — 1 would not have thee burthen thy conscience more — voglio — * * gravare — — — than is necessary. — bisognare * 9. Pamphilus has shev^red us, in his novel, the great Panfilo{4) (3) (1) ne (2) novellare — g-oodness of God, in not regarding our errors, when beni guild ■- — — — guard are a — — — they proceed from the blindness and imperfection of ^- — cosa che per not veder non si our nature. possa 10. It is not yet fifteen days since I bought this cloak * — ancora — — — — — — tabarro of Lotto the broker, and it cost me seven pounds ; * — < — rigattiere — — — -— — and I got five shillings at least by the t avem (5) paolo{Q) di (3) ben (^4) buon (1) bargain, according to what Buglietto tells me, who, mercato (2) per — (2) *(1) — — you know, is a good judge. — — eke ^ intendersi bene 11. He imagined that his wife spoke in that manner, — credere — * — dire quelle parole because he had scolded her ; for which reason he — — — garrire * — — cosa — was under no concern. non curarsi 12. The money you lent me the day before yesterday, — denari — — — — altrieri was of no service (to me), because I could not compass non aver luogo — — — — — fornir the thing on account of which J borrowed it; therefore — bisogna * — — prendere — e percid 1 brought it back immediately to your wife. — recare — qui di presente — — donna t The relation indicated by the preposition Jy, must be expressed here with a pronoun, the place of which, when intended to be supplied in Ita-; lian, is not always marked with an asterisk. t 357 33. It is to-day the feast of St. Galeone, and they do not ^ ___ ^ work ; and for that reason I have returned home at this lavorare — — * tornarsene — time of the day. ora 14. Ruberto, arising* with all haste, and taking- up his — levarsi * prestamente — prendere"^ — arms, ran to the door to see who it was, and to — — uscio — — — costui * — — take veng-eance upon him. far male * 15. Gentlemen and ladies, you must understand, that, beings — , — — — — sapere — — yef very young-, I was sent by my superior to io ancora molto — — — — — * those parts where the sun first appears, and ordered — — — (2) (3) (1) — commettere* with an express command to inquire into the — — — comandamento che io cercare — nature of porcelain. privilegi — — 16. Child, if disagreeable persons offend thee Jlgliuola — spiacevole (4) dispiacere (3) (2) so much, and thou art willing to be at ease, never (1) se -^ voter e viver lieto giammai{2) / look at thyself.\ \specchiare — /(I) 17. It is / always \ a g-ood thing-, most worthy (3) Kin ogni parte) Qi) bello(\) (2) valor oso ladies, to be able to speak well ; but I hold it — * saper — (2) (1) reputare — best of all to know how to do it when betlissimo quivi sapere * — — — < dove need requires. necessitd * richiedere 18. Sir, this horse of yours has too uneasy a trot; I beg- you will set me down. porre — a pie' 358 19. I know not whether 1 should term it a vice, accidental, — — — — midicachesia — (2) (1) and owing- to the depravity of our — sopravvenuto in noi per malvagitd — manners, or whether it be not rather a natural costume o pure — e nella natura infirmity, to laug-h sooner at bad things, than those peccato * — — di cattivo — — ^ which are good, especially when they no way — e — — quelle non concern ourselves. appartenere * — 20. I intend, together with this my companion, to take a — — — — -^ — — — desinar neighbourly dinner with thee to-day. domesticamente (3^ (2) (1) stamane EXERCISE XVII. 1. The thing which most adorns and commends human quello — — — — — — — operations, and which most directly leads them to a — ' — — — diritto* menare — good end, is the possession of such dispositions as are requisite to the intended purpose. ordinato — — inteso fine 2. For the purposes of horsemanship,/ firmness of mind, * — fine — cavalleria \franchessa — animo and strength of body,\ are requisite. ^foriessa-^ — )(3) (1)* (2) 3. Every thing is virtuous in its nature, which does that ciascuno — — — — — - — — for which it is intended ; and /it is the more * _____ ordinare Vo (2) (1)* (3) virtuous,\ /the better it performs it.\ — )(2)\^meglio fare —/(I) 359 4. Lang-uag-e, which is intended to express human sermone — — — — manifestare (2) conception, is virtuous when it does so; and that concetloO)— — — {;l) quello (I) -— (4) is more virtuous, which does it best. (3)(1) (2) - (3) (2)pi«(l) 5. The beautiful lady, who had long been the sport _ „ _ _ (5) (1) (6) trastullo {2) of Fortune, the time now drawing- near when (3) (4) (2) termine(^) appressarsi (l) * her sorrows were to have an end, as soon as she saw — male dovere — — — — — — — Antigonus, remembered that she had seen him in Antigono cost 7'icordarsi * — _ — her father 's service. — — — servigi 6. Though the Jew was well read in the Jewish law, come che — — — un gran maestro — — he began to be greatly pleased with Giannotto 's * — * forte * * — — arguments. dimostrazione 7. In the first place, I declare Parmeno, Dioneo 's primieramente (2) (1) constituire — — — servant, master of my household ; to Chimera, famigliar mio siniscalco — — Lauretta 's woman, and Stratilia, Fiammetta 's, I — — fante — — — — give the care of the ladies' chambers. commettere — governo - — — donna — — 8. After that, I pray to God and him to send me / a good — * — — — — — che dare — \ — — lodgingx /at night. lodgmgx /at nigni.x albergo)(2)\* — )(\) Though Fortune had given him a very mean quantunque — — — — — assai(2) umile{Z) employ, yet, in this respect, she had been so arteQ) (2) quella(Z) (4) (5) (1) kind to him, that he had grown very rich. benigno — — — — * divenire — 360 10. She was so disagreeable, tiresome, and fretful, that — —• — dispiacevole sassievole — stissoso — nothing' could be done to her taste; and as proud as — * ^ — guisa — — altiero — • if she had been of the blood royal of France. 11. Dost thou think I will suffer thee to pawn my — credere — * * impegnare — gown and my other clothes ? gonnella — (2) (1) panni 12. As it often happens that Fortune hides — — spesso (2) avvenire (1) — — < nascondere under mean trades very g-reat virtues, so are — vile arte — — — * very great geniuses found sometimes maraviglioso (2^ ingegno(3) (1) essere — lodged by Nature in the most deformed and stato — — riposto sotto turpissime forme mis-shapen bodies. d' uomini 13. I have kept it a long time from you, for fear of — — tacere — huona pesza vi per non disobliging you; but now I see other people fare noia — — — accorgersi * take notice of it. avvedersi — 14. This courteous visit of yours is much more welcome — liberate venuta * — troppo — caro to me than if I had /all that I have already wasted, \ — — ■ — *(4) \ quanta — <■ — spender e/(S) returned to me, to spend over again. dare(5) (3) (6)* (7) da (I) capo (2) 15. Pretending not to know him, she sat down at far sembiante — —»._— — o porsi a sedere -~ his feet. * 361 16. Rinaldo, without knowing- who his antagonist was, or — — — — — avversario si — — being- able to do him any harm, left him alone, for — offendere — d' — cosa — — stare — fear of being- known, and returned, full of tema — — — — tornarsene (4) (1) (2) wrath, to his own house. mal talento (3) verso ~ — 17. I can tell you of nothing- which has never — saprei insegnare — cosa — * — yet been seen ; but, if you please, I can tell — — — — * — — * insegnerd bene you of a thing- which I believe you never saw. ~ una — — — * _ (2) (1) 18. I rather conceive that to be a forg-e for — piutosto(2^ avere{\) — per — fucina di diabolical operations, than for things divine. 19. Many a time did he try with his head and shoulders * (2) tentare{\) _ * — — — . if he could raise it up, but in vain. — — levare — — 20. In the space of a year, he took so many Turk 's — — — prendere — - — — vessels, that he found he had not only got legno — — trovarsi *(3) (1) (2) racquistare his own again, but made it/ more than N — — * raddcppiarei^) i2)\di gran lung a/ (I) double. 21. He desired him, as he was going towards Tuscany, pregare — che poi * (3) (1) (2) to make one of his company, because gli piacesse d'essere — avvegna che he was likewise travelling thither. — similmente (2) andare (S) la (I) 3 a 362 22. Though /the honest man who reproved master come che \ — - valente — — trajiggere messer lo Inquisitor A did well ; yet I esteem him much — /(3) (2) (1) (2) *(6) assai(l) more to be commended, of whom I am g'oing' to (3) * (4) lodare (5) -^ — — * speak. dire 23. Abraham the Jew g-oes to the court of Rome, and seeing* Abraam — — — in — — — — — the wickedness of the clergy there, returns to Paris, — malvagita cherici tornare — — and becomes a Christian. — farsi — — 24. The girl was twelve years old, and the prettiest — fanciulla * — — * hello creature that ever was seen, and the boy six. cosa — — * — — — fanciullo * 25. He was tall in person, and handsome, agreeable in — — — delta — — bello piacevole — his countenance, of a graceful behaviour, and — viso e — maniere assai graziose — a middle-aged man. giovane di mes.za eta EXERCISE XVIII. 1. If those who departed this life a thousand years ago, should return to their countries, they would think — _— — cittade credere them to be occupied by a strange people, on account of __ __ (2) gente(}) * the language differing from theirs. — lingua discordante (3) (1) (2) 363 2. That thing we say is beautiful, wherein the parts — — uomo(2) (1) * — cui — — exactly correspond with one another ; because, by their debito* rispondere — — — harmony, pleasure is produced. — risultare piacimento 3. Man appears therefore beautiful, when his limbs (3) (2) onde (^l) essere — — — — are proportionate, rispondere (2) debilamente {\) 4. We call singing- beautiful, when the voices, dire (2) (1) — — — di quello according to the requisites of art, are accordant secondo — debito — — — rispondente (2) (one with another. \ intra se ^ (0 5. These are not proper things, either to be said or — — — conveniente (2) (1) * * — * to be heard by respectable women. * ascoltare ad onesto — 6. These arches are the abodes of the dead, which he calls our territories ; to show us, that w^e, and all other — casa — dimostrare — — — — — — people ignorant and unlearned, are, compared uomini idioto — non letterato — a comparasion to him and other men of letters, worse than dead men. * — — — — scienziato — — (2) (I) 7. Having brought that art again to light, which — egli ritornare (3) (4) in (I) luce (2) — had lain buried for many ages under the errors of such — stato — — — secolo — — — — * as aimed more to captivate the eyes of the ignorant * intendere — — dilettar — — * than to please the understandings of the learned, — — compiacere * — intelletlo * — — savio * he may be deservedly called one of the lights of the — - * meritamente dire — — — luce Flbreritine glory. Fiorentino — 3 a2 364 8. Then he asked him whether he was a lost person ? to poi — — — — — — — — whom the other answered, "Those things only are lost, - - - - (3) (4) (2)(1) which cannot be foond ; and if that was my case, how should [ be here V 9. Son, comfort thyself, and think only of thy recovery ; — — — — — — gue7'ire for I promise thee that, the first thing* I do to-morrow, . „ . *' „^ I will go for it, and bring it to thee. 10. The next day he sent a boy to her — seguente(2) (1) — — — fanciullo — c?^(2) /e«(3) house, desiring her to lend him the stone mortar; (1) pregare — che — — — — * — adding, that he had two neighbours to dine with — -— suoi — (3) (4) (2) him, and he intended to make some sauce. (1) sicche — voter e — — * — 11. Neither have I, nor ever had, any one in whom I *(2) (3) (I) di - - placed, or place, such confidence as I repose Jidarsi (2) (3) Jidare(4) tanto (^l) * — fidarsi in Anichino. * 12. Get up, I will do thee no harm ; only tell me how levare — — — — — — ma — — — thou earnest hither, and upon what account. * 13. This worthy man, to whom you mavried me in — valente — — — — per moglie dare — — an ill hour, who calls bimself a merchant, and mia mat' or a — — — — — — who should be more temperate than a hermit, there — dovere — — — — — religiose are few nights but he goes to one tavern or other. — — set^a * — — per 365 14. 1 will have her painted in such a manner, that — ci * — dipingere — — — neither you, nor any one else, shall be able to say — — - — — potere (2) hereafter, that 1 have never been acquainted with her. piu (1) — — — — conoscere — 15. Both by sea and land, for a rich person as you are, it ^ — — ad — — uomo — — — ci is full of dangers. — — — pericolo 16. When he offered to go away, she declared that she volendosi egli partire — dire — would by no means suffer it ; for Naples was not in — guisa — — percib che — — — a place to walk in during the night, — terra * andare vi per entro di — especially for a foreigner. e massimamente a — forestiero 17. The nurse was exceedingly sorrowful at the loss of her — halia — oltremodo dolente * — — — — mistress, and the low state of life to which she saw donna — — misera fortuna in — — herself and the children now reduced. — — — — cadere 18. Amongst these was the unfortunate Landolpho, who, intra — — — misero Landolfo — though he had wished for death / a thousand ancora che *(4) chiamare{S) ^2) V — — times the day before, \ rather than return home a — — — davantij (1) — — — — — beggar, now seeing her at hand, was terrified. povero — — presto * aver paura 19. The lady having now reposed herself (3) (4) appresso(\) que8to(2) (6) (7) a little, having ordered a great fire to be made in a (5) - • _ • __ hall, she came thither, and inquired camminata venirsene(2) inquella(l^ — — respecting the honest man. che fosse di — buono — 366 20. Turning /with a merry countenance\ to rivolgersi'^(^4)\ — — lieto viso /(VyversoQl) her, he said. Madam, are only hens bred in this (3) — dama nascere (4) (5) (1) (2) country, and no cocks? joae6-e(3) sensa (2) gallo(l) 21. If all the sins that ever were committed by men, or can (2) (1) fare be committed whilst the world lasts, were in one * fare mentre che — — durera — — — person, if that person was thoroughly penitent, as uom solo ed egli * — pentito e contrito -— I see you are, so great is God 's mercy> that — * ~ — -■=-- misericordia — they would all be forgiven. t — — 22. Having purchased a light little vessel fit for * comperare — sottile (2) legnetto (1) * a pirate, he armed and furnished it with corseggiare (2) (3) guernire (4) quello (1) d' every thing proper for that purpose, and began to — — opportuno * tal servigio — darsi — make / other people 's goods\ his own. — \di ogni uomo * roba / (2) (1) EXERCISE XIX. 1. He who knows any thing generally, does not know it — — , — — — iji genere — — — perfectly; as he who distinguishes an animal at — — — conoscere (2) (3) a distance ; for he does not know whether it is a * (1) perche — ^ _^ * — dog, a wolf, or a buck. — — — -. hecco t Let this pronoun be the object in the translation, God the subject understood, and supply the relation of tendency. 2. Every thing* proceeding- in an inverse order is ciascuno — che procedere * — perversa — laborious, and, consequently, / not pleasing*,\ — — per conseguente \ e — dolce / (2) /but disagreeable A as sleeping during the day, and \ ^ amaro '^(l) — — * — — — sitting up at night, and retrograding instead of advancing. vegghiare * — — andare indietro e non innanzi 3. For the subject to command the sovereign, is to proceed (2) (3) (1) * — — procedere in an inverse order ; as the proper order is for the * — (2) (1) che — diritto(2) (1) — — sovereign to command the subject. - (3) (1) (2) 4. I advise that you return home, and get to * parere — — tornarsene — — andarsene — bed, having yourself covered up close, whilst you — * — (2) ben{\) e che — send for the doctor. — medico 5. Not long after, he had counterfeit letters come from - (2) (1) » (2) (1) - - Rome, and pretended w^ith his subjects, that the Pope — — • far veduto a — — — — — thereby had dispensed with his marrying another * — — seco di poter iorre — woman. moglie 6. As she had withstood other strokes of fortune, so she — — sostenere — ingiuria — — — determined to support this with a firm countenance. disporsi — sostenere — — viso 7. Being arrived in England, he found his son to be a venire — — — — — — — great lord ; which was very agreeable to him. — — * aggradire forte — — 368 8. Friar Onion promises some country-people to show — Cipolla — * — contadini — — them the feather of the angel Gabriel ; instead of — — — — — — Gabriello in luogo — which, finding- coals, he says, They are some of those that roasted St. Lawrence. — arroBtire — Lorenzo 9. Take this candle, honest man, and see whether it tenere — lume buono — — guatare — — ■ is clean to thy liking. — netto modo 10. Sir, cranes have only one leg and foot; it is — grwt non — che — coscia — gamba — — as I tell you ; and I will convince you whenever you — — far vedere — quando * please. 11. Though he had felt the most exquisite torture, and — — sostenere gravissimo pena — complained much of it, as the tooth was rammaricarsi (2} (1) — poichb — — n' — out, he thought himself cured ; and the pain — * par ere esser guarito — (2) (3) being abated, he went out of the chamber. (1) alleviare uscirsi — — — 12. Pampinea then said, with a smile, " See, fortune is — — — sorridendo ecco che — — with us, and has thrown in our way three favorevole — — * — porre d' avanti — prudent and worthy gentlemen, who will conduct discreto (2^ valoroso(Z) giovane(l) — essere guida and wait upon us, if we do not refuse to accept e servidore ne — schifare* — prendergli of their service.'^ a quest' ufficio f Nouns ending in «, do not change their termination in the plural. 869 13. I believe he may say that I bear words with more* — — — potere — — — porlare — — — patience than thou dost deeds. - - - ' C^) (0 14. Mr. Lizio, who was a man of g-ood understanding-, messer — — (3) (2) intendente(\) without any farther explanation, easily understood — — alt^'o dimostra^ione ottimo"^ — what Richard meant to say/ and, smiling, replied, — (3) volereQl) dir{\) — sorridere rispondere " Well hast thou set forth thy losses and virtue, assai bene — — mostrare — danno — as well as my avarice."' 15. Causing* him to be sent for, he g-ave him a * — * chiamare gravissimamente severe rebuke, and ordered him to be put in riprendere — comandare * mettere — prison. carcere 16. I do not know any man, of what quality soever, who — — — — — si alto affare * would not value you; much more, therefore, shall dovere — esser caro * non die I, who am but a mean trader. * — — — piccol mercatante 17. Thoug-h he most earnestly desired what Amerigo now — — fervente'^ — — — offered him, and saw himself in his power, yet did he __ ______ __ forse by no means dissemble what his brave soul in — parte piegare — (3) generoso (l) animo (2) prompted him to utter. mostrare * — dire 18. You will now hear what /will surprise you\ — tosto(2) (1) cosa che \far maravigliare — /(2) more ; namely, that I am your sister. (I) cioe — — * — — 3 B 370 19. There the king, being served with many dishes^ quivi — — — (2) *(3) (4) mcs«o (5) one after another, and with the most costly wines, succe8sivamente(\) — • — vini ottimi e presiosi and looking sometimes at the beautiful marchioness, — riguardare talvolta — — — was extremely pleased. » avere sommo piacere 20. You know, better than any other, that whoever desires — — — — — — — — volere to live honestly and well, must avoid, / as much as (3) (2) (1) — fuggire(2)\in * in him lies,'\ all occasions which may lead potere ^(1) ogni cagione — — condurre him to act otherwise. — — fare — 21. Though great things have been already treated of, — — — — — avanti (2) dire (I) yet I purpose to relate a story no less true — intendere — raccontare — novella — — — than lamentable. — pietoso EXERCISE XX. 1. In order more plainly to understand the literal sense a — chiaro* vedere — (2) sentenza{l) at which we now aim, it is necessary to know — — * — intendere — da — who, and how many, are those who are called to my audience. 2. In every kind of speech, the speaker must chiefly — — maniera — sermone — - dicitore — massimo* aim at persuasion. 371 3. In every thing-, natural and artificial, it is impossible — ciascuno — — — — — — to proceed, if, first of all, the foundation be not * — —-—00 (4) fondamento (5) (2) (1) laid down, as in building a house, or in prosecuting study. fare (3) la — e — studiare 4. When one says, man iives, we must understand that man — * — — vivere * — — — exercises reason, which is his special life, and the act usare — — speziale — — — of his noble part. 5. He who departs from reason, and uses his sensitive — -_ partir8i(3) (1) (2) — — (2) (4) part only, does not live as a man, but as a beast. (3)jowre(l) — — — vivere — — 6. Since the immortality of the soul is here mentioned, pero che di — — — toccare I will make a digression, and reason upon it. — — — ragionando * — 7. Of all follies, that is most foolish, base, and intra — bestialitade — — * stolto vile* — injurious, of him who thinks that after this life dannoso * — — credere — • — — there is not another. — * — altra vita 8. If we peruse the writings of philosophers, as well — — rivolgere — scrittura — Jilosofo as of other learned authors, w^e shall find all — — — savio scrittore — agree in this: that there is in us some concordare* — — *(3) (1) (2) — eternal part. perpetuate (2) (1) 9. If all were deceived, an impossibility would follow, — — — ingannare (2) (3) s e guitar e (\) which still would be horrible to describe. — pure (3) (4) (1) ritrarre (2) 3b2 372 10. Every one is persuaded that human nature is — _- _ certo — (2) (1) — the most perfect of all others here below; and perfettissimo — nature di — — — this no one denies. — — negare 11. As many creatures living- are entirely mortal, pero che — che — (2) (^1) — as brutes, and all, as long- as they live, si come animale hruto — — mentre che — are without any hope of a future life; if our hope were vain, our imperfection would be greater than that -_ __ (3) difetto{4) (2) (1) — of any other animal, for this reason : that there have — — — — con do sia cosa — *(3) been already many men who have given up this life for (4) (2) (1) - - - that which is to come. — 12. Thus it would follow, that the most perfect animal, — seguitare — — perfettissimo — which is man, would be the most imperfect ; which is impossible; and that that part, reason, which is his greatest perfection, would be the cause of his — (2) (1) ^ a lui — — greatest defect. 13. Again, it would follow, that Nature, in prejudice to ancora — — — contra herself, had infused this hope in the human mind ; - (8)/,orre(7) (I) (2) (3) (4) (6) (5) since we have said, that many sought /for poiche ♦ *(2) (1) — — essere (2) corso (3) \ * the death of the body,\ to live in the other life ; _ ^(1) _ _ and that again is impossible. (2) (1) _ 373 14. Again we have a continual proof of our — vedere — — esperienza — — immortality in the prophecies of our dreams, which — — — divinazione — — — — could not be, if there was not in us any immortal (3) (2) (1) - (7) (6) (1) (2) (3) (5) part. (4) 15. Ag-ain we are confirmed in it by the most veritable — ne accertare — * vero (2) doctrine of Christ, which is at once guide, truth, and (1) — _ ^ — via — — light. luce 16. I say that this doctrine assures us beyond any other (3) (4) (1) (2) far certo ne sopy^a — — reason; because thereby is given us that which — pero che (3) (4) (2) quella{\) — sees and measures our immortality. (3) (4) (5) (1) immortalitade (2) 17. Which we cannot perfectly see, whilst our immortal — — — — — mentre che — — part is mixed up with the mortal; but we see (4) mischiato {5) (I) (2) (3) — Q — it perfectly by faith. - (3) (1) (2) 18. We see it by reason also, but with a shade of (5) (4) (1) (2) anche(S) — — — — — obscurity, which is produced by the mixture of the oscuritade — incontrare — — — — mortal with the immortal. 19. And this must be a very powerful proof that there — — — — potente argomento — — is /in us both the one and the other.\ *(2)\ * ^(l) 374 20. Thus I believe, thus I affirm, thus I am certain it is, — -- — — — — (2) (1) and that /from this life I shall pass\ /to another — \dopo — passare /(2) V-r- — better,\ there, where that lady lives, of mta — / (1) — ove — donna — — whom my soul was enamoured, - (3) (2) (1) - INDEX. A A, an^ one, tlieir syntax, 86, 87. About, a preposition, how translated, 185, 194, 195c Adjectives, 48 — of quantity, tlieir syntax, 49 to 51. Adverbs, 235 — their syntax, 232. Age, hqw indicated in Italian, 89, 90. Alphabet, 1. Any, any body, any whatever, &c. their syntax, 75 to 80. Apostrophe, when used, 276, 277. Articles, how many, 23 — their conjunction with prepositions, 24 — their application, 25 to 34. As much, as many, &c. comparative terms, 65. At, a preposition, 18, 19, 188 — At that very moment , how rendered, 107. AuGMENTATiVES and Diminutives, 56 to 58. Auxiliary Verbs, to have and to be, 4 — their syntax, 157 to 162 — To be, used for many verbs in Italian, which are conjugated with to have, in English, 174, 175, 255, 256, 282. B Between, among, prepositions, 201. Both, how rendered, 80. Bttt, a conjunction, its syntax, 243. By, a preposition, 19, 20, 188. C Comparatives, of Equality, 65 — of Superiority and Inferiority, 68. Conditional Mood, its syntax, 209. Conjugations of Regular Verbs, 7. Conjunctions, 245 — their syntax, 246, 247. Conjunctive Adjectives, their syntax, 112 to 118. Could J, should I, had I, how expressed, 241, 242. D Date of the Month, how marked in Italian, 87. Demonstrative Adjectives, their syntax, 104 to 108. Demonstrative Pronouns, their syntax, 136 to 142. 376 INDEX. E Each, every, each other, one another, &c. 75 to 80, 129. Either, how translated, 80. Ever, an adverb, 234, 235. Exercises, their disposition, 20 — ProwtVewotw JE^^rerme*, Introduction, 293^ F Far from, an English idiom, how rendered, 250, Farther, further, how translated, 71. -For, a preposition, 20, 197, 198. Former and latter, how expressed, 141. From, a preposition, 19, 188. G Genders, Masculine and Feminine, 11, 12. Genitive Case, as commonly called, how rendered, 17. H Half, how used, 89, He, him, her, pronouns, 122 — their syntax, 123 to 131 — He who, him whom, &c. 138. Here, an adverb, its syntax, 161, 233. Here I am, here it is, &c. how translated, 43. Herein, hereby, &c. how rendered, 117, 118. Himself, herself, 123 to 131. How much, how many, how great, &c. 49 — their syntax, 50, 51 — how, followed by another adjective, 235 — before an infinitive, 259. However rich, however poor, &c. how rendered, 199. I Jf, a conjunction, its syntax, 240 to 243. Idioms and Irregularities most frequent in Italian, 254 to 261. . Imperative Mood, its syntax, 208, In, into, prepositions, 19, 199. In order to, how supplied, 198, Interjections, 248 to 250. It, a pronoun, how rendered, 108, 122, 127, 128, 141. It is I, it is thou, &c. how translated, 159, 160 — It is he, it is she, it is they, 140 — It is a week, it is a year, two years, &c. 161, 162 — It is for you, it is for me, &c. it is your turn, &c, 223, 224 — // is cold, it is warm, &c. 224. Just then, how translated, 107. INDEX, 377 L Let^ not rendered when it is auxiliary, 6. Lest, how supplied, 215. Longer y Kow rendered, 71. M Moods anrf Tenses, their syntax, 207 to 21G, More^ most, comparative terms, their syntax, 68 to 72 — most, when not preceded by the article, 226. Much, mani/y adjectives of quantity, 49. Ml/, thy, &c. mine,. thine, &c. possessive adjectives, 94 to 100. N Neither, kow translated, 80, 241 to 243. No, no one, Jiot any, nothing, their syntax, 75 to 7'^. Nor, a conjunction, its syntax, 241 to 243. Number, Singular anc? Plural, 12 to 15. Numeral Adjectives, 85 — their syntax, 86 to 90. Never, an adverb, its syntax, 234, O Object, a technical word in Grammar, 15. Of, a preposition, 17, 18, 183. Of one's own accord, how supplied, 194. Of little account, of great account, «&c. how supplied, 192, On account of, out of, how supplied, 198. Or, a conjunction, 243, 247. Orthography, 276 to 281. Others, another person, other people, 138, 139. P Participles Present, their syntax, 165 to 168. Participles Past, their syntax, 172 to 176. Perfect and Imperfect Tenses, 5 — their syntax, 266 to 270. Personal Nouns, 37— their application, 39 to 43. Point of Tendency, a technical word in Grammar, 39. Possessive Adjectives, 94 — their syntax, 94 to 100. Prepositions, their definition and literal translation, 16 to 20 their syn^ tax, 180 to 201. — Words called Prepositions, 230, 231 — their svntax, 228 to 230. Preterite, a tense, 5 — its syntax, 266 to 270. Pronouns, 122 — their syntax, 122 to 131. Pronunciation, most remarkable sounds of the Italian language, 2, 3. 3c 378 INDEX. R Relations, a technical word in grammar, 16 — their syntax, 16 to 20. Relative Pronouns. — See Conjunctive Adjectives^ 112. Retrenchment, when used in Italian, 278 to 280. She^ a pronoun, 122»— ^Ae who^ 138. SOf so muchi so many, &c. terms of comparison, 65 — their syntax, 65 to 67. Some, somebody, &c. their syntax, 75 to 11 . Subject, a technical word in grammar, 15. Subjunctive Mood, its syntax, 210 to 215. Such, as, how rendered, 105, 106, 114. Such-a-one, how rendered, 114. Superlatives, their syntax, 71, Than, its definition, 70— its syntax, 68 to 70. That, its definition, 245— when not expressed in Italian, 215, 216, 247—" when it must be supplied, 162, 210, 214, 215, 243, 247. The, the article, 23 — its application, 25 to 34. The more, the less, terms of comparison, 65, They, them, pronouns, 122— their syntax, 123 to 131-— 7%ey, them, refer* ring to things, 108, 140. There, an adverb, its syntax, 161, 233- Therein, thereby, thereon, &c. how rendered, 117, 118. These two months , these three years, &c. how translated, 161, 162. This, that, these, those, demonstrative adjectives, 104 to 108. This man, that woman, these people, &c. demonstrative pronouns, 136 to 138. Through, s preposition, 20,' 96, 97. To, a preposition, 17, 18, 185 to 188—when npt expressed before an infini- tive, 30, 261, To BE, auxiliary verb, its conjugation, 4—- its syntax, 157 to 162, 174, 175, 255, 256, 282-— when supplied by the particle si, 146 to 153. To he thirsty, to he hungry, to he cold, to he warm, &c. how expressed, 256. To HAVE, auxiliary verb, its conjugation, 4 — its syntax, 157 to 162, 222, 255, 256. To get, to desire, to cause, to order, &c. their syntax, 222, To like, to please, to tire, to think, to happen, &c. their syntax, 254 — To b^ necessary, to he obliged, 254. INDEX. 379 V Verbs, Auxiliary, 4— Regular, 7 — Irregular, first conjugation, 282 — second conjugation, 283 to 290 — third conjugation, 290 to 292. Upon this, upon that y how translated, 107, W What, how rendered, 106, 115, 116. Whatever he, &c. how rendered, 199. When, instead of in which, when it happens, 117, 118. Wherein, whcrefrom, whereby, &c. how translated, 117. Whether, a conjunction, how supplied, 247. Which, who, whose, whom, Slc. their syntax, 112 to 118. With, a preposition, 17, 19, 185, 200. Whole, how rendered, 76, Table of some Particles which perform several parts in Gramynar, and the distinguishing of which, will be useful for the Student. Da, preposition, 19. Da', retrenchment of (/az, preposition and article, 25, 100. Da, a form of the verb dare, to give, 283. Gli, plural article, 23. Gli, singular pronoun, relation of tendency, 122. Gli, plural pronoun, object, 122. Le, article, 23. Le, singular pronoun, relation of tendency, 122, Le, plural pronoun, object, 122. Ne, preposition, instead of in, 24. Ne' , retrenchment of nei, preposition and aiticle, 25, 100. Ne, personal noun, used instead of ci, 43. Ne, pronoun indicating point of depart, 42, 127 — relation of qualifica- tion, 127. Ne, conjunction, negative, 241. Si, pronoun, 38, 124, Si, a peculiar particle, 146. St, term of comparison, 65. Si, affirmative. — See the Note, page 312. N. B. By this Table, the Student may also perceive how important it is to mark those particles with the accent or the apostrophe, when required. dTiniJJ. B. MMillau, Printer, Uow Street, Covcnt Gaitlcn. 63 4 if ^^•^ ■''t .^ "*« ^J'/^- '-^0 v^-V- Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. Neutralizing agent: IViagnesium Oxide Treatment Date: August 2006 u PreservationTechnologies A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 1 1 1 Thomson Park Dnve Cranberry Township, PA 16066 (724)779-2111 >^^ '•^&"-" vV ci-, /' vX""^ ^ #- .^5 ^^=,'^- N*^"-^ _' % * tp ,^ W' s> %-i If. '111 if; '